FREE ENGLISH SIEMENS SINUMERIK 808D ADVANCED (01) PDF USER GUIDE

FREE ENGLISH SIEMENS SINUMERIK 808D ADVANCED (01) PDF USER MANUAL

FREE ENGLISH SIEMENS SINUMERIK 808D ADVANCED (01) PDF OWNER GUIDE

FREE ENGLISH SIEMENS SINUMERIK 808D ADVANCED (01) PDF OWNER MANUAL

FREE ENGLISH SIEMENS SINUMERIK 808D ADVANCED (01) PDF REFERENCE GUIDE

FREE ENGLISH SIEMENS SINUMERIK 808D ADVANCED (01) PDF INSTRUCTION GUIDE

FREE ENGLISH SIEMENS SINUMERIK 808D ADVANCED (01) PDF REFERENCE MANUAL

FREE ENGLISH SIEMENS SINUMERIK 808D ADVANCED (01) PDF INSTRUCTION MANUAL

FREE ENGLISH SIEMENS SINUMERIK 808D ADVANCED (01) PDF OPERATING INSTRUCTIONS

CLICK HERE TO DOWNLOAD SIEMENS SINUMERIK 808D ADVANCED (01) PDF MANUAL

If this is not the document you want for this product, click here to see if we have any other documents for this product.

SIEMENS SINUMERIK 808D ADVANCED (01) PDF SUMMARY:

What are some safety instructions?

Observe the safety instructions given in the hardware documentation.
Consider the residual risks for the risk evaluation.

What are the risks of incorrect or changed parameterization?

Incorrect or changed parameterization can result in machine malfunctions, leading to injuries or death.

How can the risks of incorrect or changed parameterization be minimized?

Protect the parameterization (parameter assignments) against unauthorized access.
Respond to possible malfunctions by applying suitable measures (e.g. EMERGENCY STOP or EMERGENCY OFF).

What is the proper usage of Siemens products?

Siemens products may only be used for the applications described in the catalog and in the relevant technical documentation. If products and components from other manufacturers are used, these must be recommended or approved by Siemens. Proper transport, storage, installation, assembly, commissioning, operation and maintenance are required to ensure that the products operate safely and without any problems. The permissible ambient conditions must be complied with. The information in the relevant documentation must be observed.

Who should operate the product/system described in the PDF?

Only personnel qualified for the specific task in accordance with the relevant documentation, in particular its warning notices and safety instructions, should operate the product/system.

Who are qualified personnel?

Qualified personnel are those who, based on their training and experience, are capable of identifying risks and avoiding potential hazards when working with these products/systems.

What is the hotline number for technical support in Germany?

+49 911 895 7222

What is the hotline number for technical support in China?

+86 400 810 4288

Where can the EC Declaration of Conformity for the EMC Directive be found?

It can be found on the Internet at http://www.siemens.com/automation/service&support. Enter the number “67385845” as the search term or contact your local Siemens office.

What are the general safety instructions?

If the safety instructions and residual risks in the associated hardware documentation are not observed, accidents involving severe injuries or death can occur.

What are the industrial security risks?

Software manipulations (e.g. viruses, trojans, malware, or worms) can cause unsafe operating states that may lead to death, serious injury, and property damage.

How can industrial security risks be minimized?

Keep the software up to date.
Incorporate the automation and drive components into a holistic, state-of-the-art industrial security concept for the installation or machine.
Make sure that you include all installed products into the holistic industrial security concept.
Protect files stored on exchangeable storage media from malicious software with suitable protection measures, e.g. virus scanners.

How can you create a screenshot of the actual user interface?

Press the key combination: <CTRL + P>

How can you save start-up archives and action logs to a USB stick?

Press the key combination: <CTRL + S>

How can you display pre-defined slides on the screen?

Press the key combination: <CTRL + D>

How can you save action logs to a USB stick?

Press the key combination: <ALT + D>

How can you call the calculator function when you position the cursor on the desired input field?

Press the “+” key.

How can you open the system data operating area?

Press the “SYSTEM” key.

How can you move the cursor to the beginning of the selected program block in the program editor?

Press the “Cill” key.

How can you toggle between entries in the input field?

Press the “*” key.

How can you enter the “Set-up menu” dialog box at NC startup?

Press the “*” key.

How can you enable user-defined extension applications?

Press the “CUSTOM” key.

What does the key combination <CTRL + cursor key> do?

It changes the screen backlight brightness by an increment of 10% (brightness range: 10% to 100%). Note: After you release the key combination, the HMI saves your brightness setting and the brightness bar disappears after a few seconds.

What are the different PPU versions and their corresponding technology/operator panel variants and applicable control systems?

PPU Version	Technology Variant	Operator Panel Variant	Applicable Control System
PPU161.3	Turning variant	Horizontal panel, with English keys	SINUMERIK 808D ADVANCED T (Turning)
		Horizontal panel, with Chinese keys
	Milling variant	Horizontal panel, with English keys	SINUMERIK 808D ADVANCED M (Milling)
		Horizontal panel, with Chinese keys
PPU160.2	Turning variant	Vertical panel, with English keys	SINUMERIK 808D ADVANCED T (Turning)
		Vertical panel, with Chinese keys
	Milling variant	Vertical panel, with English keys	SINUMERIK 808D ADVANCED M (Milling)
		Vertical panel, with Chinese keys
PPU141.2	Turning variant	Horizontal panel, with English keys	SINUMERIK 808D (Turning)
		Horizontal panel, with Chinese keys
	Milling variant	Horizontal panel, with English keys	SINUMERIK 808D (Milling)
		Horizontal panel, with Chinese keys

How can you set the user interface language?

From the main menu, select the “Setting data” menu item.
In this menu item, set the desired language.

How can you create a tool?

Select the “Offset” operating area.
Select the “Tool data” menu item.
Select the “Tool” sub-menu item.
Select “New” from the softkey menu.
Enter the tool number T.
Enter the tool length L.
Enter the tool radius R.
Save the values by pressing the “OK” softkey.

How can you create/change a cutting edge?

Select the “Offset” operating area.
Select the “Tool data” menu item.
Select the “Cutter comp” sub-menu item.
Select “New” from the softkey menu if you want to create a cutting edge, or select the number of the cutting edge to be changed.
Enter the cutting edge number D.
Enter the cutting edge length L.
Enter the cutting edge radius R.
Enter the angle CR.
Enter the orientation of the cutting edge OR.
Save the values by pressing the “OK” softkey.

How can you activate the tool and the spindle?

Select the “Machining” operating area.
Enter the tool number in the “Tool” input field.
Enter the cutting edge number in the “Cutter comp” input field.
Press the “Spindle start” key to activate the spindle.

How can you assign the handwheel through the MCP?

Press the “Handwheel” key.

How can you assign the handwheel through the PPU?

Select the “Machining” operating area.
Select “Handwheel” from the softkey menu.

How can you measure the tool manually?

Move the tool to a fixed point (e.g., the machine table).
Select the “Offset” operating area.
Select the “Tool data” menu item.
Select the “Tool measurement” sub-menu item.
Select the “Length” menu item if you want to measure the tool length, or select the “Radius” menu item if you want to measure the tool radius.
Select the “Manually” softkey.
The distance from the reference point of the selected axis to the fixed point is displayed in the “Measured value” input field.
Enter this value as the tool length or tool radius in the appropriate input field in the “Tool data/Tool” menu.
Save the value by pressing the “OK” softkey.

How can you verify the tool offset result?

To verify the tool length:

Move the tool in the “JOG” mode to a fixed point (e.g., the machine table).
Note the position display value.
Move the tool away from this position.
Enter a new tool offset value.
Move the tool back to the fixed point.
The new position display value should differ from the old value by the entered tool offset.

To verify the tool radius:

Move the tool in the “JOG” mode to a fixed point (e.g., an edge of a cuboid).
Note the position display value.
Move the tool away from this position.
Enter a new tool offset value.
Move the tool back to the fixed point.
The new position display value should differ from the old value by the entered tool offset.

How can you create a part program?

Select the “Program” operating area.
Select “New” from the softkey menu.
Enter the program name in the input field.
Select “OK” to confirm the entry.

How can you edit the part program?

Select the “Program” operating area.
Select the desired part program from the program list.
Press the “Edit” softkey.

What is a standard program structure?

Program header

Block	Contents
N0001	Program name
N0002	Brief program description
N0003	Tool list
	…

Program start

Block	Contents
N…	Definition of the workpiece blank
N…	Definition of the workpiece coordinate system
N…	Safety clearance
N…	Activate tool radius compensation
N…	Coolant ON
N…	Spindle ON
N…	Define feedrate

Machining section

Block	Contents
N…	Contour approach
N…	Machining operations
N…	Contour retraction

N…	Positioning in rapid traverse to the next machining point
N…	Contour approach
N…	Machining operations
N…	Contour retraction
	…

Program end

Block	Contents
N…	Retract tool in safety clearance
N…	Spindle OFF
N…	Coolant OFF
N…	Deactivate tool radius compensation
N…	Return to the reference point
N…	Program end

How can you edit a part program?

You can use various keys and softkeys for editing a part program:

Keys	Function
Cursor keys	Move cursor
“DEL”	Delete character to the right of the cursor
“BKSP”	Delete character to the left of the cursor
“INS”	Switch between insert mode and overwrite mode
“ENTER”	Insert line

You can also edit a program block in the detail window.

Select the desired block.
Press the “Details” softkey.
Edit the block.
Select “OK” to save the changes.

What are some frequently used programming instructions?

Inch or metric dimensions (G70/G71)
Definition of work offset (G54 to G59, G500, G90/G91)
Rapid traverse (G00)
Tool and traverse (T, D, M6, F, G94/G95, S, M3/M4, G01)
Tool radius compensation (G40, G41/G42)
Milling circles and arcs (G02/G03)
Fixed point approach (G74/G75)
Spindle control
Setting dwell time in the program (G04)

How do you use inch or metric dimensions (G70/G71)?

Instruction	Function
G70	Programming in inches. Subsequent dimensions are interpreted as inches.
G71	Programming in millimeters. Subsequent dimensions are interpreted as millimeters.

How do you define the work offset (G54 to G59, G500, G90/G91)?

Instruction	Function
G54 – G59	Selection of a workpiece coordinate system (presettable)
G500	Selection of the workpiece coordinate system (programmable)
G90	Absolute dimensioning. Programming uses the reference point of the active coordinate system.
G91	Incremental dimensioning. Programming uses the last programmed position as the reference point.

How do you use rapid traverse (G00)?

Instruction	Function
G00 X… Y…	Rapid traverse in X and Y. The tool moves as fast as possible (rapid traverse) to the programmed position.
G00 Z…	Rapid traverse in Z. The tool moves as fast as possible (rapid traverse) to the programmed position, if the rapid traverse override is active.

How do you use tool and traverse (T, D, M6, F, G94/G95, S, M3/M4, G01)?

Instruction	Function
T…	Tool call. The tool with the programmed number is selected.
D…	Cutting edge call. The cutting edge with the programmed number is selected.
M6	Tool change. The tool called in block T… is changed.
F…	Feedrate. Programs the feedrate for the subsequent machining operations.
G94	Feedrate per minute. The feedrate is programmed in millimeters or inches per minute.
G95	Feedrate per revolution. The feedrate is programmed in millimeters or inches per revolution of the spindle.
S…	Spindle speed. Programs the spindle speed for the subsequent machining operations.
M3	Spindle ON, clockwise. The spindle is switched ON and rotates clockwise.
M4	Spindle ON, counter-clockwise. The spindle is switched ON and rotates counter-clockwise.
G01 X… Y…	Linear interpolation. The tool moves in a straight line at the programmed feedrate to the programmed position in the XY plane.
G01 Z…	Linear interpolation. The tool moves in a straight line at the programmed feedrate to the programmed position in the Z axis direction.

How do you use tool radius compensation (G40, G41/G42)?

Instruction	Function
G40	Tool radius compensation OFF. The tool center point moves along the programmed path.
G41	Tool radius compensation left. The tool moves to the left of the programmed contour. The programmed contour is the path of the tool center point, taking the radius into account.
G42	Tool radius compensation right. The tool moves to the right of the programmed contour. The programmed contour is the path of the tool center point, taking the radius into account.

How do you mill circles and arcs (G02/G03)?

Instruction	Function
G02 X… Y…	Clockwise circular interpolation. The tool moves in a circular arc with clockwise rotation. The programmed endpoint coordinates are the coordinates of the tool center point.
	Specify the center of the circle in relation to the starting point with the parameters I, J, K. I, J, K are the coordinates of the circle center point referred to the starting point of the arc.
G03 X… Y…	Counter-clockwise circular interpolation. The tool moves in a circular arc with counter-clockwise rotation. The programmed endpoint coordinates are the coordinates of the tool center point.
	Specify the center of the circle in relation to the starting point with the parameters I, J, K. I, J, K are the coordinates of the circle center point referred to the starting point of the arc.

How do you use fixed point approach (G74/G75)?

Instruction	Function
G74 X… Y…	Reference point approach in X and Y. The tool approaches the programmed position at a 45° angle.
G74 Z…	Reference point approach in Z. The tool approaches the programmed position in the Z direction.
G75 X… Y…	Fixed point approach in X and Y. The tool approaches the programmed position with a linear movement in the X direction and then in the Y direction.
G75 Z…	Fixed point approach in Z. The tool approaches the programmed position in the Z direction.

How do you control the spindle?

You can control the spindle through the following keys and softkeys:

Key	Function
“Spindle start”	Starts the spindle
“Spindle stop”	Stops the spindle
“Spindle override”	Sets the spindle override

How can you set the dwell time in the program (G04)?

Instruction	Function
G04 F…	Dwell time in seconds. The execution of the program is stopped for the programmed time in seconds.
G04 S…	Dwell time in revolutions. The program is stopped until the spindle has completed the programmed number of revolutions.

How can you simulate the program prior to machining the workpiece?

Select the “Program” operating area.
Select the part program you want to simulate.
Select “Simulate” from the softkey menu.
Select “Start” to start the simulation.
The simulation can be operated using the following softkeys:
- “Start”
- “Stop”
- “Pause”
- “Single block”
- “Reset”
- “3D view”
- “Zoom in”
- “Zoom out”
- “Panning”
- “Rotate”
Press the “Return” softkey or key to terminate the simulation.

How can you do simultaneous recording prior to machining of the workpiece?

Select the “Program” operating area.
Select “New” from the softkey menu.
Enter the program name in the input field.
Select “Record” from the softkey menu.
Select “Start” to start recording.
Use the handwheel or the axis direction keys to move the tool. The traversed path is saved in the program.
To stop recording, select “Stop” from the softkey menu.

How can you execute a part program?

Select the “Machining” operating area.
Enter the program name in the “Program” input field or select the desired program from the program list.
Select “Start” from the softkey menu.

How can you execute specified blocks?

Select the “Machining” operating area.
Enter the program name in the “Program” input field.
Enter the starting block and, if required, the ending block in the input fields.
Select “Start” from the softkey menu.

How can you correct a part program?

During program execution:
- Interrupt the program by pressing the “Stop” key or the “Hold” key.
- Enter the corrected values in the corresponding input fields.
- Select “Continue” from the softkey menu to resume the program.
After program execution:
- Open the program editor.
- Enter the corrected values in the corresponding blocks.

How can you do simultaneous recording during the machining of the workpiece?

Select the “Machining” operating area.
Select the desired program from the program list.
Select “Record” from the softkey menu.
Select “Start” from the softkey menu. The tool moves according to the instructions programmed in the selected blocks.
Use the handwheel or the axis direction keys to move the tool. The traversed path is saved in the program.
To stop recording, select “Stop” from the softkey menu.

How can you enter the tool wear offsets?

Select the “Offset” operating area.
Select the “Tool data” menu item.
Select the “Wear” sub-menu item.
Select the tool offset number.
Enter the length wear DL and the radius wear DR in the corresponding input fields.
Save the value by pressing the “OK” softkey.

What are some program control functions?

Program test
Dry run feedrate
Conditional stop
Skip block
Single block mode
Rapid traverse override
Auxiliary function lock

How do you use the program test function?

Select the “Machining” operating area.
Select the part program you want to test.
Select “Program test” from the softkey menu.
Select “Start” from the softkey menu. The program is now tested without moving the axes.

How do you use the dry run feedrate function?

Select the “Machining” operating area.
Select the “Setting data” menu item.
Select the “Common” sub-menu item.
Set the dry run feedrate using the slider for the “Dry run feedrate” setting.

How do you use the conditional stop function?

Select the “Machining” operating area.
Activate the “Conditional stop” function using the corresponding softkey.
The program is stopped if an NC block contains the “/” symbol in the first position.

How do you use the skip block function?

Select the “Machining” operating area.
Activate the “Skip block” function using the corresponding softkey.
The program skips the blocks marked with the “/” symbol in the first position.

How do you use the single block mode function?

Select the “Machining” operating area.
Activate the “Single block” function using the corresponding softkey.
The program stops after each block. Press the “Start” key to execute the next block.

How do you use the rapid traverse override function?

Select the “Machining” operating area.
Set the override factor for the rapid traverse using the slider.

How do you use the auxiliary function lock function?

Select the “Machining” operating area.
Activate the “Auxiliary function lock” function using the corresponding softkey.
The execution of M, S, and T functions is then suppressed.

How can you calibrate the tool probe?

Position a calibration sphere in the working space.
Select the “Offset” operating area.
Select the “Tool data” menu item.
Select the “Tool measurement” sub-menu item.
Select the “Probe calibration” softkey.
Select the appropriate probing direction, depending on the position of the calibration sphere:
- “+X direction”
- “-X direction”
- “+Y direction”
- “-Y direction”
- “+Z direction”
- “-Z direction”
Move the tool in the selected axis direction towards the calibration sphere. The probe will automatically detect the surface of the calibration sphere.
After successful measurement, the measured value is automatically stored in the corresponding setting data.

How can you measure the tool with a probe (auto)?

Position a fixed point (e.g., the machine table) in the working space.
Select the “Offset” operating area.
Select the “Tool data” menu item.
Select the “Tool measurement” sub-menu item.
Select the “Length” menu item to measure the tool length or the “Radius” menu item to measure the tool radius.
Select “Auto” from the softkey menu.
Select the appropriate probing direction, depending on the position of the fixed point:
- “+X direction”
- “-X direction”
- “+Y direction”
- “-Y direction”
- “+Z direction”
- “-Z direction”
Move the tool in the selected axis direction towards the fixed point. The probe will automatically detect the surface of the fixed point.
After successful measurement, the measured value is displayed in the “Measured value” input field.

How can you set up the workpiece?

Measure the workpiece.
Enter/modify workpiece offsets.

How can you measure the workpiece?

Align the workpiece to be measured parallel to the machine axes.
Select the “Offset” operating area.
Select the “Workpiece” menu item.
Select the “Workpiece measurement” sub-menu item.
Select the desired zero point (G54 to G59) using the softkeys.
Select “External” from the softkey menu.
Select the appropriate probing direction, depending on the workpiece edge to be measured:
- “+X direction”
- “-X direction”
- “+Y direction”
- “-Y direction”
- “+Z direction”
- “-Z direction”
Move the tool with the probe in the selected axis direction towards the workpiece. The probe will automatically detect the edge of the workpiece.
After successful measurement, the measured value is displayed in the “Measured value” input field.
Enter this value as the workpiece offset in the corresponding input field in the “Offset/Workpiece” menu.
Save the value by pressing the “OK” softkey.
If further workpiece edges have to be measured, repeat steps 6 to 11.

How can you enter/modify workpiece offsets?

Select the “Offset” operating area.
Select the “Workpiece” menu item.
Select the desired zero point (G54 to G59).
Enter the workpiece offsets in X, Y, and Z in the corresponding input fields.
Save the values by pressing the “OK” softkey.

How can you enter/modify the setting data?

Select the “System data” operating area.
Select the “Setting data” menu item.
Select the desired area from the “Area” drop-down list box.
Select the desired group from the “Group” drop-down list box.

How can you set R parameters?

Select the “System data” operating area.
Select the “Parameter” menu item.
Select the “R parameter” sub-menu item.
Select “New” from the softkey menu if you want to create an R parameter, or select the number of the R parameter to be changed.
Enter the number of the R parameter in the “No.” input field.
Enter the value of the R parameter in the “Value” input field.
Save the values by pressing the “OK” softkey.

How can you set user data?

Select the “System data” operating area.
Select the “User data” menu item.
Select the “User data” sub-menu item.
Enter a name for the user data in the “Name” input field.
Enter the value of the user data in the “Value” input field.
Save the values by pressing the “OK” softkey.

How can you set the date and time?

Select the “System data” operating area.
Select the “Diagnosis” menu item.
Select the “Date/time” sub-menu item.
Select the desired format using the “Date format” and “Time format” softkeys.
Set the date and time.
Save the values by pressing the “OK” softkey.

How can you execute/transfer a part program from external?

Through the USB interface.
Through the Ethernet connection.
Through the RS232 interface (PPU160.2 only).

How can you execute/transfer through the USB interface?

Executing from external (through USB interface).
Transferring from external (through USB interface).

How can you execute from external (through USB interface)?

Copy the desired part program from the PC to a USB stick.
Connect the USB stick to the USB interface of the PPU.
Select the “Program” operating area.
Select “External” from the softkey menu.
Select “Execute” from the softkey menu.
Select the program you want to execute from the list. The selected program is loaded into the NC memory and then executed.

How can you transfer from external (through USB interface)?

Connect the USB stick to the USB interface of the PPU.
Select the “Program” operating area.
Select “External” from the softkey menu.
Select “Receive” from the softkey menu.
Select the desired program from the program list that appears. The selected program is transferred from the USB stick to the NC memory.
To transfer all programs from the USB stick to the NC memory, select “All” from the softkey menu.

How can you execute/transfer through the Ethernet connection?

Configuring the network drive.
Executing from external (through Ethernet connection).
Transferring from external (through Ethernet connection).

How can you configure the network drive?

Select the “System data” operating area.
Select the “Network” menu item.
Select the “Configuration” sub-menu item.
Select “New” from the softkey menu.
Enter the network parameters in the corresponding input fields:
- “Name:”
- “IP address:”
- “Subnet mask:”
- “Default gateway:”
- “Workgroup:”
- “User name:”
- “Password:”
- “Confirm password:”
Select “OK” to save the values.

How can you execute from external (through Ethernet connection)?

Select the “Program” operating area.
Select “External” from the softkey menu.
Select “Execute” from the softkey menu.
Select the network drive from the list of available drives.
Select the program you want to execute from the list. The selected program is loaded into the NC memory and then executed.

How can you transfer from external (through Ethernet connection)?

Select the “Program” operating area.
Select “External” from the softkey menu.
Select “Receive” from the softkey menu.
Select the network drive from the list of available drives.
Select the desired program from the program list that appears. The selected program is transferred from the network drive to the NC memory.
To transfer all programs from the network drive to the NC memory, select “All” from the softkey menu.

How can you execute/transfer through the RS232 interface (PPU160.2 only)?

Configuring RS232 communication.
Executing from external (through RS232 interface).
Transferring from external (through RS232 interface).

How can you configure RS232 communication?

Select the “System data” operating area.
Select the “Comm” menu item.
Select the “RS232” sub-menu item.
Select the communication parameters:
- Baud rate
- Data bits
- Stop bits
- Parity
Save the values by pressing the “OK” softkey.

What is the meaning of the “POK” indicator when it is solid green?

The power supply for the control system is switched on.

What is the meaning of the “RDY” indicator when it is solid green?

The control system is ready and the PLC is in run mode.

What is the meaning of the “RDY” indicator when it is solid red?

The control system is in stop mode.

What is the meaning of the “RDY” indicator when it is solid orange?

The PLC is in stop mode.

What is the meaning of the “RDY” indicator when it is flashing orange?

The PLC is in power-up mode.

What is the meaning of the “TEMP” indicator when it is off?

The temperature of the control system is within the specified scope.

What is the meaning of the “TEMP” indicator when it is solid orange?

The temperature of the control system is beyond the scope.

What does the alarm and message area display?

Active alarms with alarm text. The alarm number is displayed in white lettering on a red background. The associated alarm text is shown in red lettering. An arrow indicates that several alarms are active. The number to the right of the arrow indicates the total number of active alarms. When more than one alarm is active, the display scrolls through the alarms in sequence. An acknowledgment symbol indicates the alarm cancel criterion.

What does the alarm and message area display from NC programs?

Messages from NC programs. They do not have numbers and appear in green lettering.

What are the applicable control systems for all MCP variants?

SINUMERIK 808D ADVANCED T (Turning)
SINUMERIK 808D ADVANCED M (Milling)
SINUMERIK 808D (Turning)
SINUMERIK 808D (Milling)

What does the tool number display show?

The number of the currently active tool.

What is the function of user-defined key 1?

Switches the machine tool working lamp on/off. (Always active independent of the machine operating mode).

When is the indicator on for user-defined key 1?

When the working lamp on the machine tool is switched on.

When is the indicator off for user-defined key 1?

When the working lamp on the machine tool is switched off.

What is the function of user-defined key 2?

Switches the coolant supply on/off (always active independent of the machine operating mode)

When is the indicator on for user-defined key 2?

When the coolant supply is switched on.

When is the indicator off for user-defined key 2?

When the coolant supply is switched off.

What is the function of user-defined key 3?

Controls the locking/unlocking of the safety door.

When is the indicator on for user-defined key 3?

When the safety door is unlocked.

When is the indicator off for user-defined key 3?

When the safety door is locked.

What should you make sure of when unlocking the safety door?

That all axes and the spindle have stopped running.

What is the function of user-defined key 4?

Controls if the magazine rotates clockwise (active only when the machine is in “JOG” mode).

When is the indicator on for user-defined key 4?

When the magazine rotates clockwise.

When is the indicator off for user-defined key 4?

When the magazine stops clockwise rotation.

What is the function of user-defined key 5?

Controls if the magazine approaches the reference point (active only when the machine is in “JOG” mode)

When is the LED on for user-defined key 5?

When the magazine is referenced.

When is the LED off for user-defined key 5?

When the magazine is not yet referenced.

What is the function of user-defined key 6?

Controls if the magazine rotates counter-clockwise (active only when the machine is in “JOG” mode).

When is the indicator on for user-defined key 6?

When the magazine rotates counter-clockwise.

When is the indicator off for user-defined key 6?

When the magazine stops counter-clockwise rotation.

What is the function of user-defined key 7?

Controls if the chip remover rotates forward (active only when the machine is in “JOG” mode).

When is the indicator on for user-defined key 7?

When the chip remover starts forward rotation.

When is the indicator off for user-defined key 7?

When the chip remover stops rotation.

What is the function of user-defined key 8?

Controls if the chip remover rotates reversely (active only when the machine is in “JOG” mode).

When is the indicator on for user-defined key 8?

When the chip remover starts reverse rotation.

When is the indicator off for user-defined key 8?

When the chip remover stops rotation.

What are keys K9 to K12?

Reserved keys. You can define the functions of these keys in the PLC Programming Tool.

What does the MCP package include?

Two sets (six pieces each) of pre-defined labeling strips.

What is the difference between the two sets of pre-defined labeling strips?

One set is for the turning variant of the control system and is pre-inserted on the back of the MCP. The other set is for the milling variant of the control system.

What should you do if your control system is a milling variant of the control system?

Replace the pre-inserted labeling strips with the milling-specific ones.

How can you make customized labeling strips?

Open the “Symbols for MCP customized key_808D” file in one of the following folders on the Toolbox DVD for the control system on your computer:
- \examples\SINUMERIK_808D\MCP (for PPU141.2)
- \examples\SINUMERIK_808D_ADVANCED\MCP (for PPU160.2 and PPU161.3)
Copy the desired symbols of keys from the file and then paste them to the desired locations for key labels in the “Strip_template_808D” file.
Print the final labeling strip template file on the blank plastic sheet.
Replace the pre-inserted labeling strips from the MCP with the customized ones.

What is a coordinate system?

As a rule, a coordinate system is formed from three mutually perpendicular coordinate axes. The positive directions of the coordinate axes are defined using the Cartesian coordinate system. The coordinate system is related to the workpiece and programming takes place independently of whether the tool or the workpiece is being traversed. When programming, it is always assumed that the tool traverses relative to the coordinate system of the workpiece, which is intended to be stationary.

What does the machine coordinate system (MCS) describe?

The orientation of the coordinate system relative to the machine. It depends on the respective machine types and can be rotated in different positions. The directions of the axes follow the Cartesian coordinate system. The origin of this coordinate system is the machine zero, defined by the machine manufacturer. The traversing range of the machine axes can be in the negative range.

What does the workpiece coordinate system (WCS) describe?

To describe the geometry of a workpiece in the workpiece program, a right-handed, right-angled coordinate system is also used. Generally, X0/Y0 of the WCS is set at the center, edge or corner of the workpiece while Z0 is set on the top surface of the workpiece.

What does the relative coordinate system (REL) describe?

In addition to the machine and workpiece coordinate systems, this control system provides a relative coordinate system. This coordinate system can clear the current coordinate values at any position and has no influence on workpiece machining or the position of WCS. All axis movements are displayed relative to this position.

What is the concept of protection levels in the control system?

A concept of protection levels for enabling data areas. Different protection levels control different access rights.

What is the default protection level?

The lowest protection level 7 (without password).

What should be done if the password is no longer known?

The control system must be reinitialized with the default machine/drive data. All passwords are then reset to default passwords for this software release.

What should be done before booting the control system with default machine/drive data?

You should back up your machine/drive data; otherwise, all data are lost after rebooting with default machine/drive data.

What are the different protection levels?

Protection level	Locked by	Area
0	Siemens password	Siemens, reserved
1	Manufacturer password	Machine manufacturers
2	Reserved	–
3-6	End user password	End users
	(Default password: “CUSTOMER”)
7	No password	End users

What operations can be performed with protection level 1?

Entering or changing part of the machine data and drive data
Conducting NC and drive commissioning

What operations can be performed with protection level 3-6?

Entering or changing part of the machine data
Editing programs
Setting offset values
Measuring tools

What operations can be performed with protection level 7?

Editing programs
Setting offset values
Measuring tools

When is protection level 7 automatically set?

If you have not set the password or protection level interface signal.

How else can you set protection level 7?

Through the PLC user interfaces.

In which menus listed below does the input and modification of data depend on the set protection level?

Tool offsets
Work offsets
Setting data
Program creation/program correction

What depends on the protection level?

The number of machine data and drive data which can be read or modified.

How can you set the protection level for these function areas?

With the display machine data (USER_CLASS…).

How can you set the password?

Select the system data operating area.
Open the following password setting window and then enter the desired password (default end-user password: CUSTOMER).
Confirm the input.

To avoid unauthorized access to the controller, what must you do?

Change the Siemens default passwords to your own ones.

How can you change/delete the password?

Select the system data operating area.
If you desire to change the existing password, press this softkey to open the following window and enter the new password.
- If you desire to delete the existing password, proceed directly to Step 6.
Confirm the new password.
Enter the new password again in the following window.
Press this softkey to confirm the new password.
If you desire to delete the existing password, directly press this softkey.

What notices must you observe during machining operations to ensure the safety and correctness of machining?

Reference point approach is required only for machine tools equipped with incremental encoders.
Before running the spindle manually, make sure you have activated the tool.
Before executing M functions, make sure all the axes are in safe positions.
During handwheel assignment, make sure there is no obstacle when moving the tool to avoid tool collision.
To guarantee the safety and correctness of machining, you must verify the tool setup result.
You must distinguish the direction of tool wear compensation clearly before entering the tool wear offsets.
Before machining the workpiece on the machine, make sure the following preconditions are met: – The PRT mode and the dry run feedrate are deactivated. – The feedrate override is 0%. – The safety door is closed.
After changing important data, it is recommended to carry out an internal data backup immediately.

When is reference point approach required?

Only for machine tools equipped with incremental encoders.

What is the operating sequence for switching on and referencing?

Turn on the power supply for the machine tool.
Release all emergency stop buttons on the machine. By default, the control system is in reference point approach (REF.POINT) mode after startup.
- If a machine axis is equipped with an absolute encoder, the axis is referenced automatically after the control system starts and therefore reference point approach is unnecessary. The circle symbol (lower-left figure) next to the axis identifier indicates that the axis is already referenced.
- If a machine axis is equipped with an incremental encoder, the axis is not referenced after the control system starts. The circle symbol (lower-right figure) next to the axis identifier indicates that the axis has not been referenced. Proceed to Step 3.
Use the corresponding axis traversing keys to traverse the axes until the symbol appears next to the axis identifier.

What is the default user interface language dependent on?

The PPU type. For a PPU with Chinese keys, the default language is Chinese after power-on; otherwise, it is English.

How can you change the user interface language?

Select the system data operating area.
Open the user interface language selection window.
Use the cursor keys to select the desired language.
Press this softkey to confirm your selection and the system is automatically restarted to activate the selected language.

What is the maximum number of tools and cutting edges that the control system supports?

A maximum of 64 tools and 128 cutting edges.

What is the maximum number of cutting edges that can be created for each tool?

Nine.

What must you do before executing a part program?

First create the desired tool in the tool list and proceed with the tool setting operations.

How do you create a tool?

Select the offset operating area.
Open the tool list window.
Open the lower-level menu for tool type selection.

How do I create a new tool?

Select the offset operating area.
Open the tool list window.
Select the tool to which you desire to add a cutting edge.
Select a tool type (for example, a milling tool) with the corresponding softkey.
Enter the tool number in the following window.
Press the softkey to confirm your settings. The window below shows the information of the new tool created. Set the desired tool data in this window.
- Column ① indicates the tool offset number in Siemens dialect mode.
- Column ② indicates the tool offset number visible only in ISO dialect mode.
Press this key to confirm your settings.

How do I create or change a cutting edge?

Note: Before creating or changing cutting edges, you must first create tools.

Select the offset operating area.
Open the tool list window.
Select the tool to which you desire to add a cutting edge.
Open the menu items for cutting edge settings.
Press the softkey to create a new cutting edge for the selected tool. The control system automatically adds the new cutting edge to the tool list. Now you can enter different lengths and radii for each cutting edge.
You can also press the corresponding softkey to reset or delete a cutting edge.

How do I activate the tool and the spindle?

Note: A tool in the tool list is not active until you activate it in “MDA” mode or the “T, S, M” window.

Select the machining operating area.
Switch to “JOG” mode.
Open the “T, S, M” window.
Enter the desired tool number (for example, 1) in the “T, S, M” window.
Press the key to move the cursor to the input field for the spindle speed, and enter the desired speed, for example, 1000.
Press this key again to move the cursor to the input field for the spindle direction.
Use this key to select the spindle direction, for example, “M3”.
Press this key on the MCP to activate the tool and the spindle.
Press this key on the MCP to stop spindle rotation.
Press the softkey to return to the main screen of the machining operating area.

How do I assign the handwheel?

If the machine manufacturer has assigned the handwheel for the control system, you can skip this section and directly measure the tool after activating the tool and the spindle.

This control system provides the following two methods for assigning the handwheel:

Assigning the handwheel through the MCP
Assigning the handwheel through the PPU

Note: Make sure there is no obstacle when moving the tool to avoid tool collision.

How do I assign the handwheel through the MCP?

Precondition: MD14512.7 = 0 (factory default)

Select the machining operating area.
Press this key on the MCP to control the axis movement with external handwheels.
Press the desired axis traversing keys to assign the handwheel.
Press the increment keys on the MCP to select the required override increment:
- 1: The override increment is 0.001 mm.
- 10: The override increment is 0.010 mm.
- 100: The override increment is 0.100 mm.
Rotate the handwheel to make the selected axis approach the workpiece.
Cut the surface of the workpiece to verify the handwheel assignment.
Press the softkey to close the window for handwheel assignment.
Press this key to return to the main screen of the machining operating area.

How do I assign the handwheel through the PPU?

Precondition: Set MD14512.7 = 80 (default value: 0). With this setting, you can only assign the handwheel through the PPU.

Operating sequence (activating the handwheel control function on the PPU)

If this function is already active, skip the steps below and proceed directly to the operating sequence for assigning the handwheel through the PPU.

Select the system data operating area.
Open the machine data window.
Press this softkey to open the basic machine data list.
Press this softkey to open the search field and enter the machine data “14512”.
Confirm your entry with this softkey. Then the system starts searching automatically.
Move the cursor to the input field for 14512.
Enter the value “80”.
Confirm your entry.
Press this vertical softkey to activate the value change. Note that the control system restarts to accept the new value.

Operating sequence (assigning the handwheel through the PPU)

Select the machining operating area.
Press this key on the MCP.
Press this key to open the extended menu.
Open the handwheel assignment window.
Select the handwheel to be assigned with the cursor keys in the following window. You can assign a maximum of two handwheels.
Press the desired vertical softkey (<X> … <MZ1>) or this key for the handwheel assignment. The handwheel symbol which appears to the left of the selected axis (for example, the X-axis) indicates that you have assigned the handwheel to the selected axis.
Press the increment keys on the MCP to select the required override increment:
- 1: The override increment is 0.001 mm.
- 10: The override increment is 0.010 mm.
- 100: The override increment is 0.100 mm.
Rotate the handwheel to make the selected axis approach the workpiece.
Machine a surface to verify the handwheel assignment.
Press the softkey to close the window for handwheel assignment.
Press this key to return to the main screen of the machining operating area.

How do I measure the tool manually?

Note:

You must first create a tool and activate it before measuring the tool.
This section takes the milling tool measurement for example. If you have created other types of tools, proceed through the following steps to finish the measurement of all the tools. This will make the tool change process easier.

Select the machining operating area.
Switch to “JOG” mode.
Open the tool measurement window.
Open the manual tool measurement window.
Press the axis traversing keys to move the infeed axes to the desired positions above the workpiece.
Switch to handwheel control mode.
Press this key to set the workpiece or a fixed point as the reference point. Note: You can define a fixed point as desired, for example, the workbench.
Select a suitable override feedrate, and then use the handwheel to move the tool to scratch the required workpiece edge (see the left illustration shown below) or the edge of the setting block, if it is used (see the right illustration shown below).
Enter the distance between the tool tip and the reference point in the “Z0” field, for example, “0”. (This value is the thickness of a setting block if it is used.)
Save the tool length value in the Z axis. The tool diameter, radius, and cutting edge position are all taken in to account.
Press this vertical softkey to open the window for measuring the tool diameter.
Press the axis traversing keys to move the tool to approach the workpiece in the X direction.
Switch to handwheel control mode.
Select a suitable override feedrate, and then use the handwheel to move the tool to scratch the required workpiece edge (or the edge of the setting block, if it is used).
Enter the distance to the workpiece edge in the X and Y directions in the “X0” and “Y0” fields respectively, for example, enter “0” at “X0” and “0” at “Y0”. (This is the value of the width of a setting block if it is used. Select one of X0/Y0 as required.)
Save the tool diameter value.
Press this softkey and you can see that the compensation data values have been automatically added to the tool data.

How do I verify the tool offset result?

To guarantee the safety and correctness of machining, you must verify the tool setup result.

Note: Before verifying the tool setup result, you must have finished all tool setup work as mentioned before.

Select the machining operating area.
Switch to “MDA” mode.
Press this softkey on the PPU.
Enter the following test program (or you can create your own program): T1 D1 G00 X0 Y0 Z5

Alternatively, you can press this softkey to load an existing part program from a system directory.

Press this key to activate the “ROV” function (indicator on: this function is active). Note: After the “ROV” function is active, the feedrate override switch can also control the speed of G00.
Rotate the feedrate override switch to 0%.
Press this key on the MCP. Increase the feedrate override gradually to avoid accidents caused by fast axis movement. Observe whether the axis moves to the specified position.

How do I create a part program?

The control system can store a maximum of 300 part programs which include those created by the control system for certain functions such as MM+, TSM, and so on.

WARNING: Danger to life and/or damage to machine due to insecure part programs

Running an insecure part program on your machine may cause unexpected attacks to the machine, which in turn can lead to death, personal injuries, and/or machine damage.

Make sure you use part programs that come from trusted sources.

Methods for creating part programs

You can create a part program with one of the following methods:

Creating on a computer and transferring it to the PPU via USB interface
Creating on a computer and transferring it to the PPU via Ethernet interface
Creating directly on the PPU (see below for details)

Creating a part program on the PPU

Select the program management operating area.
Press this softkey to enter the system directory for storing part programs.
To directly create a new program file, press this softkey and go to Step 4. To create a new program directory first, press this softkey and proceed as follows before you go to Step 4:
- A. Press this softkey to open the window for creating a new directory.
- B. Enter a desired name for the new directory. Note that some special characters (see table at the end of this section) are invalid for the directory name.
- C. Press this softkey to confirm your entry.
- D. Select the new directory with the cursor keys.
- E. Press this key on the PPU to open the directory.
Press this softkey to open the window for creating a new program.
Enter the name of the new program. You can enter the file name extension “.MPF” (main program) or “.SPF” (subprogram) to define the program type. The control system identifies a program as a main program if you do not enter any file name extension. The character length of a program name is limited to 24 English characters or 12 Chinese characters. Note that some special characters (see table at the end of this section) are invalid for the program name.
Press this softkey to confirm your entry. The part program editor window opens automatically. Now you can edit the program text in the window. The control system saves your editing automatically.

Special characters invalid for program or directory names

The control system does not support the use of the following special characters in program or directory names: / < > ? : # ( ) [ ] $ ! – + ^ \ * | ; & % @ = ~ ` Space

How do I edit the part program?

Using a standard program structure

Using a standard program structure provides an easy way of part programming and a clear view of the machining sequences. Siemens recommends that you use the following program structure:

Program start
T, S, M function
Geometrical data/traverse
Return to change tool
T, S, M function
Geometrical data/traverse
Return to change tool
T, S, M function
Geometrical data/traverse
Return to change tool
Program end

How do I edit a part program?

Methods for editing part programs

You can edit a part program with one of the following methods:

Editing on a computer and transferring it to the PPU via USB interface
Editing on a computer and transferring it to the PPU via Ethernet interface
Editing directly on the PPU (see below for details)

Editing a part program on the PPU

You can edit a part program only when it is not being executed.

Note that any modification to the part program in the program editor window is stored immediately.

Note: Steps 1 to 4: Search for a program file Steps 5 to 9: Edit the selected program in the open program editor window

Select the program management operating area.
Press this softkey to enter the system directory for storing part programs.
Select the desired program file/directory in one of the following methods:

How do I open a program in the program editor?

Navigate to the program/directory with the cursor keys.
Open the search dialog box and enter the desired search term. Note: If you search for a program, the file name extension must be entered in the first input field of the dialog box below.
On the PPU, press the alphabetic or numeric key that contains the first character of the desired program/directory name. The control system automatically highlights the first program/directory whose name starts with that character. If necessary, press the key continuously until you find the desired program/directory.
Press this key to open either the selected program in the program editor or the selected directory. In the latter case, perform Step 3 and then Step 4 until the selected program is opened in the program editor.

How do I edit the program text in the program editor window?

Use the following keys on the PPU:

Search
Name
Contained text
Include subordinate folders
Case-sensitive
Search in

How do I modify the block numbering of a program?

You can modify the block numbering (Nxx) of a program opened in the program editor window using the Renumbering program blocks softkey. After you press this softkey, the block number is inserted at the beginning of the program block in ascending order and is increased by an increment of 10 (for example, N10, N20, N30).

How can I quickly arrive at points where I would like to make changes in large programs?

You can use the search function by pressing the Searching in programs softkey, which opens the search dialog box. You can search with specified text or line number by selecting the corresponding softkey.

How do I copy, delete, and paste program blocks?

A. Press the Mark On softkey in the open program editor window to insert a marker. B. Select the desired program blocks with the cursor. C. Press the Copy softkey to copy the selection to the buffer memory. – OR –

Press the Cut key to delete the selected program blocks and to copy them into the buffer memory.

D. Place the cursor on the desired insertion point in the program and press the Paste softkey. The content of the buffer memory is pasted.

How do I program cycles?

Press the corresponding softkey to open the desired cycle programming window.

How do I program contours?

Press the Cont softkey to open the contour programming window.

How do I return to the program management operating area after editing?

Press the Return key.

What operations can I make between programs in the main screen of the program management operating area?

Searching for programs
Copying/cutting/pasting programs
Deleting/restoring programs
Renaming programs

How are inch or metric dimensions evaluated with G71 and G70 at program start?

G71: With G71 at the program start, both the geometrical data and the feedrates are evaluated as metric units.

Example:

N10 G17 G90 G54 G71
N20 T1 D1 M6
N30 S5000 M3 G94 F300
N40 G00 X100 Y100 Z5
N50 G01 Z-5
N60 Z5
N70 G00 Z500 D0

G70: With G70 at the program start, the geometrical data is evaluated as inches, but the feedrates are not affected and remain as metric units.

Example:

N10 G17 G90 G54 G70
N20 T1 D1 M6
N30 S5000 M3 G94 F300
N40 G00 X3.93 Y3.93 Z5
N50 G01 Z-0.787
N60 Z0.196
N70 G00 Z19.68 D0

How is the work offset defined with G500, G54 to G59, G500 + G54, G90, and G91?

G500: All absolute path data corresponds to the current position. The position values are written in the G500 (basic) zero offset.

Example:

N10 G17 G90 G500 G71
N20 T1 D1 M6
N30 S5000 M3 G94 F300
N40 G00 X50 Y50 Z5
N50 G01 Z-20
N60 Z5
N70 G00 Z500 D0

G54 to G59: With G500 = 0, the offset for the work-piece can be stored in the workpiece offsets G54 to G59.

Example:

N10 G17 G90 G54 G71
N20 T1 D1 M6
N30 S5000 M3 G94 F300
N40 G00 X0 Y0 Z5
N50 G01 Z-20
N60 Z5
N70 G00 Z500 D0

G500 + G54: With G500 ≠ 0 activated, the value in G500 is added to the value in G54.

Example:

N10 G17 G90 G500 G71
N20 T1 D1 M6
N30 S5000 M3 G94 F300
N40 G00 G54 X20 Y20 Z5
N50 G01 Z-20
N60 Z5
N70 G00 G53 Z500 D0

G90: With G90 (absolute positioning) at the program start, the geometrical data refers to the zero of the coordinate system currently active in the program, usually with G54, G500, or G500 + G54.

Example:

N10 G17 G90 G54 G71
N20 T1 D1 M6
N30 S5000 M3 G94 F300
N40 G00 X100 Y100 Z5
N50 G01 Z-20
N60 Z5
N70 G00 Z500 D0

G91: With G91 (incremental positioning), you can add numerical value of path information (the incremental positioning with the current axis position as the start point) in the program. Subsequently, switch to absolute positioning with G90.

Example:

N10 G17 G90 G54 G70
N20 T1 D1 M6
N30 S5000 M3 G94 F300
N40 G00 X3.93 Y3.93 Z0.196
N50 G01 G91 Z-0.787
N60 Z0.196
N70 G00 G90 Z19.68 D0

How do I use rapid traverse (G00)?

When G00 is active in the program, the axis will traverse at the maximum axis speed in a straight line.

Example:

N10 G17 G90 G54 G71
N20 T1 D1 M6
N30 S5000 M3 G94 F300
N40 G00 X50 Y50 Z5
N50 G01 Z-5
N60 Z5
N70 G00 Z500 D0

How do I program tool and traverse using T, D, M6, F, G94/G95, S, M3/M4, and G01?

T, D: A new tool can be selected with the “T” command, and the “D” command is used to activate the tool length offset.
M6: M6 can be used for automatic tool change on the machine.
G94/G95, F: The feedrate is defined with “F”. G94 F defines feedrate in terms of time (mm/min) and G95 F defines feedrate in terms of spindle revolutions (mm/rev).
S, M3/M4: The spindle speed is defined with “S”. The spindle direction is defined with M3 (clockwise) and M4 (counter-clockwise).
G01: When G01 is active in the program, the axis traverses at the programmed feedrate (as defined by G94 F or G95 F) in a straight line.

Example:

N10 G17 G90 G54 G71
N20 T1 D1 M6
N30 S5000 M3 G94 F300
N40 G00 X50 Y50 Z5
N50 G01 Z-5
N60 Z5
N70 G00 Z500 D0

How do I activate and deactivate the tool radius compensation?

The tool radius compensation can be activated (G41/G42) or deactivated (G40) in contour programming.

G41: tool radius compensation to the left of the contour
G42: tool radius compensation to the right of the contour
G40: tool radius compensation off

When traversing circle contours with cutter radius compensation, how do I decide whether the feedrate should act at the circle contour of the workpiece (CFC) or the path defined by the cutter center point (CFTCP)?

When using the feedrate at the circle contour defined by the CFC command, the feedrate is constant at the contour, which however may cause increase in the feedrate of the tool. This increase could damage the tool if excessive material is encountered at the contour. Therefore, CFC is commonly used for finish cutting of contours.
The CFTCP command ensures a constant feedrate of the tool, but different feedrates at the contour. This may cause deviations in surface finish. These two commands may cause the cutter to traverse fast around a corner or slowly at the contour.

How do I mill circles and arcs?

When milling circles and arcs, you must define the circle center point and the distance between the start point, end point, and the center point in the relative coordinate system. When using the XY coordinate system, the interpolation parameters I and J are available.

There are two common ways of defining circles and arcs:

G02/G03 X… Y… I… J…
G02/G03 X… Y… CR=… Use positive value in CR with arcs ≤ 180°, and negative value with arcs > 180°.

Example:

N10 G17 G90 G500 G71
N20 T1 D1 M6
N30 S5000 M3 G94 F300
N40 G00 X-20 Y-20 Z5
N50 G01 Z-5
N60 G41 X0 Y0
N70 Y50
N80 X100
N90 G02 X125 Y15 I-12 J-35
N100 G01 Y0
N110 X0
N120 G40 X-20 Y-20
N130 G00 Z500 D0

Note that N90 block as above can also be written as “N90 G02 X125 Y15 CR=37”.

What do the following terms mean in relation to milling circles and arcs?

SP: Start point of circle
CP: Center point of circle
EP: End point of circle
I: Incremental distance from SP to CP in X axis
J: Incremental distance from SP to CP in Y axis
G2: Traversing direction of the circle (clockwise)
G3: Traversing direction of the circle (counter-clockwise)

How do I use fixed point approach with G74 and G75?

G74: By using G74, reference point can be approached automatically.

Example:

N10 G17 G90 G500 G71
N20 T1 D1 M6
N30 S5000 M3 G94 F300
N40 G00 X50 Y50 Z5
N50 G01 Z-5
N60 Z5
N70 G74 Z=0 ;reference point

G75: By using G75, a fixed point on the machine defined by the manufacturer can be approached automatically.

Example:

N10 G17 G90 G500 G71
N20 T1 D1 m6
N30 S5000 M3 G94 F300
N40 G00 X50 Y50 Z5
N50 G01 Z-5
N60 Z5
N70 G74 Z=0 ;reference point
N80 G75 X=0 ;fixed point

How do I control the spindle?

M3: Spindle accelerates to the programmed speed in clockwise direction.
M4: Spindle accelerates to the programmed speed in counter-clockwise direction.
M5: Spindle decelerates to stop.
M19: Sets the spindle to a specific angular position.

Example:

N10 G17 G90 G500 G71
N20 T1 D1 M6
N30 S5000 M3 G94 F300
N40 G00 X50 Y50 Z5
N50 G01 Z-5
N60 M5
N70 Z5 M4
N80 M5
N90 M19
N100 G00 Z500 D0

How do I set dwell time in the program?

G04: G04 can be used to pause the tool movements during machining process. This makes the workpiece surface much smoother.

Example:

G04 F5: program dwells for 5 seconds

N10 G17 G90 G500 G71
N20 T1 D1 M6
N30 S5000 M3 G94 F300
N40 G00 X50 Y50 Z5
N50 G01 Z-5
N60 G04 F5
N70 Z5 M4
N80 M5
N90 M19
N100 G00 Z500 D0

Why is simulation before machining important?

Before automatic machining, simulation is necessary to check whether the tool moves in the right way. During simulation, the current program is calculated in its entirety and the result displayed in graphic form. The result of programming is verified without traversing the machine axes. Incorrectly programmed machining steps are detected at an early stage and incorrect machining on the workpiece prevented.

What are the different methods of simulation?

Simulation prior to machining of the workpiece
Simultaneous recording prior to machining of the workpiece
Simultaneous recording during machining of the workpiece

Why would I use simultaneous recording during machining?

If the view of the work space is blocked by coolant, for example, while the workpiece is being machined, you can track the program execution on the screen.

How do I perform simulation prior to machining of the workpiece?

Note that the following Steps 1 to 3 describe how to open a desired program file on the PPU. If you are already in the program editor window, you can go to Step 4 directly.

Select the program management operating area.
Enter the system program directory and position the cursor on the program to be simulated.
Press the Open program key and the program is opened in the program editor window.
Switch to “AUTO” mode.
Press the Simu softkey to open the program simulation window, and the program control mode PRT is automatically activated.
Press the Start simulation key to start the simulation for the selected program. The program execution is displayed graphically on the screen. The machine axes do not move.

What vertical softkeys can I select in the simulation window?

Auto zoom: Scales the entire simulation track automatically to adapt to the size of the window.
Show all: Opens the lower-level menu for the following block display options:
- Display all G17 blocks
- Display all G18 blocks
- Display all G19 blocks
Zoom+: Zooms in the screen from the cursor position.
Zoom -: Zooms out the screen from the cursor position.
Delete window: Deletes all the simulation tracks recorded up till now.
Cursor crs./fine: Makes the cursor move in large or small steps.
Material removal: Enables the material removal simulation of a defined blank.
Show blocks: Selects whether to show the blocks or not.

How do I stop or cancel a simulation?

To stop the simulation, press the Stop key on the MCP.
To cancel the simulation, press the Cancel key on the MCP.

How do you simulate a program before machining the workpiece on the machine?

Select the program management operating area.
Enter the target program directory and position the cursor on the desired program.
Press the softkey to automatically change to “AUTO” mode in the machining operating area.
Press the softkey to open the lower-level menu for program control.
Press the softkey to activate the PRT mode. This will execute the program without axis movement.
You can also press the softkey to replace the programmed feed rate with a dry run feed rate.
Press the softkey to open the simultaneous recording window.
Press the key on the MCP to start the recording. The program execution will be displayed graphically on the screen. The machine axes will not move.
Press this key on the MCP to restart or continue the simulation.
After finishing the simulation, you can press this softkey to return to the program editor window.

How do you execute a part program?

Before starting a program, make sure the control system and the machine are set up and the part program is verified with simulation and test. Observe the relevant safety notes of the machine manufacturer.

Select the program management operating area.
Select the desired program directory.
Select the program you desire to execute.
Press the softkey. For some directories, press the following softkey instead: The system will automatically change to “AUTO” mode in the machining operating area after you press the softkey.
If desired, you can use this softkey to specify how you want the program to be executed.
Make sure the feed rate override is 0%. Press this key on the MCP to close the safety door. If this function is not available, close the door on the machine manually.
Press this key on the MCP to start the machining of the program.
Turn the feed rate override switch slowly to the desired value.
- Pressing this key stops the execution of a part program. The program currently running is aborted. On the next program start, the machining starts from the beginning.
- Pressing this key suspends the execution of a part program. The axes stop running while the spindle continues running. Press the following key again, and the program continues to run.

How do you execute specified blocks?

If you would only like to perform a certain section of a program on the machine, then you do not need to start the program from the beginning. You can start the program from a specified program block in the following cases:

After you stop or interrupt the program execution
When you need to specify a target position, e.g. during remachining

Proceed as follows to start machining from the last interruption point in the program:

Select the machining operating area.
Switch to “AUTO” mode.
Press this softkey to open the block search window.
Press this softkey to load the interruption point, and the cursor moves to the beginning of the target block which is interrupted last time.
Press one of the following softkeys to set the condition for the block search:
- The program will continue from the line before the target block. The same calculations of the basic conditions (e.g. tool and cutting edge numbers, M functions, feed rate and spindle speed) in the previous blocks are carried out as during normal program operation, but the axes do not move.
- The program will continue from the target block containing the interruption point. The same calculations of the basic conditions in the previous blocks are carried out as during normal program operation, but the axes do not move.
- Block search without calculation of the basic conditions. All settings required for execution have to be programmed from the target block (e.g. feed rate, spindle speed, etc.).
Make sure the feed rate override is 0%.
Press this key on the MCP, and then an alarm 010208 appears for your confirmation whether to continue.
Press this key again to execute the program.
Turn the feed rate override switch on the MCP slowly to the desired value.

How do you correct a part program?

As soon as a syntax error in the part program is detected by the control system, program execution is interrupted and the syntax error is displayed in the alarm line. In this case, you can correct the error directly in the machining operating area with the program correction function. When making program changes, the control system must be brought into the reset state.

Note: The program correction function is not available for program execution from external.

Prerequisite: A part program is loaded in “AUTO” mode in the machining operating area.

Press this key on the MCP to place the program in the reset mode.
Press this softkey to activate the block editing window.
Make the necessary corrections. Any changes to the program will be stored immediately.
After you finish the program correction, press this softkey to switch back to the block display window.
Press this key on the MCP to restart the machining of the program.

How do you simultaneously record during the machining of the workpiece?

You can follow the machining of the workpiece on the screen while the program is being executed on the machine.

Select the program management operating area.
Enter the target program directory and position the cursor on the desired program.
Press this softkey, and the system automatically changes to “AUTO” mode in the machining operating area.
Press this softkey to open the simultaneous recording window.
Press this key to start the recording. The machining of the workpiece is started and graphically displayed on the screen.

How do you enter the tool wear offsets?

Note: You must distinguish the direction of tool wear compensation clearly.

Two methods are available for entering the tool wear offsets: absolute input and incremental input (default: absolute input).

Operating sequence for absolute input:

Select the offset operating area.
Open the tool wear window.
Use the cursor keys to select the required tools and their edges.
Enter the desired tool length wear parameter and the tool radius wear parameter (range of value in mm: -9.999 to 9.999).
- Positive value: the tool compensates in the direction of moving away from the workpiece.
- Negative value: the tool compensates in the direction of approaching the workpiece.
- Note: If there is already a non-zero offset value in the input field (for example, the existing tool length offset value is “0.1”) and you desire to increase the offset value, then you can either directly enter the sum of the existing offset value and the increment, or call the pocket calculator to work out the tool wear offset (proceed through Steps 6 to 9).
Press this key or move the cursor to activate the compensation.
If you desire to use the pocket calculator, position the cursor on the desired input field and press this key. Then the pocket calculator is opened.
Enter the desired arithmetic statement in the input line of the pocket calculator.
Press this key, and the calculation result is displayed in the pocket calculator:
Press this softkey to enter the result in the input field at the current cursor position and close the pocket calculator automatically.
- Note: For more information about how to use the pocket calculator, see Section “Pocket calculator”.

Operating sequence for incremental input

Select the offset operating area.
Open the tool wear window.
Position the cursor bar on the input field to be modified.
Switch to incremental input.
Enter the desired increment value, for example, 0.1.
- Positive value: the tool compensates in the direction of moving away from the workpiece.
- Negative value: the tool compensates in the direction of approaching the workpiece.
- Note: Alternatively, you can call the pocket calculator to work out the increment value (see Steps 7 to 10).
Press this key or move the cursor to activate the compensation. Then the value displayed in the input field becomes the sum of the original value and the increment value.
If you desire to use the pocket calculator, press this key.
Enter the desired arithmetic statement in the input line of the pocket calculator.
Press this key, and the calculation result (for example, 0.1) is displayed in the pocket calculator.
Press this softkey to add the calculation result to the value in the input field at the current cursor position and close the pocket calculator automatically.
- Note: For more information about how to use the pocket calculator, see Section “Pocket calculator”.

How do you perform program control functions?

You can perform further program control operations through the following operation:

What does the Program Test softkey do?

With this softkey activated, the part program is executed with no axis or spindle movement. In this way, you can check the programmed axis positions and auxiliary function outputs of a part program. This softkey functions the same as the following key on the MCP:

What does the Dry Run Feedrate softkey do?

With this softkey activated, all traversing motions are performed with the dry run feed rate defined in SD42100 DRY_RUN_FEED. You can set the dry run feed rate in the JOG data setting window through the following operation:

What does the Conditional Stop softkey do?

With this softkey activated, the processing of the program stops at the end of every block containing M01. In this way, you can check the result already obtained during the machining of a workpiece. This softkey functions the same as the following key on the MCP:

Note that in order to continue executing the program, press the following key again:

What does the Skip Block softkey do?

It is possible to skip program blocks, which are not to be executed every time the program runs. With this softkey activated, the program blocks identified with a slash in front of the block number (e.g. “/N100”) are skipped during machining. Several consecutive blocks can be skipped.

What does the Single Block Mode softkey do?

With this softkey activated, the system can interrupt the machining of the workpiece after each program block. In this way, you can control the machining result block-by-block and check individual machining steps. This softkey functions the same as the following key on the MCP:

The program is advanced to the next block via the following key:

However, for the thread blocks (G33), a stop is performed at the end of the current thread block only with a dry run feed rate activated.

What does the Rapid Traverse Override softkey do?

With this softkey activated, the traversing speed of the axes in the rapid traverse mode (G00) can be controlled via the feed rate override switch on the MCP. This softkey functions the same as the following key on the MCP:

It is recommended that you keep this function activated for easy feed rate control during machining.

What does the Auxiliary Function Lock softkey do?

With this softkey activated, the part program is executed with the spindle disabled and all auxiliary functions (see below) suppressed.

Auxiliary function	Address
Tool selection	T
Tool offset	D, DL
Feed rate	F
Spindle speed	S
M functions	M
H functions	H

How do you calibrate the tool probe?

Preconditions

The machine manufacturer must have connected the probe to the control system.
You must first enter the radius or diameter of the tool for probe calibration.

Operating sequences

Setting the probe data

Select the machining operating area.
Switch to “JOG” mode.
Open the lower-level menu for tool measurement.
Open the auto tool measurement window.
Press this vertical softkey to open the probe data setting window, which shows the coordinates of the probe. Enter the values in the input fields as required (see table below for the parameter descriptions). See the machine coordinate system for all position values.

Parameter	Description
①	Absolute position of the probe in Z direction
②/③	The measured probe center (the machine coordinate)
④	The diameter of the probe (the measured value will be shown after calibrating)
⑤	The thickness of the probe
⑥	The measurement feed rate in “JOG” mode (this parameter is used to create the measuring program)
⑦	G17, G18 and G19 for selection
⑧	Spindle speed in r.p.m.
⑨	Direction of rotation of the spindle: M3, M4, or M5
⑩	Safety distance between the measuring surface of the probe and the tool

How do you stop the recording?

Press this key on the MCP if you wish to stop the recording.

Press this key on the MCP to cancel the recording.

How do you restart or continue the recording?

Press this key on the MCP to restart or continue the recording.

What should you deactivate before machining the workpiece on the machine?

You must deactivate the PRT mode and the dry run feed rate activated before machining the workpiece on the machine; otherwise, the machining cannot be performed due to the standstill of the axes and the spindle.

How do I calibrate the probe?

Select the machining operating area.
Switch to “JOG” mode.
Open the lower-level menu for tool measurement.
Open the auto tool measurement window.
Press this vertical softkey to enter the probe calibration screen.
You can use this vertical softkey to choose whether to calibrate the tool length and diameter, or to calibrate the tool length only.
Move the tool until it presses down on the measuring surface of the probe. Then the calibration process is triggered automatically. Note: When calibrating the probe, make sure the tool is approximately aligned with the center of the measuring surface of the probe.

What does the dial gauge symbol indicate?

The dial gauge symbol ( ) displays during the automatic measurement, which indicates that the measuring process is active.

What are the preconditions for measuring the tool with a probe?

The machine manufacturer must parameterize special measuring functions for tool probe measuring. For more information, see the SINUMERIK 808D/SINUMERIK 808D ADVANCED Function Manual.
You must first enter the cutting edge position and calibrate the probe.

How do I measure the tool with a probe?

Select the machining operating area.
Switch to “JOG” mode.
Open the lower-level menu for tool measurement.
Open the auto tool measurement window. The tool length in the Z direction is measured by default.
Move the tool until it presses down on the edge of the probe. Then the tool length is calculated and entered in the tool list. Note that if several axes move simultaneously, no offset data can be calculated.

How do I measure the tool diameter in the X and Y planes?

Press this vertical softkey to measure the tool diameter in the X and Y planes.
Move the tool until it presses down on the edge of the probe. The tool diameter or radius is calculated and entered in the tool list. Note that if several axes move simultaneously, no offset data can be calculated.

What must I do before measuring the workpiece?

You must select the relevant offset panel (for example, G54) and the axis you want to determine for the offset first.

Before measuring, you can start the spindle by following the steps in Section “Activating the tool and the spindle”.

How do I measure the workpiece edge?

Select the machining operating area.
Switch to “JOG” mode.
Open the window for workpiece measurement.
Press this vertical softkey to open the window for measurement at the workpiece edge.
Press this softkey to measure in the X direction.
Traverse the tool, which has been measured previously, to approach the workpiece in the X direction.
Switch to handwheel control mode.
Select a suitable override feedrate, and then use the handwheel to move the tool to scratch the required workpiece edge.
Select the offset plane to save in and the measuring direction (for example, “G54” and “-”).
Enter the distance (for example, “0”) in the following window. Press this key or move the cursor to confirm your input.
Press this vertical softkey. The workpiece offset of the X axis is calculated automatically and displayed in the offset field.
Repeat the above operations to measure and set the workpiece offsets in axes Y and Z respectively.

How do I measure a rectangular workpiece?

Select the machining operating area.
Switch to “JOG” mode.
Open the lower-level menu for workpiece measurement.
Open the window for measurement of a rectangular workpiece.
Traverse the tool, which has been measured previously, in the direction of the orange arrow P1 shown in the measuring window, in order to scratch the workpiece edge with the tool tip.
Save the tool position P1 in the coordinate system.
Repeat Steps 5 and 6 to save the other three positions: P2, P3 and P4.
Save the workpiece offsets in axes X and Y after measuring all four positions.

How do I measure a circular workpiece?

Select the machining operating area.
Switch to “JOG” mode.
Open the lower-level menu for workpiece measurement.
Open the window for measurement of a circular workpiece.
Traverse the tool, which has been measured previously, in the direction of the orange arrow P1 shown in the measuring window, in order to scratch the workpiece edge with the tool tip.
Save the tool position P1 in the coordinate system.
Repeat Steps 5 and 6 to save the other two positions: P2 and P3.
Save the workpiece offsets in axes X and Y after measuring all three positions.

How do I enter or modify workpiece offsets?

In case of any problems found when testing the tool offset result, you can proceed through the following steps to make tiny adjustment of values:

Select the offset operating area.
Open the list of workpiece offsets. The list contains the values of the basic offset of the programmed workpiece offset and the active scaling factors, the mirror status display and the total of all active workpiece offsets.
Use the cursor keys to position the cursor bar in the input fields to be modified and enter the values.
Confirm your entries. The changes to the workpiece offsets are activated immediately.

How do I enter or modify the setting data?

Select the offset operating area.
Open the setting data window.
Open the window for setting the general data.
Position the cursor bar in the input fields to be modified and enter the values (see table below for the parameter descriptions).
Use this key or move the cursor to confirm your entries.

What are the parameters in the setting data window?

①/② A limitation of the spindle speed in the maximum (G26)/minimum (G25) fields can only be performed within the limit values defined in the machine data.
③ For thread cutting, a start position for the spindle is displayed as the start angle. A multiple thread can be cut by changing the angle when the thread cutting operation is repeated.

How do I set the time counter?

Select the offset operating area.
Open the setting data window.
Open the time counter window.
Position the cursor bar in the input fields to be modified and enter the values (see table below for the parameter descriptions).
Use this key or move the cursor to confirm your entries.

What are the parameters in the window for timers and workpiece counters?

① The total number of workpieces produced (total actual)
② The number of workpieces required (workpiece setpoint)
③ The number of all workpieces produced since the starting time
④ The total run time of NC programs in “AUTO” mode and the run time of all programs between NC start and end of program/RESET. The timer is set to zero with each power-up of the control system.
⑤ The run time of the selected NC program in seconds The default value is 0 each time a new NC program starts up. You can set MD27860 to ensure that this value will be deleted even if there is a jump to the beginning of the program with GOTOs or in the event of ASUPs (used for tool change in “JOG” and “MM+” modes) and PROG_EVENTs starting.
⑥ Processing time in seconds
⑦ The time since the last system power-up with default values (“cold restart”) in minutes
⑧ The time since the last normal system power-up (“warm restart”) in minutes

What happens to the timer in case of a control power-up with default values?

The timer is automatically reset to zero.

How do I set the working area limitation?

Select the offset operating area.
Open the setting data window.
Open the working area limitation window.
Position the cursor on the input field to be modified and enter the required value.
Position the cursor on the checkbox for value activation located after the input field.
Press this key to activate or deactivate your input in Step 4.

What are the parameters in the window for working area limitation?

① Displays the axes that exist in the machine coordinate system (MCS), workpiece coordinate system (WCS), or relative coordinate system (REL)
②/④ The minimum/maximum traversing distance specified for the axes
③/⑤ Activates or deactivates the entered minimum/maximum value
⑥ Unit for the traversing distance

How do I modify miscellaneous setting data?

Select the system data operating area.
Open the window for machine data.
Open the window for the expert list.
Select a group of setting data you desire to modify.
Press these softkeys to search for your desired setting data with the data number/name. Alternatively, you can position the cursor on the input field to be modified and enter the desired value. To switch to the desired axis when modifying the axis-specific setting data, press the corresponding softkey.
Press this key or move the cursor to confirm your entries.

What is the functionality of the R parameters?

The “R variables” start screen lists the R parameters that exist within the control system. You can set or query these global parameters in any program as required.

How do I set R parameters?

Select the offset operating area.
Open the list of R parameters.
Press the cursor keys to navigate in the list, and enter the values in the input fields to be modified. Note: You can search for your desired R variable with this softkey. By default, the function searches the R number. You can press this softkey to activate the option of searching by R name. Define the R name as desired, if necessary.
Press this key or move the cursor to confirm your entries. For more information about R parameters, see Section “Arithmetic parameter R”.

What is the functionality of the user data?

The “User data” start screen lists the user data that exist within the control system. You can set or query these global parameters in any program as required.

How do I set user data?

Select the offset operating area.
Open the list of user data.
Use the cursor keys to navigate in the list, and enter the values in the input fields to be modified. Note: You can search for your desired user data with this softkey. You can press this softkey to continue searching your desired user data.
Use this key or move the cursor to confirm your entries.

How long are the date and time settings effective if the control system is powered off for a long time at 25 °C surrounding air temperature?

The settings of date and time are effective for 30 days.

How do I set the date and time?

By default, the system date and time remain the factory settings. You can proceed through the following operating sequence to change the date and time as required.

Select the system data operating area.
Open the date and time setting window through the following softkey operations.
Enter the date and time in the specified format.
Press this softkey to confirm your settings.

How do I execute or transfer a part program from an external source?

You’re recommended to use the Notepad editor with ANSI character encoding to create/edit part program files on the computer. Program files in other encoding formats (for example, Unicode) may cause unexpected errors after being imported into the control system. The USB interface on the front of the PPU can be used to connect to a USB device, for example:

An external USB memory stick, to transfer data between the USB stick and the control system.
An external USB keyboard which functions as an external NC keyboard.

How do I execute from external (through USB interface)?

Prerequisite: A USB memory stick (which includes the part program to be executed) is inserted in the front USB interface of the PPU. Proceed as follows to execute a part program from external through the USB interface:

Select the program management operating area.
Press this softkey to enter the USB directory, and select the program file you desire to execute.
To directly execute the program, press this softkey. The system automatically switches to “AUTO” mode in the machining operating area. The program is transferred to the buffer memory on the control system and then displayed in the following window: You can also press this key on the PPU to view the program blocks first before executing. Then press the following softkey to execute:
If desired, you can use this softkey to specify how you want the program to be executed. For more information of the program control, refer to Section “Program control functions”.
Press this key to execute the program. The program is reloaded continuously. Either at the end of the program or after pressing this key, the program is automatically removed from the control system.

Note: The USB directory is automatically identified if a USB stick is inserted. Do not remove the USB stick during the external program execution through the USB interface.

How do I transfer from external (through USB interface)?

Prerequisite: A USB memory stick (which includes the part program to be transferred) is inserted in the front USB interface of the PPU.

Proceed as follows to transfer a part program from external through the USB interface:

Select the program management operating area.
Press this softkey to enter the USB directory.
Select the program file you desire to transfer.
Press this softkey to copy the file to the buffer memory on the control system.
Enter the program directory.
Press this softkey to paste the copied file into the program directory.

How do I execute/transfer through the Ethernet connection?

A connected network drive allows you to access a shared directory on your computer from the control system. The network drive functions based on the Ethernet connection between the control system and a computer. The following Ethernet connections are possible:

Direct connection: connecting the control system directly to a computer
Network connection: integrating the control system into an existing Ethernet network

How do I establish a direct connection?

Proceed as follows to establish a direct connection:

Connect the control system with the computer using an Ethernet cable.
Select the system data operating area.
Press the extension key.
Enter the main screen of the service control options through the following softkey operations: →
Press this softkey to set up a direct connection between the control system and the computer. The following dialog box pops up on the screen:

How do I establish a network connection?

Proceed as follows to establish a network connection:

Connect the control system with the local network using an Ethernet cable.
Select the system data operating area on the PPU.
Press the extension key.
Enter the main screen of the service control options through the following softkey operations: →
Press this softkey to enter the window for the network configuration. Note: make sure this vertical softkey is not selected.
Configure the network as required in the following window: You can configure the DHCP with this key. Note: if you select “No” for DHCP, you must enter the IP address (which must belong to the same network as that of your computer) and subnet mask manually.
Press this softkey to save the configuration. If you select “Yes” for DHCP, you also need to restart the control system to activate the network configuration.

What are the network configurations?

Protocol:	TCP/IP
DHCP:	Yes
Cmpt. name:	HOHAME_HCU
IP address:	176 16 202 200
Subnet mask:	255 255 255 0

How do I create and connect a network drive?

Proceed as follows to create and connect a network drive:

Share a directory on your local disk on your computer.
Select the program management operating area.
Press this softkey to go to the network drive directory.
Press this softkey to go to the window for configuring the network drives.
Press this key to select a drive identifier: N1, N2, or N3.
Move the cursor to the following input fields: ①: Enter the user name of your Windows account ②: Enter the logon password (case sensitive) of your Windows account ③: Enter the IP address of the server and the share name of the shared directory on your computer. Example: //140.231.196.90/808D
Press this softkey to confirm and the configured network drive appears on the screen as follows. The drive icon is yellow if the network drive is connected successfully; otherwise, the icon is gray. You can delete a selected network drive using this softkey.

Note: After you properly configure all the settings for the direct connection between the control system and the network drive, if the network drive connection is still invalid, contact your Windows system administrator for possible problems with your operating system configuration.

How do I execute from external (through Ethernet connection)?

Prerequisites:

An Ethernet connection has been established between the control system and the computer.
A network drive (which includes the part program to be executed) has been created and connected.

Proceed as follows to execute a part program from external through the Ethernet connection:

Select the program management operating area.
Press this softkey to view the network drive(s) created.
Select the desired network drive (which includes the part program to be executed) and press this key to open it.
Select the program file you desire to execute.
Press this softkey and the system automatically switches to “AUTO” mode in the machining operating area. The program is transferred to the buffer memory on the control system and then displayed in the following window:
If desired, you can use this softkey to specify how you want the program to be executed. For more information of the program control, refer to Section “Program control functions”.
Press this key to execute the program. The program is reloaded continuously. Either at the end of the program or after pressing this key, the program is automatically removed from the control system.

How do I transfer from external (through Ethernet connection)?

Prerequisites:

An Ethernet connection has been established between the control system and the computer.
A network drive (which includes the part program to be transferred) has been created and connected.

Proceed as follows to transfer a part program from external through the Ethernet connection:

Select the program management operating area.
Press this softkey to view the network drive(s) created.
Select the desired network drive (which includes the part program to be transferred) and press this key to open it.
Select the program file you desire to transfer.
Press this softkey to copy the file to the buffer memory on the control system.
Enter the program directory.
Press this softkey to paste the copied file into the program directory.

How do I execute/transfer through the RS232 interface (PPU160.2 only)?

Note: The RS232 interface is available on the PPU160.2 only.

What is SinuComPCIN?

To enable the RS232 communication between a control system and a computer, you must have the RS232 communication tool SinuComPCIN installed on your computer. This tool is available in the SINUMERIK 808D/SINUMERIK 808D ADVANCED Toolbox.

How do I configure RS232 communication settings?

Proceed as follows to configure the communication settings for the RS232 interface:

Connect the control system with the computer using an RS232 cable.
Select the program management operating area.
Press this softkey to go to the RS232 directory.
Press this softkey to open the window for RS232 communication settings.
Use this key to set the values in the following window as required:
Press this softkey to save your settings. If desired, you can press the following softkey to reset the settings to defaults:
Return to the RS232 main screen.
Start the SinuComPCIN on your computer.
Press this button on the main screen and then select the desired baud rate from the list. Note that this baud rate must be the same as that you have selected on the NC side.
Save the settings with this button.
Return to the main screen of SinuComPCIN.

What are the communications settings?

Device	10
Baud rate	NoneO
Stop bits	80
Parity	1a
Data bits	NO
End of transMis.
ConfirM overwrite
RTS CTS

How do I execute from external (through RS232 interface)?

Prerequisites:

The tool SinuComPCIN has been installed on your computer.
The RS232 communication has been successfully established between the control system and the computer.

Proceed as follows to execute a part program from external through the RS232 interface:

Select the program management operating area.
Press this softkey to go to the RS232 directory.
Press this vertical softkey, and the system automatically changes to “AUTO” mode in the machining operating area.
Press this button on the main screen of SinuComPCIN and select the desired program for execution, for example, Test.mpf. The program is transferred to the buffer memory on the control system and then displayed in the following window:
If desired, you can use this softkey to specify how you want the program to be executed (for more information of the program control, refer to Section “Program control functions”).
Press this key to execute the program. The program is reloaded continuously. Either at the end of the program or after pressing the following key, the program is automatically removed from the control system:

Note: When using the external execution via RS232, the RS232 interface must not be active for another application. This means, for example, the RS232 interface must not be active through the following operation: + → →

How do I transfer from external (through RS232 interface)?

Prerequisites:

The tool SinuComPCIN has been installed on your computer.
The RS232 communication has been successfully established between the control system and the computer.

Note: The program files can be transferred only to the system drive N:\MPF or N:\CMA; therefore, before transfer make sure the drive identifier contained in the first line in the program file is “N” and the target directory in the second line is “N_MPF” or “N_CMA”. If not, you must change manually, for example:

Proceed as follows to transfer a part program from external through the RS232 interface:

Select the program management operating area.
Press this softkey to go to the RS232 directory.
Press this vertical softkey in the RS232 window.
Press this button on the main screen of SinuComPCIN and select the desired program for execution, for example, Test.mpf. The data transferring starts. On the NC side: On the SinuComPCIN side:
Wait until SinuComPCIN has finished data transfer, and click this button.

How do I configure the firewall?

Secure access and communication is achieved through the security function of the integrated firewall. You can open the window for firewall configuration through the following operations: + → → → →

Configurable ports are listed in the following window: The ports are disabled by default and can be enabled when necessary. To change the port status, select the relevant port using the cursor keys and press either of the following keys to enable or disable the port: / WARNING Death, severe personal injury and/or property damage due to improper firewall configuration Improper firewall configuration may cause network security risks, for example, data leakage, virus invasion, and hacker attack. This may lead to incorrect parameterization or machine malfunction, which in turn can result in death, severe injuries and/or property damage.

Do not use the control system inside a network infrastructure without an additional security product.
You must make sure you disable all ports not needed in the firewall configuration.

What are the configurable ports?

102 tcp	S7 protocol, for PLC Prag Tool connect.
5900 tcp	HMI AFB commu., for AMM remote control

How do I extend/deactivate the CNC lock function?

To extend/deactivate the CNC lock function, you must import the corresponding activation/deactivation file (.clc format) provided by the machine manufacturer into the control system. The file can be imported either directly via an Ethernet connection (network drive) or alternatively via a storage medium (for example, USB memory stick). The control system must be in the reset state for the import.

How do I import the activation/deactivation file?

Proceed through the following steps to import the file:

To import the file via USB, store the file in a USB memory stick and insert the USB memory stick into the USB interface at the front of the PPU. To import the file via Ethernet, store the file in a shared folder (network drive) on your computer and connect the network drive via Ethernet connection.
Select the system data operating area.
Press this key to view the extended softkeys.
Open the license key dialog box through the following softkey operations: → →
Press this softkey to open the file opening dialog box.
Select the target directory (USB or network drive) and press this key to open it.
Locate the desired activation/deactivation file and press this softkey to import. After the file is imported successfully, you can check the CNC lock status on the HMI screen, for example: • CNC lock function extended (with a new lock date):

What is the version license key?

Enter the licence key to activate the option. The option is activated after restart!

CF card serial number:	SPG2012060501317
Order Na. of the NCU module:	6FC5812-2G’46-0’A0
CNC lack is activated:	2017 /05/01

Note If an error occurs when importing the activation file, an error-specific alarm will be issued. The state of the CNC lock function remains unchanged.

Note We recommend that you create a complete commissioning archive over all control system components after deactivating the CNC lock function. If necessary, this commissioning archive can be used to recommission the control system without re-deactivating the CNC lock function.

If a date earlier than the actual date is set for activated CNC lock function, what happens?

Alarm 8065 is issued after NC restart and then NC start is disabled. In this case, you must correct the date and perform an NC restart again to clear the alarm.

If during the correcting, a future date is set inadvertently, what happens?

Alarm 8066 is issued. Provided no NC restart has been performed, the date can still be corrected. After NC restart, a date set in the future is considered as being an actual date and can no longer be reset.

What happens after NC restart if a future date set is earlier than the lock date?

It reduces the service life until the lock date.

If a date equal to or later than the lock date is set after an NC restart, what happens?

Alarm 8064 is issued and the NC start disabled. Make sure you set the date correctly prior to NC restart.

How can you save the NC and PLC data of the volatile memory to the permanent memory of the control system?

You can save the data by performing an internal data backup.

What are the prerequisites for backing up data internally?

A valid system password has been set on the control system.
There is no program currently being executed.

How do you save data internally?

Select the system data operating area.
Press this softkey to open the window for data saving.
Press this softkey to start saving. Do not carry out any operator actions while the data back-up is running.

What are the two methods to load internally backed up data?

Method 1:
1. Press this key while the control system is booting.
2. Use the cursor keys to select “Reload saved user data” in the setup menu.
3. Press this key to confirm.
Method 2:
1. Select the system data operating area.
2. Press this softkey.
3. Enter the NC startup screen.
4. Use the cursor keys to select the third startup mode as follows: Save data ✓ OK □ Standard power-up □ Power-up with default data C!] Power-up with saved data
5. Press this softkey to confirm. The control system restarts with the saved data.

What message is displayed on the screen after the control system starts up successfully with the saved data?

The following message is displayed on the screen after the control system starts up successfully with the saved data: You must enter the password again after you have powered up the control system with the saved data.

How do you perform a complete data backup of the control system?

You can perform a complete data backup of the control system by creating a startup archive.

How do you back up data externally in a data archive?

Select the system data operating area.
Press this softkey to open the window for creating or restoring a startup archive. There are three options for creating a data archive. Note that options ① and ③ are visible only with the manufacturer password. ① Creates a data archive for series machine commissioning ② Creates a data archive for a complete system backup ③ Backs up the complete system data on the system CompactFlash Card (CF card)
Select option ② and press this softkey to confirm, and the dialog box for saving the archive file opens. The name of the data archive is “arc_startup.arc” by default. You can also use your favorite name. The file name extension “.arc” must be entered.
Select your desired directory and press this key to open it. Note that you can press this key on the PPU to toggle between the file name input field and the directory selection area. ✓ OK 004062 ~

[I Archv.

✓ OK Backup data loaded –:– 5. Press this softkey to confirm and the archive information dialog box opens. 6. Specify the properties of the archive and press this softkey. The control system starts crea-tion of the startup archive.

What happens if you press <CTRL + S> when you are in any operating area (on PPU161.3 and PPU160.2 only)?

Pressing <CTRL + S> when you are in any operating area (on PPU161.3 and PPU160.2 only) creates a startup archive on the connected USB stick. In addition, it automatically saves the action log to the USB stick.

How do you restore a startup archive?

Select the system data operating area.
Press this softkey to open the startup archive window.
Select the following option and press this softkey to restore the startup archive:
Select the backup path to locate the archive file and press this softkey to confirm.
Press this softkey to confirm the archive information.
Press this softkey to continue and start restoring the startup archive. The control system restarts to complete restoring the archive.

How do you back up files by copying and pasting?

In the program management operating area, program files or directories can be copied into another directory or onto a different drive by means of copying and pasting operations.

Operating sequence

Select the program management operating area.
Enter the program directory.
Select the program file or directory to be backed up.
Press this softkey to copy the file to the clipboard.
Select a desired directory or drive as the data target.
Press this softkey to paste the copied data into the current directory.

What does the softkey do?

Backs up the files in the folder for storing the user cycles on the control system. This folder is visible with the manufacturer password.
Backs up the files onto an USB stick.
Backs up the files onto a computer. This requires a connected network drive on the control system. For more information, see section “Configuring the network drive”.
Backs up the files in the folder for storing the manufacturer files on the control system. This folder is visible with the manufacturer password.
Backs up the files in the folder for storing end user files on the control system.

The RS232 interface is available on what?

The RS232 interface is available on the PPU160.2 only.

How do you back up files via RS232 interface?

The program files can be backed up onto a computer via the RS232 interface.

Operating sequence

Connect the control system with the computer using an RS232 cable.
Configure the communication settings for the RS232 interface (see Section “Configuring RS232 communication”).
Press this button on the main screen of SinuComPCIN and input the name for the text file, for example,Test.txt.
Select the program management operating area on the PPU.
Enter the program directory.
Select the program file you desire to back up.
Press this softkey to copy the file to the buffer memory.
Enter the RS232 directory.
Press this vertical softkey in the RS232 window. The file transferring starts.
Wait until SinuComPCIN finishes data transfer, and click this button.

Where can you find more information about data backup?

For more information about data backup, refer to the SINUMERIK 808D/SINUMERIK 808D ADVANCED Diagnostics Manual.

How do you activate the calculator function?

You can activate the calculator function by pressing this key on the PPU when you position the cursor on the desired input field to calculate the cycle relevant parameters, contour parameters, tool parameters, workpiece offsets, R parameters, etc.

What are the operations and functions available for calculating?

For calculating, the four basic arithmetic operations are available, as well as the functions “sine”, “cosine”, “squaring” and “square root”. A bracket function is provided to calculate nested terms. The bracket depth is unlimited.

What happens if the input field is already occupied by a value?

If the input field is already occupied by a value, the function will accept this value into the input line of the pocket calculator.

What does pressing this softkey do in the calculator function?

Pressing this softkey empties the input line of the calculator.

After inputting a desired arithmetic statement in the input line of the calculator, what happens when you press this key?

After inputting a desired arithmetic statement in the input line of the calculator, pressing this key starts the calculation. The result is displayed in the pocket calculator.

What does selecting this softkey do in the calculator function?

Selecting this softkey enters the result in the input field at the current cursor position and closes the pocket calculator automatically.

What does pressing this softkey do in the calculator function?

Pressing this softkey aborts the calculation result (if any) and exits the pocket calculator.

What do the following characters mean in the calculator function?

+, -, *, /: Basic arithmetic operations
S: Sine function The X value (in degrees) in front of the input cursor is replaced by the sin(X) value.
O: Cosine function The X value (in degrees) in front of the input cursor is replaced by the cos(X) value.
Q: Square function The X value in front of the input cursor is replaced by the X2 value.
R: Square root function The X value in front of the input cursor is replaced by the √X value.
( ): Bracket function (X+Y)*Z

What are the results for the following calculation examples?

Task: 100 + (673) Input: 100+673 Result: -> 301
Task: sin(45_) Input: 45 S Result: -> 0.707107
Task: cos(45_) Input: 45 O Result: -> 0.707107
Task: 42 Input: 4 Q Result: -> 16
Task: √4 Input: 4 R Result: -> 2
Task: (34+3*2)10 Input: (34+32)*10 Result: -> 400

What are the functions that the pocket calculator offers to calculate auxiliary points on a contour?

Calculating the tangential transition between a circle sector and a straight line
Moving a point in the plane
Converting polar coordinates to Cartesian coordinates
Adding the second end point of a straight line/straight line contour section given from an angular relation

What are the conventions for naming a program?

Use a maximum of 24 letters or 12 Chinese characters for a program name (the character length of the file extension excluded)
Separate the file extension only with a decimal point
Enter the file extension “.SPF” if the current default program type is MPF (main program) and you desire to create a subprogram
Enter the file extension “.MPF” if the current default program type is SPF (subprogram) and you desire to create a main program
Do not enter the file extension if you desire to take the current default program type
Avoid using special characters for program names.

What is an example of a G code program?

l!Jpe: Main program MPF Name: PROGRAM 1

What does the NC program consist of?

The NC program consists of a sequence of blocks (see the table below). Each block represents a machining step. Instructions are written in the blocks in the form of words. The last block in the execution sequence contains a special word for the end of the program, for example, M2.

What is an example of the NC program structure?

Block	Word	Word	Word	…	Comment
Block	N10	G0	X20	…	; First block
Block	N20	G2	Z37	…	; Second block
Block	N30	G91	…	…	; …
Block	N40	…	…	…
Block	N50	M2			; End of program

What are the advantages of using the commands described in the PDF to program dimensions?

This has the advantage that no extensive calculations have to be made for NC programming.

Where do the commands described in the PDF stand in most cases?

The commands described in this section stand in most cases at the start of an NC program.

What is the real purpose of the commands described in the PDF?

The real purpose of this and the following sections is to illustrate the conventional structure of an NC program.

What is the basis of most NC programs?

The basis of most NC programs is a drawing with concrete dimensions.

When implementing in a NC program, what is helpful to do?

When implementing in a NC program, it is helpful to take over exactly the dimensions of a workpiece drawing into the machining program.

What are some typical dimensions used in NC programs?

Absolute dimension, G90 modally effective applies for all axes in the block, up to revocation by G91 in a following block.
Absolute dimension, X=AC(value) only this value applies only for the stated axis and is not influenced by G90/G91. This is possible for all axes and also for SPOS, SPOSA spindle positionings, and interpolation parameters I, J, K.
Absolute dimension, X=DC(value) directly approaching the position by the shortest route, only this value applies only for the stated rotary axis and is not influenced by G90/G91. This is also possible for SPOS, SPOSA spindle positionings.
Absolute dimension, X=ACP(value) approaching the position in positive direction, only this value is set only for the rotary axis, the range of which is set to 0… < 360 degrees in the machine data.
Absolute dimension, X=ACN(value) approaching the position in negative direction, only this value is set only for the rotary axis, the range of which is set to 0… < 360 degrees in the machine data.
Incremental dimension, G91 modally effective applies for all axes in the block, until it is revoked by G90 in a following block.
Incremental dimension, X=IC(value) only this value applies exclusively for the stated axis and is not influenced by G90/G91. This is possible for all axes and also for SPOS, SPOSA spindle positionings, and interpolation parameters I, J, K.
Inch dimension, G70 applies for all linear axes in the block, until revoked by G71 in a following block.
Metric dimension, G71 applies for all linear axes in the block, until revoked by G70 in a following block.
Inch dimension as G70, however, G700 applies also for feedrate and length-related setting data.
Metric dimension as G71, however, G710 applies also for feedrate and length-related setting data.
Diameter programming, DIAMON on
Diameter programming, DIAMOF off
Diameter programming, DIAM90 for traversing blocks with G90. Radius programming for traversing blocks with G91.

What is the functionality of the instructions G17 to G19?

To assign, for example, tool radius and tool length compensations, a plane with two axes is selected from the three axes X, Y and Z. In this plane, you can activate a tool radius compensation. For drill and cutter, the length compensation (length1) is assigned to the axis standing vertically on the selected plane. It is also possible to use a 3-dimensional length compensation for special cases. Another influence of plane selection is described with the appropriate functions (e.g. Section “Support for the contour definition programming”). The individual planes are also used to define the direction of rotation of the circle for the circular interpolation CW or CCW. In the plane in which the circle is traversed, the abscissa and the ordinate are designed and thus also the direction of rotation of the circle. Circles can also be traversed in a plane other than that of the currently active G17 to G19 plane (For more information, see Section “Circular interpolation”.).

What are the possible plane and axis assignments?

G function	Plane (abscissa/ordinate)	Vertical axis on plane (length compensation axis when drilling/milling)
G17	X/Y	Z
G18	Z/X	Y
G19	Y/Z	X

What is a programming example for plane and axis assignments when drilling/milling?

N10 G17 T… D… M… ; X/Y plane selected N20 … X… Y… Z… ; tool length compensation (length1) in Z axis

What is the functionality of the instructions G90, G91, AC, IC?

With the instructions G90/G91, the written positional data X, Y, Z… are evaluated as a coordinate point (G90) or as an axis position to traverse to (G91). G90/G91 applies to all axes. Irrespective of G90/G91, certain positional data can be specified for certain blocks in absolute/incremental dimensions using AC/IC. These instructions do not determine the path by which the end points are reached; this is provided by a G group (G0, G1, G2 and G3… For more information, see Sections “Linear interpolation” and “Circular interpolation”.).

What is the programming for absolute/incremental dimensioning?

G90 ; Absolute dimension data
G91 ; Incremental dimension data
X=AC(…) ; Absolute dimensioning for a certain axis (here: X axis), non-modal
X=IC(…) ; Incremental dimensioning for a certain axis (here: X axis), non-modal

What is absolute dimensioning?

With absolute dimensioning, the dimensioning data refers to the zero of the coordinate system currently active (workpiece or current workpiece coordinate system or machine coordinate system). This is dependent on which offsets are currently active: programmable, settable, or no offsets. Upon program start, G90 is active for all axes and remains active until it is deselected in a subsequent block by G91 (incremental dimensioning data) (modally active).

What is incremental dimensioning?

With incremental dimensioning, the numerical value of the path information corresponds to the axis path to be traversed. The leading sign indicates the traversing direction. G91 applies to all axes and can be deselected in a subsequent block via G90 (absolute dimensioning).

How do you specify a dimension with =AC(…), =IC(…)?

After the end point coordinate, write an equality sign. The value must be specified in round brackets. Absolute dimensions are also possible for circle center points using =AC(…). Otherwise, the reference point for the circle center is the circle starting point.

What is a programming example for absolute/incremental dimensioning?

N10 G90 X20 Z90 ; Absolute dimensions
N20 X75 Z=IC(-32) ; X-dimensions remain absolute, incremental Z dimension
N180 G91 X40 Z20 ; Switch-over to incremental dimensioning
N190 X-12 Z=AC(17) ; X-remains incremental dimensioning, Z-absolute

What is the functionality of the dimensions in metric units and inches: G71, G70, G710, G700?

If workpiece dimensions that deviate from the base system settings of the control system are present (inch or mm), the dimensions can be entered directly in the program. The required conversion into the base system is performed by the control system.

How do you program the dimensions in metric units and inches: G71, G70, G710, G700?

G70 ; Inch dimensions
G71 ’ Metric dimensions
G700 ; Inch dimensions, also for feedrate F
G710 ; Metric dimensions, also for feedrate F

What is an example of programming the dimensions in metric units and inches?

N10 G70 X10 Z30 ; Inch dimensions
N20 X40 Z50  ;G70 continues to act
N80 G71 X19 Z17.3 ; metric dimensioning from this point on

What is some information about programming the dimensions in metric units and inches?

Depending on the default setting you have selected, the control system interprets all geometric values as either metric or inch dimensions. Tool offsets and settable work offsets including their display are also to be understood as geometrical values; this also applies to the feedrate F in mm/min or inch/min. The default setting can be set via machine data.

What are all examples listed in this PDF based on?

A metric default setting.

What does G70 or G71 evaluate?

All geometric parameters that directly refer to the workpiece, either as inches or metric units, for example:

Positional data X, Y, Z, … for G0,G1,G2,G3,G33, CIP, CT
Interpolation parameters I, J, K (also thread pitch)
Circle radius CR
Programmable work offset (TRANS, ATRANS)
Polar radius RP

What geometric parameters are not affected by G70/G71?

All remaining geometric parameters that are not direct workpiece parameters, such as feedrates, tool offsets, and settable work offsets.

What does G700/G710 affect?

The feedrate F (inch/min, inch/rev. or mm/min, mm/rev.).

What is the functionality of polar coordinates, pole definition: G110, G111, G112?

In addition to the common specification in Cartesian coordinates (X, Y, Z), the points of a workpiece can be specified using the polar coordinates. Polar coordinates are also helpful if a workpiece or a part of it is dimensioned from a central point (pole) with specification of the radius and the angle.

What plane do the polar coordinates refer to?

The plane activated with G17 to G19. In addition, the third axis standing vertically on this plane can be specified. When doing so, spatial specifications can be programmed as cylinder coordinates.

What does the polar radius specify?

The distance of the point to the pole. It is stored and must only be written in blocks in which it changes, after changing the pole or when switching the plane.

What is the polar angle always referred to?

The horizontal axis (abscissa) of the plane (for example, with G17: X axis). Positive or negative angle specifications are possible. The polar angle remains stored and must only be written in blocks in which it changes, after changing the pole or when switching the plane.

How is the pole defined in programming?

G110 Pole specification relative to the setpoint position last programmed (in the plane, e.g. with G17: X/Y)
G111 ; Pole specification relative to the origin of the current workpiece coordinate system (in the plane, e.g. with G17: X/Y)
G112 ; Pole specification, relative to the last valid pole; preserve plane

What are some notes about pole specifications?

Pole definitions can also be performed using polar coordinates. This makes sense if a pole already exists.
If no pole is defined, the origin of the current workpiece coordinate system will act as the pole.

What is an example of programming polar coordinates, pole definition?

N10 G17 ; X/Y plane
N20 G0 X0 Y0 
N30 G111 X20 Y10 ; Pole coordinates in the current workpiece coordinate system
N40 G1 RP=50 AP=30 F1000 
N50 G110 X-10 Y20 
N60 G1 RP=30 AP=45 F1000 
N70 G112 X40 Y20 ; New pole, relative to the last pole as a polar coordinate
N80 G1 RP=30 AP=135 ; Polar coordinate
M30

How can the positions programmed using polar coordinates be traversed?

The positions programmed using polar coordinates can also be traversed as positions specified with Cartesian coordinates as follows:

G0 – linear interpolation with rapid traverse
G1 – linear interpolation with feedrate
G2 – circular interpolation CW
G3 – circular interpolation CCW

What is the functionality of the programmable work offset: TRANS, ATRANS?

The programmable work offset can be used:

for recurring shapes/arrangements in various positions on the workpiece
when selecting a new reference point for the dimensioning
as a stock allowance when roughing

This results in the current workpiece coordinate system. The rewritten dimensions use this as a reference. The offset is possible in all axes.

How do you program the programmable work offset?

TRANS X… Y… Z… ; programmable offset, deletes old instructions for offsetting, rotation, scaling factor, mirroring
ATRANS X… Y… Z… ; programmable offset, additive to existing instructions
TRANS ; without values: clears old instructions for offset, rotation, scaling factor, mirroring

What do the instructions that contain TRANS or ATRANS require?

A separate block.

What is an example of programming the programmable work offset?

N20 TRANS X20 Y15 ; Programmable offset
N30 L10 ; Subroutine call; contains the geometry to be offset
N70 TRANS ; Offset cleared

What is the functionality of the programmable rotation: ROT, AROT?

The rotation is performed in the current plane G17 or G18 or G19 using the value of RPL=… specified in degrees.

How do you program the programmable rotation?

ROT RPL=… ; Programmable rotation, deletes old instructions for offsetting, rotation, scaling factor, mirroring
AROT RPL=… ; Programmable rotation, additive to existing instructions
ROT ; Without values: clears old instructions for offset, rotation, scaling factor, mirroring

What do the instructions that contain ROT or AROT require?

A separate block.

What is an example of programming the programmable rotation?

N10 G17 ...  ; X/Y plane
N20 TRANS X20 Y10 ; Programmable offset
N30 L10 ; Subroutine call; contains the geometry to be offset
N40 TRANS X30 Y26 ; New offset
N50 AROT RPL=45 ; Additive 45 degree rotation
N60 L10 ; Subroutine call
N70 TRANS ; Offset and rotation cleared

What is the functionality of the programmable scale factor: SCALE, ASCALE?

A scale factor can be programmed for all axes with SCALE/ASCALE. The path is enlarged or reduced by this factor in the axis specified. The currently set coordinate system is used as the reference for the scale change.

How do you program the programmable scale factor?

SCALE X… Y… Z… ; Programmable scaling factor, clears the old instructions for offset, rotation, scaling factor, mirroring
ASCALE X… Y… Z… ; Programmable scaling factor, additive to existing instructions
SCALE ; Without values: clears the old instructions for offset, rotation, scaling factor, mirroring

What do the instructions that contain SCALE or ASCALE require?

A separate block.

What should be noted when using the programmable scale factor?

For circles, the same factor should be used in both axes. If ATRANS is programmed with SCALE/ASCALE active, these offset values are also scaled.

What is an example of programming the programmable scale factor?

N10 G17 ; X/Y plane
N20 L10 ; Programmed contour original
N30 SCALE X2 Y2 ; Contour in X and Y enlarged two times
N40 L10 
N50 ATRANS X2.5 Y18 ; Offset values are also scaled
N60 L10

What is the functionality of the programmable mirroring: MIRROR, AMIRROR?

MIRROR and AMIRROR can be used to mirror workpiece shapes on coordinate axes. All traversing motions of axes for which mirroring is programmed are reversed in their direction.

How do you program the programmable mirroring?

MIRROR X0 Y0 Z0 ; Programmable mirroring, clears old instructions for offset, rotation, scaling factor, mirroring
AMIRROR X0 Y0 Z0 ; Programmable mirroring, additive to existing instructions
MIRROR ; Without values: clears old instructions for offset, rotation, scaling factor, mirroring

What do the instructions that contain MIRROR or AMIRROR require?

A separate block. The axis value has no influence. A value, however, must be specified.

What should be noted when using the programmable mirroring?

Any active tool radius compensation (G41/G42) is reversed automatically when mirroring. The direction of rotation of the circle G2/G3 is also reversed automatically when mirroring.

What is an example of programming the programmable mirroring?

Mirroring in different coordinate axes with influence on an active tool radius compensation and G2/G3:

... 
N10 G17 ; X/Y plane, Z standing vertically on it
N20 L10 ; Programmed contour with G41
N30 MIRROR X0 ; Direction changed in X
N40 L10 ; Mirrored contour
N50 MIRROR Y0 ; Direction changed in Y
N60 L10 
N70 AMIRROR X0 ; Mirroring once more, but now in X
N80 L10 ; Twice-mirrored contour
N90 MIRROR ; Mirroring off

What is the functionality of the workpiece coordinate system – settable work offset: G54 to G59, G500, G53, G153?

The settable work offset specifies the position of the workpiece zero on the machine (offset of the workpiece zero with respect to the machine zero). This offset is determined upon clamping of the workpiece into the machine and must be entered in the corresponding data field by the operator. The value is activated by the program by selection from six possible groupings: G54 to G59.

What should be noted about the workpiece coordinate system?

Workpiece clamping at an angle is possible by entering the angles of rotation around the machine axes. These rotation portions are activated with the work offset G54 to G59.

How do you program the workpiece coordinate system – settable work offset?

G54 to G59 ; 1. to 6th settable work offset
G500 ; Settable work offset OFF – modal
G53 ; settable work offset OFF, non-modal, also suppresses programmable offset
G153 ;settable work offset OFF, non-modal; additionally suppresses base frame

What is an example of programming the workpiece coordinate system – settable work offset?

N10 G54  ; Call first settable work offset
N20 L47  ; Machining of workpiece 1, here using L47
N30 G55  ; Call second settable work offset
N40 L47  ; Machining of workpiece 2, here using L47
N50 G56  ; Call third settable work offset
N60 L47  ; Machining of workpiece 3, here using L47
N70 G57  ; Call fourth settable work offset
N80 L47  ; Machining of workpiece 4, here using L47
N90 G500 G0 X ; Deactivate settable work offset

What is the functionality of the NC block compression (COMPON, COMPCURV, COMPCAD)?

CAD/CAM systems normally produce linear blocks, which meet the configured accuracy specifications. In the case of complex contours, a large volume of data and short path sections can result. The short path sections restrict the processing rate. By using a compressor function, the contour, specified by using linear blocks, is approached using polynomial blocks. This has the following advantages:

Reduction of the number of required part program blocks for describing the workpiece contour
Continuous block transitions
Higher maximum path velocities

What compressor functions are available?

COMPON The block transitions are only constant in the velocity, while acceleration of the participating axes can be in jumps at block transitions.
COMPCURV Block transitions have continuous acceleration. This ensures both smooth velocity and acceleration of all axes at block transitions.
COMPCAD The compression that uses a lot of computation time and memory space is optimized regarding surface quality and speed. COMPCAD should only be used if measures to improve the surface cannot be taken by the CAD/CAM program in advance.

COMPOF terminates the compressor function.

What is the syntax for NC block compression?

COMPON
COMPCURV
COMPCAD
COMPOF

What is the meaning of each NC block compression syntax?

COMPON: Command to activate the compressor function COMPON. Effective: Modal
COMPCURV: Command to activate the compressor function COMPCURV. Effective: Modal
COMPCAD: Command to activate the compressor function COMPCAD. Effective: Modal
COMPOF: Command to deactivate the currently active compressor function.

What are the supplementary conditions for NC block compression?

The NC block compression is generally executed for linear blocks (G1).
Only blocks that comply with a simple syntax are compressed: N… G1X… Y… Z… F… ;comment All other blocks are executed unchanged (no compression).
Motion blocks with extended addresses such as C=100 or A=AC(100) are also condensed.
The position values do not have to be programmed directly, but can also be indirectly specified using parameter assignments, e.g. X=R1*(R2+R3).
If the option “orientation transformation” is available, then NC blocks in which the tool orientation (and where relevant, also the tool rotation) is programmed using direction vectors can also be compressed.
It is interrupted by any other type of NC instruction, e.g., an auxiliary function output.

What is an example of COMPON programming code?

Program code	Comment
N10 COMPON	Compressor function COMPON on.
N11 G1 X0.37 Y2.9 F600	G1 before end point and feed.
N12 X16.87 Y-.698
N13 X16.865 Y-.72
N14 X16.91 Y-.799
…
N1037 COMPOF	Compressor function off.
…

What is an example of COMPCAD programming code?

Program code	Comment
G00 X30 Y6 Z40
G1 F10000
G642	Blending function G642 on.
SOFT	Jerk limiting SOFT on.
COMPCAD	Compressor function COMPCAD on.
STOPFIFO
N24050 Z32.499
N24051 X41.365 Z32.500
N24052 X43.115 Z32.497
N24053 X43.365 Z32.477
N24054 X43.556 Z32.449
N24055 X43.818 Z32.387
N24056 X44.076 Z32.300
…
COMPOF	Compressor function off.
G00 Z50
M30

What is the functionality of linear interpolation with rapid traverse: G0?

The rapid traverse movement G0 is used for rapid positioning of the tool, but not for direct workpiece machining. All the axes can be traversed simultaneously – on a straight path. For each axis, the maximum speed (rapid traverse) is defined in machine data. If only one axis traverses, it uses its rapid traverse. If two or three axes are traversed simultaneously, the path velocity (e.g. the resulting velocity at the tool tip) must be selected such that the maximum possible path velocity with consideration of all axes involved results. A programmed feedrate (F word) has no meaning for G0. G0 remains active until canceled by another instruction from this G group (G1, G2, G3…).

How do you program linear interpolation with rapid traverse: G0?

G0 X… Y… Z… ; Cartesian coordinates
G0 AP=… RP=… ; Polar coordinates
G0 AP=… RP=… Z… ; Cylindrical coordinates (3-dimensional)

What should be noted when programming linear interpolation with rapid traverse: G0?

Another option for linear programming is available with the angle specification ANG=…

What is an example of programming linear interpolation with rapid traverse?

N10 G0 X100 Y150 Z65 ; Cartesian coordinate
... 
N50 G0 RP=16.78 AP=45 ; Polar coordinate

What information should be considered when using linear interpolation with rapid traverse?

Another group of G functions exists for movement to the position. For G60 exact stop, a window with various precision values can be selected with another G group. For exact stop, an alternative instruction with non-modal effectiveness exists: G9. You should consider these options for adaptation to your positioning tasks.

What is the function of the feedrate F?

The feed F is the path velocity and represents the value of the geometric sum of the velocity components of all axes involved. The individual axis velocities therefore result from the portion of the axis path in the overall distance to be traversed. The feedrate F is effective for the interpolation types G1, G2, G3, CIP, and CT and is retained until a new F word is written.

How is the feedrate F programmed?

F…

Is a decimal point required for integer values when programming the feedrate F?

No. For integer values, the decimal point is not required, e.g. F300.

What is the unit of measure for F with G94 and G95?

The dimension unit for the F word is determined by G functions:

G94: F as the feedrate in mm/min
G95: Feedrate F in mm/spindle revolutions (only meaningful when the spindle is running)

What does the unit of measure for F apply to?

This unit of measure applies to metric dimensions. According to Section “Metric and inch dimensioning”, settings with inch dimensioning are also possible.

Provide a programming example for feedrate F with G94 and G95.

N10 G94 F310 ; Feedrate in mm/min N110 S200 M3 ; Spindle rotation N120 G95 F15.5 ; Feedrate in mm/revolution

What should you do if you change from G94 to G95?

Write a new F word.

What is the functionality of linear interpolation with feedrate: G1?

The tool moves from the starting point to the end point along a straight path. The path velocity is determined by the programmed F word. All axes can be traversed simultaneously. G1 remains active until canceled by another instruction from this G group (G0, G2, G3…).

How is linear interpolation with feedrate: G1 programmed?

G1 X… Y… Z… F… ; Cartesian coordinates G1 AP=… RP=… F… ; Polar coordinates G1 AP=… RP=… Z… F… ; cylindrical coordinates (3-dimensional)

Is there another option for linear programming?

Yes, another option for linear programming is available with the angle specification ANG=… (see Section “Contour definition programming”).

Provide a programming example for linear interpolation in three axes using the example of a slot:

N05 G0 G90 X40 Y48 Z2 S500 M3 ; The tool traverses in rapid traverse on P1, three axes concurrently, spindle speed = 500 rpm, clockwise N10 G1 Z-12 F100 ; Infeed on Z-12, feed 100 mm/min N15 X20 Y18 Z-10 ; Tool travels on a straight line in space on P2 N20 G0 Z100 ; Retraction in rapid traverse N25 X-20 Y80 N30 M2 ; End of program

What is required to machine a workpiece?

To machine a workpiece, spindle speed S … and direction M3/M4 are required (see Section “Spindle movements”).

What is the functionality of circular interpolation: G2, G3?

The tool moves from the starting point to the end point along a circular path. The direction is determined by the G function:

G2: clockwise
G3: counter-clockwise

How can the desired circle be described in circular interpolation?

The description of the desired circle can be given in various ways.

What are the possibilities of circle programming with G2/G3?

See the following illustration for possibilities of circle programming with G2/G3 using the example of the axes X/Y and G2.

When does G2/G3 remain active?

G2/G3 remains active until canceled by another instruction from this G group (G0, G1, …).

How is the path velocity determined in circular interpolation?

The path velocity is determined by the programmed F word.

How is G2/G3 programmed?

G2/G3 X… Y… I… J… ; End point and center point G2/G3 CR=… X… Y… ; Circle radius and end point G2/G3 AR=… I… J… ; Opening angle and center point G2/G3 AR=… X… Y… ; Opening angle and end point G2/G3 AP=… RP=… ; Polar coordinates, circle around the pole

Are there other circle programming instructions?

Yes, other circle programming instructions are:

CT – circle with tangential connection
CIP – circle via intermediate point (see following sections)

What are the input tolerances for the circle?

Circles are only accepted by the control system with a certain dimensional tolerance. The circle radius at the starting and end points are compared here. If the difference is within the tolerance, the center point is exactly set internally. Otherwise, an alarm message is issued.

When are full circles in a block possible?

Full circles in a block are only possible if the center point and the end point are specified.

How is the correct circle selected for circles with radius specification?

For circles with radius specification, the arithmetic sign of CR=… is used to select the correct circle. It is possible to program two circles with the same starting and end points, as well as with the same radius and the same direction. The negative sign in front of CR=-… determines the circle whose circle segment is greater than a semi-circle; otherwise, the circle with the circle segment is less than or equal to the semi-circle and determined as follows:

What is used to select the circle from two possible circles with radius specification?

See the following illustration for selection of the circle from two possible circles with radius specification.

Provide a programming example for the definition of the center point and end point in circular interpolation.

N5 G90 X30 Y40 ; Starting point circle for N10 N10 G2 X50 Y40 I10 J-7 ; End point and center point

What do center point values refer to?

Center point values refer to the circle starting point!

Provide a programming example for the end point and radius specification in circular interpolation.

N5 G90 X30 Y40 ; Starting point circle for N10 N10 G2 X50 Y40 CR=12.207 ; End point and radius

How is a circular segment larger than a semi-circle selected?

With a negative leading sign for the value with CR=-…, a circular segment larger than a semi-circle is selected.

Provide a programming example for the definition of the end point and aperture angle in circular interpolation.

N5 G90 X30 Y40 ; Starting point circle for N10 N10 G2 X50 Y40 AR=105 ; End point and aperture angle

Provide a programming example for the definition of the center point and aperture angle in circular interpolation.

N5 G90 X30 Y40 ; Starting point circle for N10 N10 G2 I10 J-7 AR=105 ; Center point and aperture angle

Provide a programming example for polar coordinates in circular interpolation.

N1 G17 ; X/Y plane N5 G90 G0 X30 Y40 ; Starting point circle for N10 N10 G111 X40 Y33 ; Pole = circle center N20 G2 RP=12.207 AP=21 ; Polar specifications

What is the functionality of circular interpolation via intermediate point: CIP?

If you know three contour points of the circle, instead of the center point or radius or aperture angle, then it is advantageous to use the CIP function. The direction of the circle results here from the position of the intermediate point (between starting and end points). The intermediate point is written according to the following axis assignment:

I1=… for the X axis,
J1=… for the Y axis,
K1=… for the Z axis.

When does CIP remain active?

CIP remains active until canceled by another instruction from this G group (G0, G1, G2, …).

What applies to the end point and the intermediate point?

The configured dimensional data G90 or G91 applies to the end point and the intermediate point.

Provide a programming example for a circle with end point and intermediate point specification using the example of G90.

N5 G90 X30 Y40 ;Starting point circle for N10 N10 CIP X50 Y40 I1=40 J1=45 ; End point and intermediate point

What is the functionality of a circle with tangential transition: CT?

With CT and the programmed end point in the current plane G17 through G19, a circle is generated which is connected tangentially to the previous path segment (circle or straight line) in this plane. This defines the radius and center point of the circle from the geometric relationships of the previous path section and the programmed circle end point.

Provide a programming example for a circle with tangential transition to the previous path section.

N10 G1 X20 F300 ; Straight line N20 CT X… Y… ; Circle with tangential connection

What is the functionality of helix interpolation: G2/G3, TURN?

With helix interpolation, two movements are overlaid:

Circular movement in the G17, G18 or G19 plane
Linear movement of the axis standing vertically on this plane.

The number of additional full-circle passes is programmed with TURN=. These are added to the actual circle programming. The helix interpolation can preferably be used for the milling of threads or of lubricating grooves in cylinders.

How is helix interpolation programmed?

G2/G3 X… Y… I… J… TURN=… ; Center and end points G2/G3 CR=… X… Y… TURN=… ; Circle radius and end point G2/G3 AR=… I… J… TURN=… ; Opening angle and center point G2/G3 AR=… X… Y… TURN=… ; Opening angle and end point G2/G3 AP=… RP=… TURN=… ; Polar coordinates, circle around the pole

Provide a programming example for helix interpolation.

N10 G17 ; X/Y plane, Z standing vertically on it N20 G0 Z50 N30 G1 X0 Y50 F300 ; Approach starting point N40 G3 X0 Y0 Z33 I0 J-25 TURN= 3 ; Helix M30

What is the functionality of feedrate override for circles: CFTCP, CFC?

For activated tool radius compensation (G41/G42) and circle programming, it is imperative to correct the feedrate at the cutter center point if the programmed F value is to act at the circle contour. Internal and external machining of a circle and the current tool radius are taken into account automatically if the tool radius compensation is enabled.

When is the feedrate correction not necessary?

This feedrate correction (override) is not necessary for linear paths. The path velocities at the cutter center point and at the programmed contour are identical.

How can you disable the feedrate override?

If you wish the programmed feedrate always to act at the cutter center point path, then disable the feedrate override. The modally acting G group that contains CFTCP/CFC (G functions) is provided for switching.

How is the feedrate override for circles programmed?

CFTCP ; Feedrate override OFF (the programmed feedrate acts at the milling cutter center point) CFC ; Feedrate override with circle ON

Provide an illustration for feedrate override G901 with internal/external machining.

See the following illustration for feedrate override G901 with internal/external machining.

What is the corrected feedrate formula for external machining?

Fcorr. = Fprog. (rcont + rtool) / rcont

What is the corrected feedrate formula for internal machining?

Fkorr. = Fprog. (rcont – rtool) / rcont

What do rcont and rtool stand for?

rcont: Radius of the circle contour rtool: Tool radius

Provide a programming example for feedrate override for circles.

N10 G42 G1 X30 Y40 F1000 ; Tool radius compensation ON N20 CFC F350 ; Feedrate override with circle ON N30 G2 X50 Y40 I10 J-7 F350 ; Feed value acts on contour N40 G3 X70 Y40 I10 J6 F300 ; Feed value acts on contour N50 CFTCP ; Feedrate override OFF, programmed feedrate value acts at the milling cutter center point N60 M30

What is the functionality of thread cutting with constant lead: G33?

This requires a spindle with position measuring system. The function G33 can be used to machine threads with constant lead of the following type: If an appropriate tool is used, tapping with compensating chuck is possible. The compensating chuck compensates the resulting path differences to a certain limited degree. The drilling depth is specified by specifying one of the axes X, Y or Z; the thread pitch is specified via the relevant I, J or K.

When does G33 remain active?

G33 remains active until canceled by another instruction from this G group (G0, G1, G2, G3…).

How is the right-hand or left-hand thread set?

Right-hand or left-hand thread is set with the rotation direction of the spindle (M3 right (CW), M4 left (CCW) – see Section “Spindle movements”). To do this, the rotation value must be programmed under address S or a rotation speed must be set.

What is provided by the standard cycle CYCLE840?

A complete cycle of tapping with compensating chuck is provided by the standard cycle CYCLE840.

How do you perform tapping using G33?

See the following programming example for tapping using G33:

Metric thread 5, pitch as per table: 0.8 mm/rev., hole already premachined

N10 G54 G0 G90 X10 Y10 Z5 S600 M3 ; Approach starting point, clockwise spindle rotation
N20 G33 Z-25 K0.8 ; Tapping, end point -25 mm
N40 Z5 K0.8 M4 ; Retraction, counter-clockwise spindle rotation
N50 G0 X30 Y30 Z20 
N60 M30

How is the axis velocity determined when using G33 threads?

With G33 threads, the velocity of the axis for the thread lengths is determined on the basis of the spindle speed and the thread pitch. The feedrate F is not relevant. It is, however, stored. However, the maximum axis velocity (rapid traverse) defined in the machine data cannot be exceeded. This will result in an alarm.

What are the considerations regarding the override switch for thread machining?

The spindle speed override switch must remain unchanged for thread machining.
The feedrate override switch has no meaning in this block.

How can G63 be used for tapping?

G63 can be used for tapping with a compensating chuck. The programmed feedrate F must match with the spindle speed S (programmed under the address “S” or specified speed) and with the thread pitch of the drill:

F [mm/min] = S [rpm] x thread pitch [mm/rev.]

The compensating chuck compensates the resulting path differences to a certain limited degree.

How does the drill retract when using G63?

The drill is retracted using G63, too, but with the spindle rotating in the opposite direction M3 <-> M4.

Is G63 modal?

G63 is non-modal. In the block after G63, the previous G command of the “Interpolation type” group (G0, G1, G2, …) is active again.

How is the right-hand or left-hand thread set?

The right-hand or left-hand thread is set with the rotation direction of the spindle (M3 right (CW), M4 left (CCW)).

What is the standard cycle for tapping with a compensating chuck?

The standard cycle CYCLE840 provides a complete tapping cycle with compensating chuck (but with G33 and the relevant prerequisites).

How do you perform tapping using G63?

See the following programming example for tapping using G63:

Metric thread 5, lead as per table: 0.8 mm/rev., hole already premachined

N10 G54 G0 G90 X10 Y10 Z5 S600 M3 ; Approach starting point, clockwise spindle rotation
N20 G63 Z-25 F480 ; Tapping, end point -25 mm
N40 G63 Z5 M4 ; Retraction, counter-clockwise spindle rotation
N50 X30 Y30 Z20 
M30

What is required for thread interpolation with G331 and G332?

Thread interpolation with G331/G332 requires a position-controlled spindle with a position measuring system.

What are the benefits of using G331/G332 for tapping threads?

By using G331/G332, the threads can be tapped without a compensating chuck if the dynamic properties of the spindle and axis allow it. If, however, a compensating chuck is used, the path differences to be compensated by the compensating chuck are reduced. This allows tapping at higher spindle speeds.

How is drilling and retraction done using G331/G332?

Drilling is done using G331, retraction is done using G332. The drilling depth is specified by specifying one of the axes X, Y or Z; the thread pitch is specified via the relevant I, J or K. For G332, the same lead is programmed as for G331. Reversal of the spindle direction of rotation occurs automatically.

How is the spindle speed programmed for tapping with G331/G332?

The spindle speed is programmed with S and without M3/M4.

What must be done before tapping the thread using G331/G332?

Before tapping the thread using G331/G332, the spindle must be switched to the position-controlled mode with SPOS=…

How is the direction of spindle rotation determined when using G331/G332 for tapping?

The sign of the thread lead determines the direction of spindle rotation:

Positive: right-hand (as with M3)
Negative: left-hand (as with M4)

What standard cycle provides a complete thread tapping cycle with thread interpolation?

A complete thread tapping cycle with thread interpolation is provided with the standard cycle CYCLE84.

How do you perform tapping using G331/G332?

See the following programming example for tapping using G331/G332:

Metric thread M5, lead: 0.8 mm/rev., hole already premachined:

N5 G54 G0 G90 X10 Y10 Z5  ; Approach starting point
N10 SPOS=0 ; Spindle in position control
N20 G331 Z-25 K0.8 S600  ; Tapping, K positive = clockwise of the spindle, end point Z=-25 mm
N40 G332 Z5 K0.8 ; Retraction
N50 G0 X30 Y30 Z20 
N60 M30

How can the axis velocity be determined when programming with G331/G332?

When programming with G331/G332, the axis velocity can be determined based on the spindle speed and the thread lead. However, the maximum axis velocity (rapid traverse) defined in the machine data cannot be exceeded; otherwise, alarms will appear.

What is the function of G75?

By using G75, a fixed point on the machine, e.g. tool change point, can be approached. The position is stored permanently in the machine data for all axes. A maximum of four fixed points can be defined for each axis. No offset is effective. The speed of each axis is its rapid traverse.

What are the requirements for using G75?

G75 requires a separate block and is non-modal. The machine axis identifier must be programmed! In the block after G75, the previous G command of the “Interpolation type” group (G0, G1, G2, …) is active again.

How do you program a fixed point approach using G75?

G75 FP=<n> X=0 Y=0 Z=0

Command	Significance
G75	Fixed point approach
FP=<n>	Fixed point that is to be approached. The fixed point number is specified: <n> Value range of <n>: 1, 2, 3, 4 MD30610$NUM_FIX_POINT_POS should be set if fixed point number 3 or 4 is to be used. If no fixed point is specified, fixed point 1 is approached automatically.
X=0 Y=0 Z=0	Machine axes to be traversed to the fixed point. Here, specify the axes with value “0” with which the fixed point is to be approached simultaneously. Each axis is traversed with the maximum axial velocity.

Notes:

FPn references with axis machine date MD30600 $MA_FIX_POINT_POS[n-1]. If no FP has been programmed, then the first fixed point will be selected.
The programmed position values for X, Y, Z (any value, here = 0) are ignored, but must still be written.

What is a programming example for approaching fixed points using G75?

N05 G75 FP=1 Z=0 ; Approach fixed point 1 in Z
N10 G75 FP=2 X=0 Y=0  ; Approach fixed point 2 in X and Y, e.g. to change a tool
N30 M30 ; End of program

What is the function of G74?

The reference point can be approached in the NC program with G74. The direction and speed of each axis are stored in machine data.

What are the requirements for using G74?

G74 requires a separate block and is non-modal. The machine axis identifier must be programmed! In the block after G74, the previous G command of the “Interpolation type” group (G0, G1,G2, …) is active again.

What is a programming example for approaching the reference point using G74?

N10 G74 X=0 Y=0 Z=0

Note: The programmed position values for X, Y, Z (any value, here = 0) are ignored, but must still be written.

What is the BRISK acceleration pattern?

The axes of the machine change their velocities using the maximum permissible acceleration value until reaching the final velocity. BRISK allows time-optimized working. The set velocity is reached in a short time. However, jumps are present in the acceleration pattern.

What is the SOFT acceleration pattern?

The axes of the machine accelerate along a non-linear, constant characteristic until reaching the final velocity. With this jerk-free acceleration, SOFT allows for reduced machine load. The same behavior can also be applied to braking procedures.

How do you program the BRISK and SOFT acceleration patterns?

BRISK ; Jerking path acceleration
SOFT ; Jerk-limited path acceleration

What is a programming example using BRISK and SOFT acceleration patterns?

N10 SOFT G1 X30 Z84 F650 ; Jerk-limited path acceleration
N90 BRISK X87 Z104 ; Continuing with jerking path acceleration

What are the functions available for setting the traversing behavior at the block boundaries and for block advancing?

G functions are provided for optimum adaptation to different requirements to set the traversing behavior at the block boundaries and for block advancing. For example, positioning with the axes quickly, or machining contours over multiple blocks.

How do you program the exact stop and continuous-path control modes?

Command	Significance
G60	Exact stop modally effective
G64	Continuous-path mode
G9	Exact stop non-modally effective
G601	Exact stop window fine
G602	Exact stop window coarse

What happens when the exact stop function (G60 or G9) is active?

If the exact stop function (G60 or G9) is active, the velocity for reaching the exact end position at the end of a block is decelerated to zero. Another modal G group can be used here to set when the traversing movement of this block is considered ended and the next block is started.

What is the function of G601 (Exact stop window fine)?

Block advance takes place when all axes have reached the “Exact stop window fine” (value in the machine data).

What is the function of G602 (Exact stop window coarse)?

Block advance takes place when all axes have reached the “Exact stop window coarse” (value in the machine data).

What is the influence of the exact stop window selection on the total time?

The selection of the exact stop window has a significant influence on the total time if many positioning operations are executed. Fine adjustments require more time.

What is a programming example for exact stop window coarse or fine, in effect for G60/G9?

N5 G602 ; Exact stop window coarse
N10 G0 G60 X20 ; Exact stop modal
N20 X30 Y30 ; G60 continues to act
N30 G1 G601 X50 Y50 F100 ; Exact stop window fine
N40 G64 X70 Y60 ; Switching over to continuous-path mode
N50 G0 X90 Y90 
N60 G0 G9 X95 ; Exact stop acts only in this block
N70 G0 X100 Y100 ; Again continuous-path mode
M30

What is the difference between the G9 and G60 commands?

The G9 command only generates exact stop for the block in which it is programmed; G60, however, is effective until it is canceled by G64.

What is the objective of the continuous-path control mode (G64)?

The objective of the continuous-path control mode is to avoid deceleration at the block boundaries and to switch to the next block with a path velocity as constant as possible (in the case of tangential transitions). The function works with look-ahead velocity control over several blocks.

What can happen with non-tangential transitions (corners) in continuous-path control mode?

For non-tangential transitions (corners), the velocity can be reduced rapidly enough so that the axes are subject to a relatively high velocity change over a short period of time. This may lead to a significant jerk (acceleration change). The size of the jerk can be limited by activating the SOFT function.

What is a programming example for switching between continuous-path mode and exact stop?

N10 G64 G1 X10 Y20 F1000 ; Continuous-path mode
N20 X30 Y30 ; Continuous-path control mode continues to be active
N30 G60 Z50 ; Switching over to exact stop
M30

How does look-ahead velocity control work in continuous-path control mode (G64)?

In the continuous-path control mode with G64, the control system determines the velocity control for several NC blocks in advance automatically. This enables acceleration and deceleration across multiple blocks with approximately tangential transitions. For paths that consist of short travels in the NC blocks, higher velocities can be achieved than without look ahead.

What is the function of G4 (dwell time)?

Between two NC blocks, the machining can be interrupted for a defined time by inserting a separate block with G4; e.g. for relief cutting. The words with F… or S… are only used in this block for the specified time. Any previously programmed feedrate F or spindle speed S remain valid.

How do you program dwell time using G4?

G4 F... ; Dwell time in seconds
G4 S... ; Dwell time in spindle revolutions

What is a programming example for using dwell time with G4?

N5 G1 F200 Z-50 S300 M3 ; Feed F; spindle speed S
N10 G4 F2.5 ; Dwell time 2.5 seconds
N20 Z70 
N30 G4 S30 ; Dwelling 30 revolutions of the spindle, corresponds at S=300 rpm and 100% speed override to: t=0.1 min
N40 X60 ; Feed and spindle speed remain effective
M30

When is using G4 S… possible?

G4 S… is only possible if a controlled spindle is available (if the speed specifications are also programmed via S…).

How many gear stages can be configured for a spindle?

Up to 5 gear stages can be configured for a spindle for speed/torque adaptation.

How is the selection of a gear stage done?

The selection of a gear stage takes place in the program via M commands:

M40: Automatic gear stage selection
M41 to M45: Gear stage 1 to 5

How is the spindle speed programmed?

The spindle speed is programmed in revolutions per minute under the address S provided that the machine possesses a controlled spindle.

How is the direction of rotation and the start or end of the movement specified?

The direction of rotation and the start or end of the movement are specified via M commands:

M3: Spindle clockwise
M4: Spindle counter-clockwise
M5: Spindle stop

What is the rule for integer S values when programming spindle speed?

For integer S values, the decimal point can be omitted, e.g. S270.

What happens if M3 or M4 is written in a block with axis movements?

If you write M3 or M4 in a block with axis movements, the M commands become active before the axis movements.

When do axis movements start in relation to spindle speed?

Default setting: The axis movements only start once the spindle has accelerated to speed (M3, M4). M5 is also issued before the axis movement. However, there is no waiting for spindle standstill. The axis movements begin before spindle standstill.

When is the spindle stopped?

The spindle is stopped at program end or with RESET. At program start, spindle speed zero (S0) is in effect.

What is a programming example for controlling spindle speed and direction of rotation?

N10 G1 X70 Z20 F300 S270 M3 ; Before the axis traversing X, Z the spindle accelerates to 270 rpm, clockwise
N80 S450  ; Speed change
N170 G0 Z180 M5 ; Z movement, spindle comes to a stop

What is the requirement for using the SPOS function for spindle positioning?

The spindle must be technically designed for position control.

What is the function of SPOS=?

With the function SPOS= you can position the spindle in a specific angular position. The spindle is held in the position through position control. The speed of the positioning procedure is defined in machine data.

How is the direction of rotation maintained when positioning the spindle from the M3/M4 movement using SPOS=?

With SPOS=value from the M3/M4 movement, the respective direction of rotation is maintained until the end of the positioning. When positioning from standstill, the position is approached via the shortest path. The direction results from the respective start and end position.

Exception: First movement of the spindle, i.e. if the measuring system is not yet synchronized. In this case, the direction is specified in machine data.

What are other movement specifications for the spindle that are possible with SPOS?

Other movement specifications for the spindle are possible with SPOS=ACP(…), SPOS=ACN(…), … as for rotary axes.

How does the spindle movement occur in relation to other axis movements in the same block?

The spindle movement takes place parallel to any other axis movements in the same block. This block is ended when both movements are finished.

How do you program spindle positioning using SPOS?

Command	Significance
SPOS=…	Absolute position: 0 … <360 degrees
SPOS=ACP(…)	Absolute dimensions, approach position in positive direction
SPOS=ACN(…)	Absolute dimensions, approach position in negative direction
SPOS=IC(…)	Incremental dimensions, leading sign determines the traversal direction
SPOS=DC(…)	Absolute dimensions, approach position directly (on the shortest path)

What is a programming example for spindle positioning using SPOS?

N10 SPOS=14.3 ; Spindle position 14.3 degrees
N80 G0 X89 Z300 SPOS=25.6 ; Positioning spindle with axis movements  ; This block is ended when all movements have finished
N81 X200 Z300 ; The N81 block only begins once the spindle position from N80 is reached

What happens if the end points for the contour are not directly specified in the machining drawing?

If the end points for the contour are not directly specified in the machining drawing, it is also possible to use an angle specification ANG=… to determine the straight line. In a contour corner, elements like chamfer or rounding can be inserted. The respective instruction CHR= … or RND=… is written in the block, which leads to the corner.

In which blocks can blueprint programming be used?

The blueprint programming can be used in blocks with G0 or G1 (linear contours).

How many straight line blocks can be connected and how many roundings or chamfers can be inserted between them?

Theoretically, any number of straight line blocks can be connected and a rounding or chamfer can be inserted between them. Every straight line must be clearly identified by point values and/or angle values.

How do you program contour definition?

Command	Significance
ANG=…	Angle specification for defining a straight line
RND=…	Insert rounding, value: Radius of chamfer
CHR=…	Insert chamfer, value: Side length of the chamfer

In which plane is the blueprint programming function executed?

The blueprint programming function is executed in the current plane G17 to G19. It is not possible to change the plane during blueprint programming.

What happens if radius and chamfer are programmed in one block?

If radius and chamfer are programmed in one block, only the radius is inserted regardless of the programming sequence.

How is the angle parameter (ANG) used in contour definition programming?

If only one end point coordinate of the plane is known for a straight line or for contours across multiple blocks the cumulative end point, an angle parameter can be used for uniquely defining the straight line path. The angle is always referred to the abscissa of the current plane G17 to G19, e.g. for G17 on the X axis. Positive angles are aligned counter-clockwise.

How do you program contour definition when the end point in N20 is not always known?

N10 G1 X1 Y1
N20 X2 ANG= .. .

or:

N10 G1 X1 Y1
N20 Y2 ANG= .. .

The values are only examples.

How do you program contour definition when the end point in N20 is unknown?

N10 G1 X1 Y1
N20ANG=30
N 30 X3 Y3 ANG=60
N40 M30

How do you program contour definition when the end point in N20 is unknown, and you want to insert a rounding?

N10 G1 X1 Y1
N20 ANG=30 RND=0.1
N30 X3 Y3 ANG=60

Analog Inserting a chamfer:

N10 G1 X1 Y1
N20 ANG=30 CHR=0.1
N30 X3 Y3 ANG=60

How do you program contour definition when the end point in N20 is known and you want to insert a rounding?

N10 G1 X1 Y1
N20 X2 Y2 RND=0.5
N30 X3 Y3

Analog Inserting a chamfer:

N10 G1 X1 Y1
N20 X2 Y2 CHR=0.2
N30 X3 Y3

How do you program contour definition when the end point in N20 is unknown and you want to insert a rounding at multiple points?

N10 G1 X1 Y1
N20 ANG=30 RND=0.3
N30 X3 Y3 ANG=60 RND=0.3
N40 X4 Y4

Analog Inserting a chamfer:

N10 G1 X1 Y1
N20 ANG=30 CHR=0 .3
N30 X3 Y3 ANG=60 CHR=0.3
N40 X2 Y4
N50 M30

How do you insert the chamfer (CHF or CHR) or rounding (RND) elements into a contour corner?

You can insert the chamfer (CHF or CHR) or rounding (RND) elements into a contour corner. If you wish to round several contour corners sequentially by the same method, use “Modal rounding” (RNDM). You can program the feedrate for the chamfer/rounding with FRC (non-modal) or FRCM (modal). If FRC/FRCM is not programmed, the normal feedrate F is applied.

What is the programming for chamfer/rounding?

CHF=… ; Insert chamfer, value: Length of chamfer
CHR=… ; Insert chamfer, value: Side length of the chamfer
RND=… ; Insert rounding, value: Radius of chamfer
RNDM=… ; Modal rounding:

What are the values for modal rounding?

Value >0: Radius of chamfer, modal rounding ON. This rounding is inserted in all contour corners.
Value = 0: Modal rounding OFF…

What are the values for the feedrate for chamfer/rounding?

FRC=… ; Non-modal feedrate for chamfer/rounding Value >0, feedrate in mm/min (G94) or mm/rev. (G95)
FRCM=… ; Modal feedrate for chamfer/rounding:
- Value >0: Feedrate in mm/min (G94) or mm/rev. (G95), Modal feedrate for chamfer/rounding ON
- Value = 0: Modal feedrate for chamfer/rounding OFF Feedrate F applies to the chamfer/rounding.

Where are the chamfer/rounding functions executed?

The chamfer/rounding functions are executed in the current planes G17 to G19.

Where is the appropriate instruction for chamfer/rounding written?

The appropriate instruction CHF= … or CHR=… or RND=… or RNDM=… is written in the block with axis movements leading to the corner.

What happens to the programmed value for chamfer and rounding if the contour length of an involved block is insufficient?

The programmed value for chamfer and rounding is automatically reduced if the contour length of an involved block is insufficient.

When is no chamfer/rounding inserted?

No chamfer/rounding is inserted, if:

more than three blocks in the connection are programmed that do not contain any information for traversing in the plane,
or a plane change is carried out.

Are F, FRC, FRCM active when a chamfer is traversed with G0?

F, FRC,FRCM are not active when a chamfer is traversed with G0.

What is the default value for the feedrate when active for chamfer/rounding?

If the feedrate F is active for chamfer/rounding, it is by default the value from the block which leads away from the corner. Other settings can be configured via machine data.

What is inserted between linear and circle contours for a chamfer CHF or CHR?

A linear contour element is inserted between linear and circle contours in any combination. The edge is broken.

What is inserted between linear and circle contours for a rounding RND or RNDM?

A circle contour element can be inserted with tangential connection between the linear and circle contours in any combination.

When creating programs for machining workpieces, is it necessary to take into account the tool length or the tool radius?

When creating programs for machining workpieces, it is not necessary to take into account the tool length or the tool radius. You program the workpiece dimensions directly, for example following the drawing. You enter the tool data separately in a special data section. Simply call the required tool with its offset data in the program and enable the tool radius compensation if necessary. The control system performs the required path compensations based on the data to create the described workpiece.

When does the tool selection take place?

The tool selection takes place when the T word is programmed. Whether this is a tool change or only a preselection, is defined in the machine data:

The tool change (tool call) is performed either directly using the T word or
The change takes place after the preselection with the T word by an additional instruction M6 (see also Section “Miscellaneous function M”).

What happens if a certain tool is activated?

If a certain tool is activated, it remains stored as an active tool even beyond the end of the program and after turning off/turning on the control system. If you change a tool manually, input the change in the control system so that the control system knows the correct tool. For example, you can start a block with the new T word in MDA mode.

What is the programming for tool number?

T… ; Tool number: 1 … 32 000, T0 – no tool

What is the maximum number of tools that the control system can store?

The control system can store a maximum of 64 tools.

Is it possible to assign 1 to 9 data fields with different tool offset blocks (for multiple cutting edges) to a specific tool?

It is possible to assign 1 to 9 data fields with different tool offset blocks (for multiple cutting edges) to a specific tool. If a special cutting tool is required, it can be programmed with D and the corresponding number.

What happens if no D word is written?

If no D word is written, D1 takes effect automatically.

What happens when D0 is programmed?

When D0 is programmed, offsets for the tool have no effect.

What is the programming for tool offset number?

D… ; Tool offset number: 1 … 9, D0: No compensations active!

What is the maximum number of data fields (D numbers) for tool offset blocks that can be stored in the control system simultaneously?

A maximum of 64 data fields (D numbers) for tool offset blocks can be stored in the control system simultaneously.

When are the tool length compensations effective?

The tool length compensations are effective immediately once the tool is active – if no D number has been programmed – with the values of D1. The offset is applied with the first programmed traverse of the respective length offset axis. Observe any active G17 to G19. A tool radius compensation must also be activated by G41/G42.

What should you enter in the offset memory?

Enter the following in the offset memory:

Geometrical dimensions: length, radius. They consist of several components (geometry, wear). The control system computes the components to a certain dimension (e.g. overall length 1, total radius). The respective overall dimension becomes effective when the compensation memory is activated. How these values are calculated in the axes is determined by the tool type and the commands G17, G18, G19.
Tool type The tool type (drill, cutter) defines which geometry data are necessary and how they are taken into account.

When are the parameters for length 2 and length 3 required for the tool types ‘cutter’ and ‘drill’?

For the tool types ‘cutter’ and ‘drill’, the parameters for length 2 and length 3 are only required for special cases (e.g. multi-dimensional length offset for an angle head construction).

How is the control system working with tool radius compensation?

The control system is working with tool radius compensation in the selected plane G17 to G19. A tool with a corresponding D number must be active. The tool radius compensation is activated by G41/G42. The control system automatically calculates the required equidistant tool paths for the programmed contour for the respective current tool radius.

What is the programming for tool radius compensation?

G41 X… Y… ; Tool radius compensation left of contour
G42 X… Y… ; Tool radius compensation right of contour

For what interpolation can the selection for tool radius compensation be made?

The selection can only be made for linear interpolation (G0, G1). Program both axes of the plane (e.g. with G17: X, Y). If you only specify one axis, the second axis is automatically completed with the last programmed value.

How does the tool travel when starting the compensation?

The tool travels in a straight line directly to the contour and is positioned perpendicular to the path tangent at the starting point of the contour.

How should the starting point be selected for the compensation?

Select the starting point such that a collision-free travel is ensured.

What happens when the tool runs clockwise using G41?

The tool tip goes around the left of the workpiece when the tool runs clockwise using G41.

What happens when the tool runs counter-clockwise using G42?

The tool tip goes around the right of the workpiece when the tool runs counter-clockwise using G42.

What typically follows the block with G41/G42?

As a rule, the block with G41/G42 is followed by a block with workpiece contour description.

What happens if the block with G41/G42 is followed by blocks without contour description?

If, however, the block with G41/G42 is followed by blocks without contour description, a maximum of five such blocks (for example, M commands and infeed motions) are allowed; otherwise, the compensation will be interrupted.

What can you set by using the functions G450 and G451?

By using the functions G450 and G451, you can set the behavior for a non-continuous transition from one contour element to another contour element (corner behavior) when G41/G42 is active. The internal and external corners are detected by the control system itself. For internal corners, the intersection of the equidistant paths is always approached.

What is the programming for corner behavior?

G450 ; Transition circle
G451 ; Point of intersection

How does the tool center point travel with transition circle G450?

The tool center point travels around the workpiece external corner in an arc with the tool radius.

To what does the transition circle belong in view of the data?

In view of the data, for example, as far as the feedrate value is concerned, the transition circle belongs to the next block containing traversing movements.

What is approached for a G451 intersection of the equidistant paths?

For a G451 intersection of the equidistant paths, the point (intersection) that results from the center point paths of the tool (circle or straight line) is approached.

What could result with acute contour angles and active point of intersection, depending on the tool radius?

With acute contour angles and active point of intersection, depending on the tool radius, unnecessary idle motions could result for the tool. In this case, the control system switches to transition circle for this block automatically if a certain set angle value (100°) is reached.

How is the compensation mode (G41/G42) deselected?

The compensation mode (G41/G42) is deselected with G40. G40 is also the activation position at the beginning of the program.

How does the tool end the block in front of G40?

The tool ends the block in front of G40 in the normal position (compensation vector vertically to the tangent at the end point).

What is the reference point when G40 is active?

If G40 is active, the reference point is the tool center point. Subsequently, when deselected, the tool tip approaches the programmed point.

How should the end point of the G40 block be selected?

Always select the end point of the G40 block such that collision-free traversing is guaranteed!

What is the programming for tool radius compensation off?

G40 X… Y… ; Tool radius compensation OFF

With what interpolation can the compensation mode be deselected?

The compensation mode can only be deselected with linear interpolation (G0, G1). Program both axes of the plane (e.g. with G17: X, Y). If you only specify one axis, the second axis is automatically completed with the last programmed value.

What is a Special Case of the Tool Radius Compensation?

The same compensation (e.g. G41 -> G41) can be programmed once more without writing G40 between these commands. The last block in front of the new compensation call ends with the normal position of the compensation vector at the end point. The new compensation is carried out as a compensation start (behavior as described for change in compensation direction).

How Can You Change the Offset Number?

The offset number D can be changed in the compensation mode. A modified tool radius is active with effect from the block in which the new D number is programmed. Its complete modification is only achieved at the end of the block. In other words: The modification is traversed continuously over the entire block, also for circular interpolation.

How Can You Change the Compensation Direction?

The compensation direction G41 <-> G42 can be changed without writing G40. The last block with the old compensation direction ends with the normal position of the compensation vector at the end point. The new compensation direction is executed as a compensation start (default setting at starting point).

What Happens if the Compensation Mode is Cancelled by M2?

If compensation mode is canceled using M2 (end of program) without writing the command G40, the last block with coordinates of the plane (G17 to G19) will end in the normal position of the compensation vector. No compensating movement is executed. The program ends with this tool position.

What Should You Pay Attention to When Programming?

When programming, pay special attention to cases where the contour travel is smaller than the tool radius. Such cases should be avoided.

What Should You Check For Over Multiple Blocks?

Also check over multiple blocks that the contour contains no “bottlenecks”.

What Should You Use When Carrying Out a Test/Dry Run?

When carrying out a test/dry run, use the largest tool radius you are offered.

What Happens if Very Sharp Outside Corners Occur in the Contour With Active G451 Intersection?

If very sharp outside corners occur in the contour with active G451 intersection, the control system automatically switches to transition circle. This prevents long idle motions.

What is the Functionality of the Miscellaneous Function M?

The miscellaneous function M initiates switching operations, such as “Coolant ON/OFF” and other functions.

Are M Functions Pre-Assigned?

A small part of M functions have already been assigned a fixed functionality by the CNC manufacturer. The functions not yet assigned fixed functions are reserved for free use of the machine manufacturer.

How Do You Program a Miscellaneous Function M?

M… ;Max. 5 M functions per block

When are Activation Functions With Axis Movements Activated?

If the functions M0, M1, M2 are contained in a block with traversing movements of the axes, these M functions become effective after the traversing movements.

When are the Functions M3, M4, and M5 Output to the Internal Interface (PLC)?

The functions M3, M4 and M5 are output to the internal interface (PLC) before the traversing movements.

When Do the Axis Movements Begin for the Functions M3 and M4?

The axis movements only begin once the controlled spindle has ramped up for M3, M4.

When Do the Axis Movements Begin for M5?

For M5, however, the spindle standstill is not waited for. The axis movements already begin before the spindle stops (default setting).

When are the Remaining M Functions Output to the PLC?

The remaining M functions are output to the PLC with the traversing movements.

What Should You Do if You Would Like to Program an M Function Directly Before or After an Axis Movement?

If you would like to program an M function directly before or after an axis movement, insert a separate block with this M function.

What Does the M Function Interrupt?

The M function interrupts the G64 continuous path mode and generates exact stop:

In Addition to the M and H Functions, What Other Functions Can be Transferred to the PLC (Programmable Logic Controller)?

In addition to the M and H functions, T, D and S functions can also be transferred to PLC (Programmable Logic Controller). In all, a maximum of 10 such function outputs are possible in a block.

What is the Functionality of the H Function?

With H functions, floating point data (REAL data type – as with arithmetic parameters, see Section “Arithmetic parameter R”) can be transferred from the program to the PLC. The meaning of the values for a given H function is defined by the machine manufacturer.

How Do You Program an H Function?

H0=… to H9999=… ;Max. 3 H functions per block

What is the Functionality of the Arithmetic Parameter?

The arithmetic parameters are used if an NC program is not only to be valid for values assigned once, or if you must calculate values. The required values can be calculated or set by the control system during program execution. Another possibility consists of setting the arithmetic parameter values by operator inputs. If values have been assigned to the arithmetic parameters, they can be assigned to other variable-setting NC addresses in the program.

How Do You Program an Arithmetic Parameter?

R0=… to R299=… ;Assign values to the arithmetic parameters R
R[R0]=… ;Indirect programming: Assign a value to the arithmetic parameter R, whose number can be found, e.g. in R0
X=R0 ;Assign arithmetic parameters to the NC addresses, e.g. for the X axis

What is the Value Assignment Range You Can Assign to the R Parameters?

You can assign values in the following range to the R parameters:

±(0.000 0001 … 9999 9999) (8 decimal places, arithmetic sign, and decimal point)

Can the Decimal Point be Omitted for Integer Values?

The decimal point can be omitted for integer values. A plus sign can always be omitted.

What Notation Should You Use to Assign an Extended Range of Numbers?

Use the exponential notation to assign an extended range of numbers:

± (10-300 … 10+300)

Where is the Value of the Exponent Written?

The value of the exponent is written after the EX characters; maximum total number of characters: 10 (including leading signs and decimal point)

What is the Range of Values for EX?

Range of values for EX: -300 to +300

Can There be Several Assignments in One Block Including Assignments of Arithmetic Expressions?

Yes, there can be several assignments in one block incl. assignments of arithmetic expressions.

How Do You Assign Values to Other Addresses?

The flexibility of an NC program lies in assigning these arithmetic parameters or expressions with arithmetic parameters to other NC addresses. Values, arithmetic expressions and arithmetic parameters can be assigned to all addresses; Exception: addresses N, G, and L. When assigning, write the " = " sign after the address character. It is also possible to have an assignment with a minus sign. A separate block is required for assignments to axis addresses (traversing instructions).

What Must You Use When Operators/Arithmetic Functions are Used?

When operators/arithmetic functions are used, it is imperative to use the conventional mathematical notation. Machining priorities are set using the round brackets. Otherwise, multiplication and division take precedence over addition and subtraction. Degrees are used for the trigonometric functions.

What are the Permitted Arithmetic Functions?

Permitted arithmetic functions: see Section “List of instructions”.

What is the Functionality of the Local User Data (LUD)?

The operator/programmer (user) can define his/her own variable in the program from various data types (LUD = Local User Data). These variables are only available in the program in which they were defined. The definition takes place immediately at the start of the program and can also be associated with a value assignment at the same time. Otherwise the starting value is zero.

What are the Rules for Naming a Variable?

The name of a variable can be defined by the programmer. The naming is subject to the following rules:

A maximum of 31 characters can be used.
It is imperative to use letters for the first two characters; the remaining characters can be either letters, underscore or digits.
Do not use a name already used in the control system (NC addresses, keywords, names of programs, subroutines, etc.).

What are the Programming/Data Types?

DEF BOOL varname1 ;Boolean type, values: TRUE (=1), FALSE (=0)
DEF CHAR varname2 ;Char type, 1 ASCII code character: “a”, “b”, … ;Numerical code value: 0 … 255
DEF INT varname3 ;Integer type, integer values, 32 bit value range: ;-2 147 483 648 through +2 147 483 647 (decimal)
DEF REAL varname4 ;Real type, natural number (like arithmetic parameter R), ;Value range: ±(0.000 0001 … 9999 9999) ;(8 decimal places, arithmetic sign and decimal point) or
;Exponential notation: ± (10 to power of -300 … 10 to power of +300)
DEF STRING[string length] varname41 ; STRING type, [string length]: Maximum number of characters

What Does Each Data Type Require?

Each data type requires its own program line. However, several variables of the same type can be defined in one line.

What are Fields?

In addition to the individual variables, one or two-dimensional fields of variables of these data types can also be defined:

DEF INT PVAR5[n] ;One-dimensional field, type INT, n: integer
DEF INT PVAR6[n,m] ;Two-dimensional field, type INT, n, m: integer

How Can You Reach Individual Field Elements Within the Program?

Within the program, the individual field elements can be reached via the field index and can be treated like individual variables. The field index runs from 0 to a small number of the elements.

What is the Functionality of Reading and Writing PLC Variables?

To allow rapid data exchange between NC and PLC, a special data area exists in the PLC user interface with a length of 512 bytes. In this area, PLC data are compatible in data type and position offset. In the NC program, these compatible PLC variables can be read or written.

What are the Special System Variables Provided for Reading and Writing PLC Variables?

To this end, special system variables are provided:

$A_DBB[n] ;Data byte (8-bit value)
$A_DBW[n] ;Data word (16-bit value)
$A_DBD[n] ;Data double-word (32-bit value)
$A_DBR[n] ;REAL data (32-bit value)

What Does “n” Stand For in System Variables?

“n” stands here for the position offset (start of data area to start of variable) in bytes.

What Does the Reading of Variables Generate?

The reading of variables generates a preprocessing stop (internal STOPRE).

What is the Writing of PLC Tags Limited To?

Writing of PLC tags is generally limited to a maximum of three tags (elements). Where PLC tags are to be written in rapid succession, one element will be required per write operation. If more write operations are to be executed than there are elements available, then block transfer will be required (a preprocessing stop may need to be triggered).

What is the Functionality of Unconditional Program Jumps?

NC programs process their blocks in the sequence in which they were arranged when they were written. The processing sequence can be changed by introducing program jumps. The jump destination can be a block with a label or with a block number. This block must be located within the program. The unconditional jump instruction requires a separate block.

How Do You Program Unconditional Program Jumps?

GOTOF label ;Jump forward (in the direction of the last block of the program)
GOTOB label ;Jump backwards (in the direction of the first block of the program)
Label ;Selected string for the label (jump label) or block number

What is the Functionality of Conditional Program Jumps?

Jump conditions are formulated after the IF instruction. If the jump condition (value not zero) is satisfied, the jump takes place. The jump destination can be a block with a label or with a block number. This block must be located within the program. Conditional jump instructions require a separate block. Several conditional jump instructions can be located in the same block. By using conditional program jumps, you can also considerably shorten the program, if necessary.

How Do You Program Conditional Program Jumps?

IF condition GOTOF label ;Jump forward
IF condition GOTOB label ;Jump backwards
GOTOF ;Jump direction forward (in the direction of the last block of the program)
GOTOB ;Jump direction backwards (in the direction of the first block of the program)
Label ;Selected string for the label (jump label) or block number
IF ;Introduction of the jump condition
Condition ;Arithmetic parameter, arithmetic expression for formulating the condition

What are the Comparison Operators and Their Meanings?

Operators	Meaning
==	Equal to
<>	Not equal to
>	greater than
<	less than
>=	greater than or equal to
<=	less than or equal to

The comparison operations support formulating of a jump condition. Arithmetic expressions can also be compared. The result of comparison operations is “satisfied” or “not satisfied.” “Not satisfied” sets the value to zero.

When is the Jump Executed?

The jump is executed for the first fulfilled condition.

What serves as jump destinations for program jumps?

A label or a block number serves to mark blocks as jump destinations for program jumps. Program jumps can be used to branch to the program sequence.

What are the requirements for labels?

Labels can be freely selected, but must contain a minimum of 2 and a maximum of 8 letters or numbers of which the first two characters must be letters or underscore characters. Labels that are in the block that serves as the jump destination are ended by a colon. They are always at the start of a block. If a block number is also present, the label is located after the block number. Labels must be unique within a program.

Is there a difference between a main program and a subroutine?

Basically, there is no difference between a main program and a subroutine.

What are subroutines used for?

Frequently recurring machining sequences are stored in subroutines, e.g. certain contour shapes. These subroutines are called at the appropriate locations in the main program and then executed.

What is a machining cycle?

One form of a subroutine is the machining cycle. The machining cycles contain generally valid machining cases (e.g. drilling, tapping, groove cutting, etc.). By assigning values via included transfer parameters, you can adapt the subroutine to your specific application.

What is the structure of a subroutine?

The structure of a subroutine is identical to that of a main program. Like main programs, subroutines contain M2 – end of program in the last block of the program sequence. This means a return to the program level where the subroutine was called from.

Can the end instruction RET be used instead of the M2 program end in the subroutine?

Yes, the end instruction RET can also be used instead of the M2 program end in the subroutine. RET must be programmed in a separate block. The RET instruction is used when G64 continuous-path mode is not to be interrupted by a return. With M2, G64 is interrupted and exact stop is initiated.

How is a program given a unique name so it can be selected from several subroutines?

The program is given a unique name allowing it to be selected from several subroutines. When you create the program, the program name may be freely selected, provided the following conventions are observed: The same rules apply as for the names of main programs. It is also possible to use the address word L… in subroutines. The value can have 7 decimal places (integers only). With address L, leading zeros are meaningful for differentiation. The subroutine name LL6 is reserved for tool change.

How are subroutines called in a program?

Subroutines are called in a program (main or subroutine) with their names. To do this, a separate block is required.

If a subroutine is to be executed several times in succession, how do you indicate the number of times it is to be executed?

If a subroutine is to be executed several times in succession, write the number of times it is to be executed in the block of the call after the subroutine name under the address P. A maximum of 9,999 cycles are possible (P1 … P9999).

How many program levels are available for nested calls?

Subroutines can also be called from a subroutine, not only from a main program. In total, up to 8 program levels are available for this type of nested call, including the main program level.

Can modal G functions be changed in the subroutine?

Yes, modal G functions can be changed in the subroutine, e.g. G90 -> G91. When returning to the calling program, ensure that all modal functions are set the way you need them to be. Please make sure that the values of your arithmetic parameters used in upper program levels are not inadvertently changed in lower program levels. When working with SIEMENS cycles, up to 4 program levels are needed.

What are cycles?

Cycles are technology subroutines realizing a certain machining process generally, for example, drilling or milling. Adaptation to the particular problem is performed directly via supply parameters/values when calling the respective cycle.

How is the subroutine in the block containing MCALL called?

The subroutine in the block containing MCALL is called automatically after each successive block containing a path motion. The call acts until the next MCALL is called. The modal call of the subroutine which contains MCALL or quitting of the call requires a separate block. MCALL is advantageous, for example, when producing drill patterns.

What can you do with the CALL and EXTCALL commands?

With the CALL command, you can reload and execute programs stored in the NC directory. With the EXTCALL command, you can reload and execute programs stored on an external USB memory stick.

What machine data is used for the EXTCALL command?

The following machine data is used for the EXTCALL command:

MD18362 $MN_MM_EXT_PROG_NUM Number of program levels that can be processed simultaneously from external
SD42700 $SC_EXT_PROGRAM_PATH Program path for external subroutine call. When using SD42700 $SC_EXT_PROGRAM_PATH, all subprograms called with EXTCALL are searched under this path.

What are the parameters for internal and external subroutines?

For internal subroutines
- CALL ; Keyword for subroutine call
- <Path/program name> ; Constant/variable of STRING type
For external subroutines – Programming with path specification in SD42700 EXT_PROGRAM_PATH * EXTCALL ; Keyword for subroutine call * <program name> ; Constant/variable of STRING type – Programming without path specification in SD42700 EXT_PROGRAM_PATH * EXTCALL ; Keyword for subroutine call * <Path\program name> ; Constant/variable of STRING type

What statements must internal and external subroutines not contain?

Internal and external subroutines must not contain jump statements such as GOTOF, GOTOB, CASE, FOR, LOOP, WHILE, or REPEAT. IF-ELSE-ENDIF constructions are possible. Subroutine calls and nested CALL and EXTCALL calls may be used.

What can cause the interruption of internal and external subroutine calls?

RESET and POWER ON can cause the interruption of internal and external subroutine calls.

What are timers used for?

The timers are prepared as system variables ($A…) that can be used for monitoring the technological processes in the program or only in the display. These timers are read-only. There are timers that are always active. Others can be deactivated via machine data.

Which timers are always active?

Timers that are always active:

$AN_SETUP_TIME Time since the last control power up with default values (in minutes) It is automatically reset in the case of a system power-up with default values.
$AN_POWERON_TIME Time since the last control power up (in minutes) It is reset to zero automatically after each power-up of the control system.

Which timers are activated via machine data?

The following timers are activated via machine data (default setting). Each active run-time measurement is automatically interrupted in the stopped program state or for feedrate-override-zero. The behavior of the activated timers for active dry run feedrate and program testing can be specified using machine data.

$AC_OPERATING_TIME Total execution time in seconds of NC programs in “AUTO” mode In “AUTO” mode, the runtimes of all programs between program start and end are summed up. The timer is zeroed after each power-up of the control system.
$AC_CYCLE_TIME Runtime of the selected NC program (in seconds) The runtime between program start and end is measured in the selected NC program. The timer is reset with the start of a new NC program.
$AC_CUTTING_TIME Tool action time (in seconds) The runtime of the path axes is measured in all NC programs between program start and end without rapid traverse active and with the tool active (default setting). The measurement is interrupted when a dwell time is active. The timer is automatically set to zero after each power-up of the control system.

How is the content of the active system variables made visible?

The content of the active system variables is visible in the window opened through the following key operations: → → Window display: ① = $AC_TOTAL_PARTS ⑤ = $AC_CYCLE_TIME ② = $AC_REQUIRED_PARTS ⑥ = $AC_CUTTING_TIME ③ =$AC_ACTUAL_PARTS $AC_SPECIAL_PARTS is not available for display. ⑦ = $AN_SETUP_TIME ④ = $AC_OPERATING_TIME ⑧ = $AN_POWERON_TIME You can also view the time counter information through the following operating area: → →

What does the “Workpiece counter” function provide?

The “Workpiece counter” function provides counters for counting workpieces. These counters exist as system variables with write and read access from the program or via operator input (observe the protection level for writing!). Machine data can be used to control counter activation, counter reset timing and the counting algorithm.

What are the counters provided by the “Workpiece counter” function?

$AC_REQUIRED_PARTS Number of workpieces required (workpiece setpoint) In this counter you can define the number of workpieces at which the actual workpiece counter $AC_ACTUAL_PARTS is reset to zero. The generation of the display alarm 21800 “Workpiece setpoint reached” can be activated via machine data.
$AC_TOTAL_PARTS Total number of workpieces produced (total actual) The counter specifies the total number of all workpieces produced since the start time. The counter is set to zero automatically upon every booting of the control system.
$AC_ACTUAL_PARTS Number of actual workpieces (actual) This counter registers the number of all workpieces produced since the starting time. When the workpiece setpoint is reached ( $AC_REQUIRED_PARTS, value greater than zero), the counter is automatically zeroed.
$AC_SPECIAL_PARTS Number of workpieces specified by the user This counter allows users to make a workpiece counting in accordance with their own definition. Alarm output can be defined for the case of identity with $AC_REQUIRED_PARTS (workpiece target). Users must reset the counter themselves.

How is the content of the active system variables made visible for the workpiece counter function?

The content of the active system variables is visible on the window opened through the following key operations: → → Window display: ① = $AC_TOTAL_PARTS ⑤ = $AC_CYCLE_TIME ② = $AC_REQUIRED_PARTS ⑥ = $AC_CUTTING_TIME ③ =$AC_ACTUAL_PARTS $AC_SPECIAL_PARTS is not available for display. ⑦ = $AN_SETUP_TIME ④ = $AC_OPERATING_TIME ⑧ = $AN_POWERON_TIME You can also select whether to activate the workpiece counter function through the following operating area: → →

What is the “Smooth approach and retraction” (SPR) function?

The function “Smooth approach and retraction” (SPR) is intended to approach the beginning of a contour tangentially (“smooth”), to a large degree independently of the position of the starting point. The control system will calculate the intermediate points and generate the required traversing blocks. This function is used preferably in conjunction with the tool radius compensation (TRC). The G41 and G42 commands determine the approach/retraction direction to the left or right of the contour. The approach/retraction path (straight line, quarter or semi-circle) is selected using a group of G commands. To parameterize this path (circle radius, length, approach straight line), special addresses can be used; this also applies to the feedrate of the infeed motion. The infeed motion can additionally be controlled via another G group.

What are the programming commands for “Smooth approach and retraction” (SPR)?

G147 ; Approach with a straight line
G148 ; Retraction with a straight line
G247 ; Approach with a quadrant
G248 ; Retraction with a quadrant
G347 ; Approach with a semi-circle
G348 ; Retraction with a semi-circle
G340 ; Approach and retraction in space (basic setting)
G341 ; Approach and retraction in the plane
DISR=… ; Approach and retraction with straight lines (G147/G148): Distance of the cutter edge from the start or end point of the contour ; Approach and retraction along circles (G247, G347/G248, G348): Radius of the tool center point path
DISCL=… ; Distance of the end point for the fast infeed motion from the machining plane (safety clearance)
FAD=… ; Speed of the slow infeed motion The programmed value acts according to the active command of the G group 15 (feed: G94, G95)

What should you make sure of when approaching along a semi-circle using the example of G42 or retraction using G41 and completion with G40?

Make sure that a positive radius is entered for the tool radius. Otherwise, the directions for G41, G42 will be changed.

What does DISCL=… specify when controlling the infeed motion using DISCL and G340, G341?

DISCL=… specifies the distance of point P2 from the machining plane.

What will apply in the case DISCL=0?

With G340: The whole approach motion consists only of two blocks (P1, P2, and P3 are identical). The approach contour is generated from P3 to P4.
With G341: The whole approach motion consists only of three blocks (P2 and P3 are identical). If P0 and P4 are located in the same plane, only two blocks will result (there will be no infeed motion from P1 to P3).

What is monitored in the case of DISCL=0?

It is monitored that the point defined by DISCL lies between P1 and P3, i.e. with all motions that possess a component which runs vertically to the machining plane, this component must have the same sign. If a reversal of the direction is detected, a tolerance of 0.01 mm is permitted.

What are the approach and retraction velocities?

Velocity of the previous block (e.g. G0): All motions from P0 up to P2 are executed at this speed, i.e. the motion parallel to the machining plane and the part of the infeed motion up to the safety clearance DISCL.
Programmed feedrate F: This feedrate is active from P3 or P2 if FAD is not programmed. If no F word is programmed in the SAR block, the velocity of the previous block will act.
Programming using FAD: Specify the feedrate for
- G341: Infeed motion vertically to the machining plane from P2 to P3
- G340: from point P2 or P3 to P4
  - If FAD is not programmed, this part of the contour is traversed at the speed which is active modally from the preceding block, in the event that no F command defining the speed is programmed in the SAR block.
During retraction, the roles of the modally effective feedrate from the previous block and the feedrate programmed in the SAR block are changed, i.e. the actual retraction contour is traversed using the old feedrate, and a new velocity programmed using the F word will apply correspondingly from P2 to P0.

What is the maximum number of blocks that can be inserted between an SAR block and the next traversing block?

A maximum of five blocks without moving the geometry axes can be inserted between an SAR block and the next traversing block.

What happens with an SAR block with a geometry axis programmed when programming when retracting?

With an SAR block with a geometry axis programmed, the contour ends at P2. The positions on the axes that constitute the machining plane result from the retraction contour. The axis component perpendicular to this is defined by DISCL. With DISCL=0, the motion will run completely in the plane.

What happens when programming when retracting if in the SAR block only the axis is programmed vertically to the machining plane?

If in the SAR block only the axis is programmed vertically to the machining plane, the contour will end at P1. The positions of the remaining axes will result, as described above. If the SAR block is also the TRC disable block, an additional path from P1 to P0 is inserted such that no motion results at the end of the contour when disabling the TRC.

What happens if only one axis on the machining plane is programmed when programming when retracting?

If only one axis on the machining plane is programmed, the missing second axis is modally added from its last position in the previous block.

What can the TRACYL cylinder surface transformation function be used to machine?

The TRACYL cylinder surface transformation function can be used to machine:

Longitudinal grooves on cylindrical bodies
Transverse grooves on cylindrical objects
Grooves with any path on cylindrical bodies
- The path of the grooves is programmed with reference to the unwrapped, level surface of the cylinder.

What does the control system do with the programmed traversing movements?

The control system transforms the programmed traversing movements in the Cartesian coordinate X, Y, Z system into the traversing movements of the real machine axes. The main spindle functions here as the machine rotary axis.

How must TRACYL be configured?

TRACYL must be configured using special machine data. The rotary axis position at which the value Y=0 is also defined here.

What are the three forms of cylinder surface coordinate transformation?

There are three forms of cylinder surface coordinate transformation:

TRACYL without groove wall offset (TRAFO_TYPE_n=512)
TRACYL with groove wall offset: (TRAFO_TYPE_n=513)
TRACYL with additional linear axis and groove wall offset: (TRAFO_TYPE_n=514)

How is the groove wall offset parameterized with TRACYL?

The groove wall offset is parameterized with TRACYL using the third parameter.

Where should the axis used for compensation be positioned for cylinder peripheral curve transformation with groove side compensation?

For cylinder peripheral curve transformation with groove side compensation, the axis used for compensation should be positioned at zero (y=0), so that the groove centric to the programmed groove center line is finished.

Which axes cannot be used as a positioning axis or a reciprocating axis?

The following axes cannot be used as a positioning axis or a reciprocating axis:

The geometry axis in the peripheral direction of the cylinder peripheral surface (Y axis)
The additional linear axis for groove side compensation (Z axis).

What is the meaning of TRACYL(d)?

TRACYL(d) Activates the first TRACYL function specified in the channel machine data. d is the parameter for the working diameter.

What is the meaning of TRACYL (d, n)?

TRACYL (d, n) Activates the n-th TRACYL function specified in the channel machine data. The maximum for n is 2, TRACYL(d,1) corresponds to TRACYL(d).

What does D stand for in TRACYL (d, n)?

D Value for the working diameter. The working diameter is double the distance between the tool tip and the turning center. This diameter must always be specified and be larger than 1.

What is the meaning of n in TRACYL (d, n)?

Optional 2nd parameter for the TRACYL data block 1 (preselected) or 2.

What does ‘Slot side compensation’ mean?

Optional 3rd parameter whose value for TRACYL is preselected using the mode for machine data. Value range:

0: Transformation type 514 without groove wall offset as previous
1: Transformation type 514 with groove wall offset

What does TRAFOOF mean?

Transformation OFF (BCS and MCS are once again identical).

What does OFFN mean?

Offset contour normal: Distance of the groove side from the programmed reference contour.

What is the meaning of OFFN address?

Distance from the groove side wall to the programmed path. The groove center line is generally programmed. OFFN defines the (half) groove width for activated milling cutter radius compensation (G41, G42).

How is OFFN programmed?

OFFN=… ; distance in mm Note Set OFFN=0 once the groove has been completed. OFFN is also used outside of TRACYL – for offset programming in combination with G41, G42.

Without groove wall offset (transformation type 512), what does the controller do?

Without groove wall offset (transformation type 512), the controller transforms the programmed traversing movements of the cylinder coordinate system to the traversing movements of the real machine axes:

Rotary axis
Infeed axis perpendicular to rotary axis
Longitudinal axis parallel to rotary axis
- The linear axes are positioned perpendicular to one another. The infeed axis cuts the rotary axis.

What is the kinematics of With groove wall offset (transformation type 513)?

Kinematics as above, but an additional longitudinal axis parallels to the peripheral direction. The linear axes are positioned perpendicular to one another. The velocity control makes allowance for the limits defined for the rotations.

In the case of axis configuration 1, when are longitudinal grooves along the rotary axis subject to parallel limits?

In the case of axis configuration 1, longitudinal grooves along the rotary axis are subject to parallel limits only if the groove width corresponds exactly to the tool radius. Grooves in parallel to the periphery (transverse grooves) are not parallel at the beginning and end.

What does the transformation variant on a machine with a second linear axis make use of?

On a machine with a second linear axis, this transformation variant makes use of redundancy in order to perform improved tool compensation.

What conditions apply to the second linear axis when using the transformation variant with additional linear axis and groove wall offset?

The following conditions then apply to the second linear axis:

A smaller working area
The second linear axis should not be used for traversing the part program.
- Certain machine data settings are assumed for the part program and the assignment of the corresponding axes in the BCS or MCS.
  - For more information, see the SINUMERIK 808D/SINUMERIK 808D ADVANCED Function Manual.

What is programmed to mill grooves with TRACYL?

To mill grooves with TRACYL, the following is programmed:

Groove center line in the part program
Half the groove width programmed using OFFN.

When does OFFN act to avoid damage to the groove side?

To avoid damage to the groove side OFFN acts only when the tool radius compensation is active. Furthermore, OFFN should also be >= the tool radius to avoid damage occurring to the opposite side of the groove.

What steps does a part program for milling a groove generally comprise?

A part program for milling a groove generally comprises the following steps:

Selecting a tool
Select TRACYL
Select suitable coordinate offset (frame)
Positioning
Program OFFN
Select TRC
Approach block (position TRC and approach groove side)
Groove center line contour
Deselect TRC
Retraction block (retract TRC and move away from groove side)
Positioning
Deselect OFFN
TRAFOOF
Re-select original coordinate shift (frame)

How is TRC selected in relation to the groove side?

TRC is not programmed in relation to the groove side, but relative to the programmed groove center line. To prevent the tool traveling to the left of the groove side, G42 is entered (instead of G41). You avoid this if in OFFN, the groove width is entered with a negative sign.

How does OFFN act with TRACYL?

OFFN acts differently with TRACYL than it does without TRACYL. As, even without TRACYL, OFFN is included when TRC is active, OFFN should be reset to zero after TRAFOOF.

Is it possible to change OFFN within a part program?

It is possible to change OFFN within a part program. This could be used to shift the groove center line from the center (see diagram).

What does TRACYL not create for guiding grooves?

Guiding grooves: TRACYL does not create the same groove for guiding grooves as it would be with a tool with the diameter producing the width of the groove. It is basically not possible to create the same groove side geometry with a smaller cylindrical tool as it is with a larger one. TRACYL minimizes the error. To avoid problems of accuracy, the tool radius should only be slightly smaller than half the groove width.

With TRAFO_TYPE_n = 512, where is the value effective under OFFN?

With TRAFO_TYPE_n = 512, the value is effective under OFFN as an allowance for TRC. With TRAFO_TYPE_n = 513, half the groove width is programmed in OFFN. The contour is retracted with OFFN-TRC.

What are cycles?

Cycles are generally applicable technology subroutines that can be used to carry out a specific machining process, such as drilling of a thread (tapping) or milling of a pocket. These cycles are adapted to individual tasks by parameter assignment.

What standard cycles can be carried out using the control system?

You can carry out the following standard cycles by using the control system:

Drilling cycles
- CYCLE81: Drilling, centering
- CYCLE82: Drilling, counterboring
- CYCLE83: Deep-hole drilling
- CYCLE84: Rigid tapping
- CYCLE840: Tapping with compensating chuck
- CYCLE85: Reaming 1
- CYCLE86: Boring
Drilling pattern cycles
- HOLES1: Row of holes
- HOLES2: Circle of holes
- CYCLE802: Arbitrary positions
Milling cycles
- CYCLE71: Face milling
- CYCLE72: Contour milling
- CYCLE76: Milling the rectangular spigot
- CYCLE77: Circular spigot milling
- LONGHOLE: Elongated hole
- SLOT1: Groove milling pattern on a circle
- SLOT2: Circumferential groove milling pattern
- POCKET3: Rectangular pocket milling (with any milling tool)
- POCKET4: Circular pocket milling (with any milling tool)
- CYCLE90: Thread milling
- CYCLE832: High speed settings

How can I transfer defining parameters for cycles?

The defining parameters for the cycles can be transferred via the parameter list when the cycle is called.

What should I note about cycle calls?

Cycle calls must always be programmed in a separate block.

What are some basic instructions with regard to the assignment of standard cycle parameters?

Each defining parameter of a cycle has a certain data type. The parameter being used must be specified when the cycle is called. In this parameter list, the following parameters can be transferred:

R parameters (only numerical values)
Constants

If R parameters are used in the parameter list, values must first be assigned to them in the program to be called.

What are the methods to call the cycles?

Proceed through either of the following methods to call the cycles:

using an incomplete parameter list
omitting parameters

How can I exclude the last transfer parameters that have to be written in a call?

You can prematurely terminate the parameter list with “)”.

How can I omit any parameters within the list?

A comma “…, ,…” must be written as a placeholder.

What happens if the parameter list contains more entries than parameters are defined in the cycle?

The general NC alarm 12340 “Too many parameters” is displayed and the cycle is not executed.

What must be configured?

Axis-specific and channel-specific machine data of the spindle must be configured.

How can I simulate cycles?

Programs with cycle calls can be tested first in simulation. During simulation, the traversing movements of the cycle are visualized on the screen.

What does the program editor in the control system provide?

The program editor in the control system provides cycle programming. You can enter machining parameters in the cycle and call the cycle in the program.

What are the three components of cycle support?

The cycle support consists of three components:

Cycle selection
Input screens for parameter assignment
Help display per cycle

How can I add a cycle call to the program?

To add a cycle call to the program, proceed as described below:

Select the desired operating area.
Select a cycle type with the corresponding horizontal softkey to open the lower-level vertical softkey bar until the desired input screen form with the help display appears on the screen.
Enter the values directly (numerical values) or indirectly (R parameters, for example, R27, or expressions consisting of R parameters, for example, R27 + 10). If numerical values are entered, then the control system automatically performs a check to see whether the value lies within the permitted range.
Use the key to select values for some parameters that may have only a few values for selection.
For drilling cycles, it is also possible to call a cycle modally with the key. To deselect the modal call, move the cursor to the next blank line of the program and press the softkey below: .
Press the softkey to confirm your input. To cancel the input, press the softkey below: .

What is the purpose of recompiling program codes?

Recompiling of program codes serves to make modifications to an existing program using the cycle support.

How can I modify an existing program using the cycle support?

Position the cursor on the program line for the cycle to be modified and press the softkey. This reopens the input screen of parameter assignment for the cycle, and you can modify and accept the parameter values.

What are drilling cycles?

Drilling cycles are motional sequences specified according to DIN 66025 for drilling, boring, tapping, etc. They are called in the form of a subroutine with a defined name and a parameter list.

The drilling cycles can be modal, that is, they are executed at the end of each block containing motion commands. Further cycles created by the user can also be called modally.

What are the two types of parameters?

There are two types of parameters:

Geometrical parameters
Machining parameters

The geometrical parameters are identical for all drilling cycles, drilling pattern cycles and milling cycles. They define the reference and retraction planes, the safety clearance and the absolute or relative final drilling depth. Geometrical parameters are assigned once during the first drilling cycle CYCLE81.

The machining parameters have a different meaning and effect in the individual cycles. They are therefore programmed in each cycle separately.

What are the call and return conditions for drilling cycles?

Drilling cycles are programmed independently of the actual axis names. The drilling position must be approached in the higher-level program before the cycle is called.

The required values for feedrate, spindle speed and direction of spindle rotation must be programmed in the part program if there are no defining parameters in the drilling cycle.

The G functions and the current data record active before the cycle was called remain active beyond the cycle.

What is generally assumed in the case of drilling cycles?

In the case of drilling cycles, it is generally assumed that the current workpiece coordinate system in which the machining operation is to be performed is to be defined by selecting plane G17, G18 or G19 and activating a programmable offset. The drilling axis is always the axis of this coordinate system which stands vertically to the current plane.

A tool length compensation must be selected before the cycle is called. Its effect is always perpendicular to the selected plane and remains active even after the end of the cycle.

How are the parameters for dwell times in the drilling cycles assigned?

The parameters for dwell times in the drilling cycles are always assigned to the F word and must therefore be assigned with values in seconds. Any deviations from this procedure must be expressly stated.

How do you program drilling, centering – CYCLE81?

CYCLE81 (RTP, RFP, SDIS, DP, DPR)

What are the parameters for drilling, centering – CYCLE81?

Parameter	Data type	Description
RTP	REAL	Retraction plane (absolute)
RFP	REAL	Reference plane (absolute)
SDIS	REAL	Safety clearance (enter without sign)
DP	REAL	Final drilling depth (absolute)
DPR	REAL	Final drilling depth relative to the reference plane (enter without sign)

What is the function of drilling, centering – CYCLE81?

The tool drills at the programmed spindle speed and feedrate to the entered final drilling depth.

What is the sequence of drilling, centering – CYCLE81?

Position reached prior to cycle start: The drilling position is the position in the two axes of the selected plane.

The cycle creates the following sequence of motions:

Approaching the position of safety distance relative to the reference plane with G0
Traversing to the final drilling depth with the feedrate (G1) programmed prior to the cycle call
Retracting to the retraction plane with G0

What is the explanation of the RFP and RTP parameters for drilling, centering – CYCLE81?

Normally, reference plane (RFP) and retraction plane (RTP) have different values. The cycle assumes that the retraction plane precedes the reference plane. This means that the distance from the retraction plane to the final drilling depth is larger than the distance from the reference plane to the final drilling depth.

What is the explanation of the SDIS parameter for drilling, centering – CYCLE81?

The safety clearance (SDIS) acts with reference to the reference plane. This is brought forward by the safety clearance. The direction in which the safety clearance is active is automatically determined by the cycle.

What is the explanation of the DP and DPR parameters for drilling, centering – CYCLE81?

The final drilling depth can be specified either absolute (DP) or relative (DPR) to the reference plane. With relative specification, the cycle will calculate the resulting depth automatically using the positions of reference and retraction planes.

What happens if a value is entered both for DP and for DPR in drilling, centering – CYCLE81?

If a value is entered both for DP and for DPR, the final drilling depth is derived from DPR. If this differs from the absolute depth programmed via DP, the message “Depth: Corresponding to value for relative depth” is output in the dialog line.

What happens if the values for reference and retraction planes are identical in drilling, centering – CYCLE81?

If the values for reference and retraction planes are identical, a relative depth specification is not permitted. The error message 61101 “Reference plane defined incorrectly” is output and the cycle is not executed. This error message is also output if the retraction plane is located after the reference plane, i.e. its distance to the final drilling depth is smaller.

What does this program produce?

This program produces three drill holes using the CYCLE81 drilling cycle. The drilling axis is always the Z axis.

N10 G0 G17 G90 F200 S300 M3 ; Specification of technology values N20 D3 T3 Z110 ; Approach retraction plane N30 X40 Y120 ; Approach of the first drilling position N40 CYCLE81(110, 100, 2, 35,) ; Cycle call with absolute final drilling depth, safety clearance and incomplete parameter list N50 Y30 ; Approach next drilling position N60 CYCLE81(110, 102, , 35,) ; Cycle call without safety clearance N70 G0 G90 F180 S300 M03 ; Specification of technology values N80 X90 ; Approach next position N90 CYCLE81(110, 100, 2, 65,) ; Cycle call with relative final drilling depth and safety clearance N100 M02 ; End of program

How do you program drilling, counterboring – CYCLE82?

CYCLE82 (RTP, RFP, SDIS, DP, DPR, DTB)

What are the parameters for drilling, counterboring – CYCLE82?

Parameter	Data type	Description
RTP	REAL	Retraction plane (absolute)
RFP	REAL	Reference plane (absolute)
SDIS	REAL	Safety clearance (enter without sign)
DP	REAL	Final drilling depth (absolute)
DPR	REAL	Final drilling depth relative to the reference plane (enter without sign)
DTB	REAL	Dwell time at final drilling depth (chip breaking)

What is the function of drilling, counterboring – CYCLE82?

The tool drills at the programmed spindle speed and feedrate to the entered final drilling depth. A dwell time can be allowed to elapse when the final drilling depth has been reached.

What is the sequence of drilling, counterboring – CYCLE82?

Position reached prior to cycle start: The drilling position is the position in the two axes of the selected plane.

The cycle creates the following sequence of motions:

Approaching the position of safety distance relative to the reference plane with G0
Traversing to the final drilling depth with the feedrate (G1) programmed prior to the cycle call
Dwell time at final drilling depth
Retraction to the retraction plane with G0

Where can I find more information about the parameters RTP, RFP, SDIS, DP, DPR for drilling, counterboring – CYCLE82?

See Section “Drilling, centering – CYCLE81”.

What is the explanation of the DTB parameter for drilling, counterboring – CYCLE82?

The dwell time to the final drilling depth (chip breakage) is programmed under DTB in seconds.

What does this program machine?

The program machines a single hole of a depth of 27 mm at position X24 Y15 in the XY plane with cycle CYCLE82. The dwell time programmed is 2 s, the safety clearance in the drilling axis Z is 4 mm.

N10 G0 G17 G90 F200 S300 M3 ; Specification of technology values N20 D1 T10 Z110 ; Approach retraction plane N30 X24 Y15 ; Approach drilling position N40 CYCLE82 (110, 102, 4, 75, , 2) ; Cycle call with absolute final drilling depth and safety clearance N50 M02 ; End of program

What are the steps to program drilling, counterboring?

Proceed through the following steps:

Select the desired operating area.
Open the vertical softkey bar for available drilling cycles.
Press the softkey from the vertical softkey bar.
Press the softkey to open the window for CYCLE82. Parameterize the cycle as desired.
Confirm your settings with the softkey. The cycle is then automatically transferred to the program editor as a separate block.

How do you program deep-hole drilling – CYCLE83?

CYCLE83 (RTP, RFP, SDIS, DP, DPR, FDEP, FDPR, DAM, DTB, DTS, FRF, VARI, AXN, MDEP, VRT, DTD, DIS1)

What are the parameters for deep-hole drilling – CYCLE83?

Parameter	Data type	Description
RTP	REAL	Retraction plane (absolute)
RFP	REAL	Reference plane (absolute)
SDIS	REAL	Safety clearance (enter without sign)
DP	REAL	Final drilling depth (absolute)
DPR	REAL	Final drilling depth relative to the reference plane (enter without sign)
FDEP	REAL	First drilling depth (absolute)
FDPR	REAL	First drilling depth relative to the reference plane (enter without sign)
DAM	REAL	Amount of degression (enter without sign) Values: >0: degression as value <0: degression factor =0: no degression
DTB	REAL	Dwell time at drilling depth (chip breakage) Values: >0: in seconds <0: in revolutions
DTS	REAL	Dwell time at starting point and for chip removal Values: >0: in seconds <0: in revolutions
FRF	REAL	Feedrate factor for the first drilling depth (enter without sign) Range of values: 0.001 … 1
VARI	INT	Machining type: Chip breakage=0, Chip removal=1
AXN	INT	Tool axis (values: 1 = 1st geometrical axis; 2 = 2nd geometrical axis; 3 = 3rd geometrical axis)
MDEP	REAL	Minimum drilling depth (only in connection with degression factor)
VRT	REAL	Variable return path with chip breakage (VARI=0) Values: >0: if traction value =0: retraction value 1mm set
DTD	REAL	Dwell time at final drilling depth Values: >0: in seconds <0: in revolutions =0: value same as DTB
DIS1	REAL	Programmable limit distance for reinsertion in the drill hole (for chip removal VARI=1) Values: >0: programmable value applies =0: automatic calculation

What is the function of deep-hole drilling – CYCLE83?

The tool drills at the programmed spindle speed and feedrate to the entered final drilling depth. Deep hole drilling is performed with a depth infeed of a maximum definable depth executed several times, increasing gradually until the final drilling depth is reached.

The drill can either be retracted to the reference plane + safety clearance after every infeed depth for swarf removal or retracted in each case by 1 mm for chip breaking.

What is the sequence of deep-hole drilling – CYCLE83?

Position reached prior to cycle start: The drilling position is the position in the two axes of the selected plane.

The cycle creates the following sequence:

Deep hole drilling with chip removal (VARI=1):

Approaching the position of safety distance relative to the reference plane with G0
Traversing to the first drilling depth with G1, the feedrate for which is derived from the feedrate defined with the program call which is subject to parameter FRF (feedrate factor)
Dwell time at final drilling depth (parameter DTB)
Retracting to the reference plane brought forward by the safety clearance for swarf removal with G0
Dwell time at the starting point (parameter DTS)
Approach of the drilling depth last reached, reduced by anticipation distance with G0
Traversing to the next drilling depth with G1 (sequence of motions is continued until the final drilling depth is reached)
Retracting to the retraction plane with G0

Deep-hole drilling with chip breakage (VARI=0):

Approach of the reference plane brought forward by the safety clearance by using G0
Traversing to the first drilling depth with G1, the feedrate for which is derived from the feedrate defined with the program call which is subject to parameter FRF (feedrate factor)
Dwell time at final drilling depth (parameter DTB)
Retraction by 1 mm from the current drilling depth with G1 and the feedrate programmed in the calling program (for chip breaking)
Traversing to the next drilling depth with G1 and the programmed feedrate (sequence of motions is continued until the final drilling depth is reached)
Retraction to the retraction plane with G0

What are the call and return conditions?

The G functions effective prior to the cycle call and the programmable offsets remain active beyond the cycle. The machining level (G17, G18, G19) must be defined before calling the cycle. A cycle operates in the current plane with:

First axis of the plane (abscissa)
Second axis of the plane (ordinate)
Drilling axis/infeed axis, third axis, standing vertically to the plane (vertical infeed axis)

How is the drilling operation carried out in drilling cycles?

With drilling cycles, the drilling operation is carried out in the axis standing vertically to the current plane. In milling, the depth infeed is carried out in this axis.

See the following table for plane and axis assignment:

Command	Plane (abscissa/ordinate)	Vertical infeed axis
G17	X/Y	Z
G18	Z/X	Y
G19	Y/Z	X

What messages are output during the execution of a cycle?

Messages that refer to the state of machining are displayed on the screen of the control system during program execution. These messages do not interrupt the program execution and continue to be displayed on the screen until the next message appears.

The message texts and their meaning are listed together with the cycle to which they refer.

What is the block display during execution of a cycle?

During the cycle execution, the cursor is always located on the program blocks of the cycle.

Are there any plausibility checks made for parameter values with a limited range of values?

No plausibility checks are made for parameter values with a limited range of values unless an error response has been specifically described for a cycle.

What is the explanation of the parameters for RTP, RFP, SDIS, DP, and DPR?

For more information about the parameters RTP, RFP, SDIS, DP, DPR, see Section “Drilling, centering – CYCLE81”.

How is the intermediate drilling depth calculated in the cycle?

The intermediate drilling depth is calculated in the cycle on the basis of final drilling depth, first drilling depth and amount of degression as follows:

In the first step, the depth parameterized with the first drilling depth is traversed as long as it does not exceed the total drilling depth.
From the second drilling depth on, the drilling stroke is obtained by subtracting the amount of degression from the stroke of the last drilling depth, provided that the latter is greater than the programmed amount of degression.
The next drilling strokes correspond to the amount of degression, as long as the remaining depth is greater than twice the amount of degression.
The last two drilling strokes are divided and traversed equally and are therefore always greater than half of the amount of degression.

What happens if the value for the first drilling depth is incompatible with the total depth?

If the value for the first drilling depth is incompatible with the total depth, the error message 61107 “First drilling depth defined incorrectly” is output and the cycle is not executed.

What is the effect of the FDPR parameter in the cycle?

The FDPR parameter has the same effect in the cycle as the DPR parameter. If the values for the reference and retraction planes are identical, the first drilling depth can be defined as a relative value.

What happens if the first drilling depth is programmed larger than the final drilling depth?

If the first drilling depth is programmed larger than the final drilling depth, the final drilling depth is never exceeded. The cycle will reduce the first drilling depth automatically as far as the final drilling depth is reached when drilling only once, and will therefore drill only once.

What is DTB (dwell time)?

The dwell time to the final drilling depth (chip breakage) is programmed under DTB in seconds.

What is DTS (dwell time)?

The dwell time at the starting point is only performed if VARI=1 (chip removal).

What is FRF (feedrate factor)?

With this parameter, you can specify a reduction factor for the active feedrate which only applies to the approach to the first drilling depth in the cycle.

What is VARI (machining type)?

If parameter VARI=0 is set, the drill retracts 1 mm after reaching each drilling depth for chip breakage. If VARI=1 (for chip removal), the drill traverses in each case to the reference plane shifted by the amount of the safety clearance.

How is the anticipation distance calculated internally in the cycle?

The anticipation distance is calculated internally in the cycle as follows:

If the drilling depth is 30 mm, the value of the anticipation distance is always 0.6 mm.
For larger drilling depths, the formula drilling depth / 50 is used (maximum value 7 mm).

What is AXN (tool axis)?

By programming the drilling axis via AXN, it is possible to omit the switchover from plane G18 to G17 when the deep-hole drilling cycle is used on turning machines.

What are the meanings of the identifiers for AXN?

The identifiers have the following meanings:

AXN=1 First axis of the current plane
AXN=2 Second axis of the current plane
AXN=3 Third axis of the current plane

What is an example of how to machine a center hole (in Z) in the G18 plane?

For example, to machine a center hole (in Z) in the G18 plane, you program:

G18 AXN=1

What is MDEP (minimum drilling depth)?

You can define a minimum drilling depth for drill stroke calculations based on a degression factor. If the calculated drilling stroke becomes shorter than the minimum drilling depth, the remaining depth is machined in strokes equaling the length of the minimum drilling depth.

What is VRT (variable retraction value for chip breakage with VARI=0)?

You can program the retraction path for chip breaking.

What is DTD (dwell time at final drilling depth)?

The dwell time at final drilling depth can be entered in seconds or revolutions.

What is DIS1 (programmable limit distance for VARI=1)?

The limit distance after re-insertion in the hole can be programmed. The limit distance is calculated within the cycle as follows:

Up to a drilling depth of 30 mm, the value is set to 0.6 mm.
For larger drilling depths, the limit distance is the result of (RFP + SDIS – current depth) / 50. If this calculated value >7, a limit of 7 mm, maximum, is applied.

What does this program execute?

N10 G0 G17 G90 F50 S500 M4 ; Specification of technology values 
N20 D1 T12 ; Approach retraction plane 
N30 Z155  
N40 X80 Y120 ; Approach first drilling position 
N50 CYCLE83(20,0,3,-15,,-6,,1,1,1,1,0,3,4,3,1,2) ; Call of cycle; depth parameters with absolute values 
N60 X80 Y60 ; Approach next drilling position 
N70 CYCLE83(20,0,3,-15,,-6,,1,1,1,1,0,3,4,3,1,2) ; Cycle call with relative data for final drilling depth and first drilling depth; the safety clearance is 1 mm and the feedrate factor is 0.5 
N80 M02 ; End of program

This program executes the cycle CYCLE83 at the positions X80 Y120 and X80 Y60 in the XY plane. The first drill hole is drilled with a dwell time zero and machining type chip breaking. The final drilling depth and the first drilling depth are entered as absolute values. In the second cycle call, a dwell time of 1 s is programmed. Machining type chip removal is selected, the final drilling depth is relative to the reference plane. The drilling axis in both cases is the Z axis.

What are the steps to execute deep-hole drilling?

Proceed through the following steps:

Select the desired operating area.
Open the vertical softkey bar for available drilling cycles.
Press this softkey to open the window for CYCLE83. Parameterize the cycle as desired.
Confirm your settings with this softkey. The cycle is then automatically transferred to the program editor as a separate block.

What is the programming for Rigid tapping – CYCLE84?

CYCLE84 (RTP, RFP, SDIS, DP, DPR, DTB, SDAC, MPIT, PIT, POSS, SST, SST1, AXN, 0, 0, VARI, DAM, VRT)

What are the parameters for CYCLE84?

Parameter	Data type	Description
RTP	REAL	Retraction plane (absolute)
RFP	REAL	Reference plane (absolute)
SDIS	REAL	Safety clearance (enter without sign)
DP	REAL	Final drilling depth (absolute)
DPR	REAL	Final drilling depth relative to the reference plane (enter without sign)
DTB	REAL	Dwell time at final drilling depth (chip breakage)
SDAC	INT	Direction of rotation after end of cycle
		Values: 3, 4 or 5 (for M3, M4 or M5)
MPIT	REAL	Thread lead as a thread size (signed):
		Range of values 3 (for M3) to 48 (for M48); the sign determines the direction of rotation in the thread
PIT	REAL	Thread lead as a value (signed)
		Range of values: 0.001 mm to 2000.000 mm; the sign determines the direction of rotation in the thread
POSS	REAL	Spindle position for oriented spindle stop in the cycle (in degrees)
SST	REAL	Speed for tapping
SST1	REAL	Speed for retraction
AXN	INT	Tool axis (values 1): 1 = 1st axis of the current plane; 2 = 2nd axis of the current plane; 3 = 3rd axis of the current plane)
PSYS	INT	Internal parameter; only the default value 0 is possible
PSYS	INT	Internal parameter; only the default value 0 is possible
VARI	INT	Machining type (values: 0 = Tapping in one pass; 1 = Deep-hole tapping with chip breakage; 2 = Deep-hole tapping with chip removal)
DAM	REAL	Incremental drilling depth value range: 0 <= Max. value
VRT	REAL	Variable return path with chip breakage value range: 0 <= Max. value

What is the definition of the 1st, 2nd, and 3rd axes?

The definition of the 1st, 2nd, and 3rd axes depends upon the current plane selected.

What is the function of CYCLE84?

The tool drills at the programmed spindle speed and feedrate to the entered final thread depth. CYCLE84 can be used to make tapped holes without compensating chuck. For tapping with compensating chuck, a separate cycle CYCLE840 is provided.

When can CYCLE84 be used?

CYCLE84 can be used if the spindle to be used for the boring operation is technically able to be operated in the position-controlled spindle operation.

What is the sequence for CYCLE84?

Position reached prior to cycle start: The drilling position is the position in the two axes of the selected plane. The cycle creates the following sequence of motions:

Approaching the position of safety distance relative to the reference plane with G0
Oriented spindle stop (value in the parameter POSS) and switching the spindle to axis mode
Tapping to final drilling depth and speed SST
Dwell time at thread depth (parameter DTB)
Retraction to the reference plane brought forward by the safety clearance, speed SST1 and direction reversal
Retraction to the retraction plane with G0; spindle mode is reinitiated by reprogramming the spindle speed active before the cycle was called and the direction of rotation programmed under SDAC

What is DTB (dwell time) for CYCLE84?

The dwell time must be programmed in seconds. When tapping blind holes, it is recommended that you omit the dwell time.

What is SDAC (direction of rotation after end of cycle) for CYCLE84?

Under SDAC, the direction of rotation after end of cycle is programmed. For tapping, the direction is changed automatically by the cycle.

What are MPIT and PIT (thread lead as a thread size and as a value) for CYCLE84?

The value for the thread lead can be defined either as the thread size (for metric threads between M3 and M48 only) or as a value (distance from one thread turn to the next as a numerical value). Any parameters not required are omitted in the call or assigned the value zero. RH or LH threads are defined by the sign of the lead parameters:

Positive value → right (same as M3)
Negative value → left (same as M4)

If the two lead parameters have conflicting values, alarm 61001 “Thread lead wrong” is generated by the cycle and cycle execution is aborted.

What is POSS (spindle position) for CYCLE84?

Before tapping, the spindle is stopped with orientation in the cycle by using the command SPOS and switched to position control. The spindle position for this spindle stop is programmed under POSS.

What is SST (speed) for CYCLE84?

Parameter SST contains the spindle speed for the tapping block with G331.

What is SST1 (retraction speed) for CYCLE84?

The speed for retraction from the tapped hole is programmed under SST1. If this parameter is assigned the value zero, retraction is carried out at the speed programmed under SST.

What is an example of how to machine a center hole (in Z) in the G17 plane?

For example, to machine a center hole (in Z) in the G17 plane, you program: G17 AXN=3

What are VARI, DAM, and VRT for deep-hole tapping?

With the VARI parameter, it is possible to distinguish between simple tapping (VARI = 0) and deep-hole tapping (VARI ≠ 0). In conjunction with deep-hole tapping, it is possible to choose between chip breaking (retraction by variable distance from current drilling depth, parameter VRT, VARI = 1) and chip removal (withdrawal from reference plane VARI = 2). These functions work analogously to the normal deep-hole drilling cycle CYCLE83. The incremental drilling depth for one pass is specified via parameter DAM. The cycle internally calculates the intermediate depth as follows:

The programmed incremental drilling depth is executed in each step until the rest up to the final drilling depth is less than (<) 2 x DAM.
The remaining drilling depth is halved and executed in two steps. Thus, the minimum drilling depth is not smaller than DAM / 2.

What is the direction of rotation when tapping in the cycle?

The direction of rotation when tapping in the cycle is always reversed automatically.

What does this program execute?

N10 G0 G90 T11 D1 ; Specification of technology values 
N20 G17 X30 Y35 Z40 ; Approach drilling position 
N30 CYCLE84(20,0,3,-15,,1,3,6,,0,500,500,3,0,0,0,5,0) Cycle call; parameter PIT has been omitted; no value is entered for the absolute depth or the dwell time; spindle stop at 90 degrees; speed for tapping is 200, speed for retraction is 500 
N40 M02 ; End of program

A thread is tapped without compensating chuck at position X30 Y35 in the XY plane; the tapping axis is the Z axis. No dwell time is programmed; the depth is programmed as a relative value. The parameters for the direction of rotation and for the lead must be assigned values. A metric thread M5 is tapped.

What are the steps to execute rigid tapping?

Proceed through the following steps:

Select the desired operating area.
Open the vertical softkey bar for available drilling cycles.
Press this softkey from the vertical softkey bar.
Press this softkey to open the window for CYCLE84. Parameterize the cycle as desired.
Confirm your settings with this softkey. The cycle is then automatically transferred to the program editor as a separate block.

What is the programming for tapping with compensating chuck – CYCLE840?

CYCLE840 (RTP, RFP, SDIS, DP, DPR, DTB, SDR, SDAC, ENC, MPIT, PIT, AXN)

What are the parameters for CYCLE840?

Parameter	Data type	Description
RTP	REAL	Retraction plane (absolute)
RFP	REAL	Reference plane (absolute)
SDIS	REAL	Safety clearance (enter without sign)
DP	REAL	Final drilling depth (absolute)
DPR	REAL	Final drilling depth relative to the reference plane (enter without sign)
DTB	REAL	Dwell time at final drilling depth (chip breakage)
SDR	INT	Direction of rotation for retraction
		Values: 0 (automatic direction reversal), 3 or 4 (for M3 or M4)
SDAC	INT	Direction of rotation after end of cycle
		Values: 3, 4 or 5 (for M3, M4 or M5)
ENC	INT	Tapping with/without encoder
		Values: 0 = with encoder, 1 = without encoder
MPIT	REAL	Thread lead as a thread size (signed):
		Range of values 3 (for M3) to 48 (for M48)
PST	REAL	Thread lead as a value (signed)
		Range of values: 0.001 … 2000.000 mm
AXN	INT	Tool axis (values1): 1 = 1st axis of the current plane; 2 = 2nd axis of the current plane; 3 = 3rd axis of the current plane)

What is the function of CYCLE840?

The tool drills at the programmed spindle speed and feedrate to the entered final thread depth. This cycle is used to program tapping with the compensating chuck:

Without encoder
With encoder

What is the sequence for tapping with compensating chuck without encoder?

Position reached prior to cycle start: The drilling position is the position in the two axes of the selected plane. The cycle creates the following sequence of motions:

Approaching the position of safety distance relative to the reference plane with G0
Tapping to the final drilling depth
Dwell time at tapping depth (parameter DTB)
Retraction to the reference plane brought forward by the safety clearance
Retraction to the retraction plane with G0

What is the sequence of operations for tapping with compensating chuck with encoder?

Position reached prior to cycle start: The drilling position is the position in the two axes of the selected plane. The cycle creates the following sequence of motions:

Approach of the reference plane brought forward by the safety clearance by using G0
Tapping to the final drilling depth
Dwell time at thread depth (parameter DTB)
Retraction to the reference plane brought forward by the safety clearance
Retraction to the retraction plane with G0

What is DTB (dwell time) for CYCLE840?

The dwell time must be programmed in seconds.

What is SDR (direction of rotation for retraction) for CYCLE840?

SDR=0 must be set if the spindle direction is to reverse automatically. If the machine data is defined such that no encoder is set (in this case, machine data MD30200 $MA_NUM_ENCS is 0), the parameter must be assigned the value 3 or 4 for the direction of rotation; otherwise, alarm 61202 “No spindle direction programmed” is output and the cycle is aborted.

What is SDAC (direction of rotation) for CYCLE840?

Because the cycle can also be called modally, it requires a direction of rotation for tapping further threaded holes. This is programmed in parameter SDAC and corresponds to the direction of rotation programmed before the first call in the higher-level program. If SDR=0, the value assigned to SDAC has no meaning in the cycle and can be omitted in the parameterization.

What is ENC (tapping) for CYCLE840?

If tapping is to be performed without encoder although an encoder exists, parameter ENC must be assigned value 1. If, however, no encoder is installed and the parameter is assigned the value 0, it is ignored in the cycle.

What are MPIT and PIT (thread lead as a thread size and as a value) for CYCLE840?

The parameter for the lead is only relevant if tapping is performed with encoder. The cycle calculates the feedrate from the spindle speed and the lead.

How can the value for the thread lead be defined?

The value for the thread lead can be defined as either the thread size (for metric threads between M3 and M48 only) or as a value (distance from one thread turn to the next as a numerical value).

What happens to any parameters not required for the thread lead?

Any parameters not required are omitted in the call or assigned the value zero.

What happens if the two lead parameters have conflicting values?

If the two lead parameters have conflicting values, alarm 61001 “Thread lead wrong” is generated by the cycle and cycle execution is aborted.

How does the cycle select whether tapping is to be performed with or without encoder?

Depending on the settings in machine data MD30200 $MA_NUM_ENCS, the cycle selects whether tapping is to be performed with or without encoder.

How must the direction of rotation for the spindle be programmed?

The direction of rotation for the spindle must be programmed with M3 or M4.

What happens to the values of the feedrate override switch and spindle speed override switch in thread blocks with G63?

In thread blocks with G63, the values of the feedrate override switch and spindle speed override switch are frozen to 100%.

What is usually required for tapping without encoder?

A longer compensating chuck is usually required for tapping without encoder.

What does the following figure present?

The following figure presents the options for the drilling axes to be selected.

What are the options for drilling axes with G17?

AXN=1; Corresponds to X
AXN=2; Corresponds to Y
AXN=3; Corresponds to Z

What does using AXN (number of the drilling axis) to program the drilling axis enable?

Using AXN (number of the drilling axis) to program the drilling axis enables the drilling axis to be directly programmed.

What is AXN=1?

AXN=1 is the 1st axis of the current plane.

What is AXN=2?

AXN=2 is the 2nd axis of the current plane.

What is AXN=3?

AXN=3 is the 3rd axis of the current plane.

How do you machine a hole in the G17 plane with Z axis?

To machine a hole in the G17 plane with Z axis, you program:

G17

AXN=3

What is tapped in this program?

In this program, a thread is tapped without encoder at position X35 Y35 in the XY plane; the tapping axis is the Z axis.

What must be assigned to the parameters SDR and SDAC?

The parameters SDR and SDAC for the direction of rotation must be assigned.

What is parameter ENC assigned?

Parameter ENC is assigned the value 1.

What is the value for the depth?

The value for the depth is the absolute value.

Can lead parameter PIT be omitted?

Lead parameter PIT can be omitted.

What is used in machining?

A compensating chuck is used in machining.

What is the specification of technology values?

N10 G90 G0 T11 D1 S500 M3

What is the approach drilling position?

N20 G17 X35 Y35 Z60

How is the path feedrate set?

N30 G1 F200

What is the cycle call?

N40 CYCLE840(20,0,3,-15,1,4,3,1,6,3) Cycle call, dwell time 1 s, direction of rotation for retraction M4, direction of rotation after cycle M3, no safety clearance, parameters MPIT and PIT have been omitted

What is the end of program?

N50 M02

What is tapped in this program?

In this program, a thread is tapped with encoder at position X35 Y35 in the XY plane.

What is the drilling axis?

The drilling axis is the Z axis.

What must be defined?

The lead parameter must be defined.

What is programmed?

Automatic reversal of the direction of rotation is programmed.

What is used in machining?

A compensating chuck is used in machining.

What is the specification of technology values?

N10 G90 G0 T11 D1 S500 M4

What is the approach drilling position?

N20 G17 X35 Y35 Z60

What is the cycle call?

N30 CYCLE840(20,0,3,-15,1,3,4,1,6,3) ; Cycle call, without safety clearance, with absolute depth specification

What is the end of program?

N40 M02

What is the programming for Reaming 1 – CYCLE85?

CYCLE85 (RTP, RFP, SDIS, DP, DPR, DTB, FFR, RFF)

What does the “RTP” parameter stand for?

The “RTP” parameter stands for REAL Retraction plane (absolute).

What does the “RFP” parameter stand for?

The “RFP” parameter stands for REAL Reference plane (absolute).

What does the “SDIS” parameter stand for?

The “SDIS” parameter stands for REAL Safety clearance (enter without sign).

What does the “DP” parameter stand for?

The “DP” parameter stands for REAL Final drilling depth (absolute).

What does the “DPR” parameter stand for?

The “DPR” parameter stands for REAL Final drilling depth relative to the reference plane (enter without sign).

What does the “DTB” parameter stand for?

The “DTB” parameter stands for REAL Dwell time at final drilling depth (chip breakage).

What does the “FFR” parameter stand for?

The “FFR” parameter stands for REAL Feedrate.

What does the “RFF” parameter stand for?

The “RFF” parameter stands for REAL Retraction feedrate.

What does the tool do during this function?

The tool drills at the programmed spindle speed and feedrate velocity to the entered final drilling depth.

How is the inward and outward movement performed?

The inward and outward movement is performed at the feedrate assigned to FFR and RFF respectively.

What is the drilling position?

The drilling position is the position in the two axes of the selected plane.

What sequence of motions does the cycle create?

The cycle creates the following sequence of motions:

Approaching the position of safety distance relative to the reference plane with G0
Traversing to the final drilling depth with G1 and at the feedrate programmed under the parameter FFR
Dwell time at final drilling depth
Retracting to a position of safety distance relative to the reference plane with G1 and the retraction feedrate defined by the parameter RFF
Retracting to the retraction plane with G0

Where can more information about the parameters RTP, RFP, SDIS, DP, and DPR be found?

For more information about the parameters RTP, RFP, SDIS, DP, DPR, see Section “Drilling, centering – CYCLE81”.

What is programmed under DTB?

The dwell time to the final drilling depth is programmed under DTB in seconds.

What is active in drilling?

The feedrate value programmed under FFR is active in drilling.

What is active when retracting from the hole to the reference plane + safety clearance?

The feedrate value programmed under RFF is active when retracting from the hole to the reference plane + safety clearance.

Where is CYCLE85 called?

CYCLE85 is called at position Z70 X50 in the ZX plane.

What is the drilling axis?

The drilling axis is the Y axis.

How is the value for the final drilling depth in the cycle call programmed?

The value for the final drilling depth in the cycle call is programmed as a relative value.

Is a dwell time programmed?

No dwell time is programmed.

Where is the workpiece upper edge?

The workpiece upper edge is at Y102.

What is the approach drilling position?

N20 G18 Z70 X50 Y105

What is the cycle call?

N30 CYCLE85(105, 102, 2, , 25, , 300, 450) ; Cycle call, no dwell time programmed

What is the end of program?

N40 M02

What is the programming for Boring – CYCLE86?

CYCLE86 (RTP, RFP, SDIS, DP, DPR, DTB, SDIR, RPA, RPO, RPAP, POSS)

What does the “RTP” parameter stand for?

The “RTP” parameter stands for REAL Retraction plane (absolute).

What does the “RFP” parameter stand for?

The “RFP” parameter stands for REAL Reference plane (absolute).

What does the “SDIS” parameter stand for?

The “SDIS” parameter stands for REAL Safety clearance (enter without sign).

What does the “DP” parameter stand for?

The “DP” parameter stands for REAL Final drilling depth (absolute).

What does the “DPR” parameter stand for?

The “DPR” parameter stands for REAL Final drilling depth relative to the reference plane (enter without sign).

What does the “DTB” parameter stand for?

The “DTB” parameter stands for REAL Dwell time at final drilling depth (chip breakage).

What does the “SDIR” parameter stand for?

The “SDIR” parameter stands for INT Direction of rotation.

What are the values for the “SDIR” parameter?

Values for the “SDIR” parameter are: 3 (for M3), 4 (for M4).

What does the “RPA” parameter stand for?

The “RPA” parameter stands for REAL Retraction path along the first axis of the plane (incremental, enter with sign).

What does the “RPO” parameter stand for?

The “RPO” parameter stands for REAL Retraction path along the second axis of the plane (incremental, enter with sign).

What does the “RPAP” parameter stand for?

The “RPAP” parameter stands for REAL Retraction path along the drilling axis (incremental, enter with sign).

What does the “POSS” parameter stand for?

The “POSS” parameter stands for REAL Spindle position for oriented spindle stop in the cycle (in degrees).

What does the cycle support?

The cycle supports boring of holes with a boring bar.

What does the tool do?

The tool drills at the programmed spindle speed and feedrate velocity up to the entered drilling depth.

What happens with drilling 2?

With drilling 2, oriented spindle stop is activated once the drilling depth has been reached.

What happens after the programmed retraction positions are approached in rapid traverse?

Then, the programmed retraction positions are approached in rapid traverse, and from there the retraction plane is approached.

What is the drilling position?

The drilling position is the position in the two axes of the selected plane.

What sequence of motions does the cycle create?

The cycle creates the following sequence of motions:

Approaching the position of safety distance relative to the reference plane with G0
Traversing to final drilling depth with G1 and the feedrate programmed prior to the cycle call
Dwell time to final drilling depth
Oriented spindle stop at the spindle position programmed under POSS
Traverse retraction path in up to three axes with G0
Retracting in the drilling axis to the position of safety distance relative to the reference plane with G0
Retracting to the retraction plane with G0 (initial drilling position in both axes of the plane)

Where can more information about the parameters RTP, RFP, SDIS, DP, and DPR be found?

For more information about the parameters RTP, RFP, SDIS, DP, DPR, see Section “Drilling, centering – CYCLE81”.

What is programmed under DTB?

The dwell time to the final drilling depth (chip breakage) is programmed under DTB in seconds.

What do you determine with the SDIR parameter?

With this parameter, you determine the direction of rotation with which boring is performed in the cycle.

What happens if values other than 3 or 4 (M3/M4) are generated?

If values other than 3 or 4 (M3/M4) are generated, alarm 61102 “No spindle direction programmed” is generated and the cycle is not executed.

What do you use the RPA parameter to define?

Use this parameter to define a retraction movement along the first axis (abscissa), which is executed after the final drilling depth has been reached and oriented spindle stop has been performed.

What do you use the RPO parameter to define?

Use this parameter to define a retraction movement along the second axis (ordinate), which is executed after the final drilling depth has been reached and oriented spindle stop has been performed.

What do you use the RPAP parameter to define?

You use this parameter to define a retraction movement along the drilling axis, which is executed after the final drilling axis has been reached and oriented spindle stop has been performed.

What do you use POSS to program?

Use POSS to program the spindle position for the oriented spindle stop in degrees, which is performed after the final drilling depth has been reached.

Is it possible to stop the active spindle with orientation?

It is possible to stop the active spindle with orientation.

How is the angular value programmed?

The angular value is programmed using a transfer parameter.

When can CYCLE86 be used?

CYCLE86 can be used only if the spindle to be used for the drilling operation is technically able to execute the SPOS command.

Where is CYCLE86 called?

CYCLE86 is called at position X70 Y50 in the XY plane.

What is the drilling axis?

The drilling axis is the Z axis.

How is the final drilling depth programmed?

The final drilling depth is programmed as an absolute value.

Is a safety clearance specified?

No safety clearance is specified.

What is the dwell time at the final drilling depth?

The dwell time at the final drilling depth is 2 sec.

Where is the top edge of the workpiece positioned?

The top edge of the workpiece is positioned at Z110.

How is the spindle to rotate in the cycle?

In the cycle, the spindle is to rotate with M3 and to stop at 45 degrees.

What is the specification of technology values?

N10 G0 G17 G90 F200 S300 M3

What is the approach retraction plane?

N20 T11 D1 Z112

What is the approach drilling position?

N30 X70 Y50

What is the cycle call?

N40 CYCLE86(112, 110, , 77, 0, 2, 3, -1, -1, 1, 45) ; Cycle call with absolute drilling depth

What is the end of program?

N50 M02

What do the drilling pattern cycles only describe?

The drilling pattern cycles only describe the geometry of an arrangement of drilling holes in the plane.

How is the link to a drilling process established?

The link to a drilling process is established via the modal call of this drilling cycle before the drilling pattern cycle is programmed.

Can drilling pattern cycles be used for other applications without prior modal call of a drilling cycle?

Drilling pattern cycles can also be used for other applications without prior modal call of a drilling cycle because the drilling pattern cycles can be parameterized without reference to the drilling cycle used.

What appears if there was no modal call of the subroutine prior to calling the drilling pattern cycle?

If there was no modal call of the subroutine prior to calling the drilling pattern cycle, error message 62100 “No drilling cycle active” appears.

What key should be pressed to acknowledge the error message?

To acknowledge the error message, press the NC Stop key.

What key should be pressed to continue the program execution?

To continue the program execution, press the Start key.

What will the drilling pattern cycle approach after the error message?

The drilling pattern cycle will then approach each of the positions calculated from the input data one after the other without calling a subroutine at these points.

What must be parameterized?

The number of holes in a drilling pattern must be parameterized.

What happens if the value of the quantity parameter is zero when the cycle is called (or if this parameter is omitted from the parameter list)?

If the value of the quantity parameter is zero when the cycle is called (or if this parameter is omitted from the parameter list), alarm 61103 “Number of holes is zero” is issued and the cycle is aborted.

Are there plausibility checks for defining parameters in the drilling pattern cycles?

Generally, there are no plausibility checks for defining parameters in the drilling pattern cycles.

What is the programming for Row of holes – HOLES1?

HOLES1 (SPCA, SPCO, STA1, FDIS, DBH, NUM)

What does the “SPCA” parameter stand for?

The “SPCA” parameter stands for REAL First axis of the plane (abscissa) of a reference point on the straight line (absolute).

What does the “SPCO” parameter stand for?

The “SPCO” parameter stands for REAL Second axis of the plane (ordinate) of this reference point (absolute).

What does the “STA1” parameter stand for?

The “STA1” parameter stands for REAL Angle to the first axis of the plane (abscissa).

What is the range of values for “STA1”?

The range of values is: -180<STA1≤180 degrees.

What does the “FDIS” parameter stand for?

The “FDIS” parameter stands for REAL Distance from the first hole to the reference point (enter without sign).

What does the “DBH” parameter stand for?

The “DBH” parameter stands for REAL Distance between the holes (enter without sign).

What does the “NUM” parameter stand for?

The “NUM” parameter stands for INT Number of holes.

What can this cycle be used to produce?

This cycle can be used to produce a row of holes, i.e. a number of holes arranged along a straight line, or a grid of holes.

How is the type of hole determined?

The type of hole is determined by the drilling cycle that has already been called modally.

What does the cycle calculate to avoid unnecessary travel?

To avoid unnecessary travel, the cycle calculates whether the row of holes is machined starting from the first hole or the last hole from the actual position of the plane axes and the geometry of the row of holes.

How are the drilling positions approached?

The drilling positions are then approached one after the other at rapid traverse.

What is defined as the reference point for determining the spacing between the holes?

One point along the straight line of the row of holes is defined as the reference point for determining the spacing between the holes.

What is defined from the reference point?

The distance to the first hole FDIS is defined from this point.

Where can the straight line be arranged?

The straight line can be arranged in any position in the plane.

How is the straight line specified?

It is specified both by the point defined by SPCA and SPCO and by the angle contained by the straight line and the first axis of the workpiece coordinate system that is active when the cycle is called.

Where is the angle entered?

The angle is entered under STA1 in degrees.

What is programmed with FDIS?

The distance of the first hole and the reference point defined under SPCA and SPCO is programmed with FDIS.

What does the parameter DBH contain?

The parameter DBH contains the distance between any two holes.

What is the NUM parameter used to define?

The NUM parameter is used to define the number of holes.

What do you use this program to machine?

Use this program to machine a row of holes consisting of five tapped holes arranged parallel to the Z axis of the ZX plane and which have a distance of 20 mm one to another.

Where is the starting point of the row of holes?

The starting point of the row of holes is at Z20 and X30 whereby the first hole has a distance of 10 mm from this point.

What is described by the cycle HOLES1?

The geometry of the row of holes is described by the cycle HOLES1.

What is carried out first?

First, drilling is carried out using CYCLE82.

What is performed using CYCLE84?

Then tapping is performed using CYCLE84 (tapping without compensating chuck).

What is the depth of the holes?

The holes are 80 mm in depth (difference between reference plane and final drilling depth).

What is the specification of the technological values for the machining step?

N10 G90 F30 S500 M3 T10 D1

What is the approach start position?

N20 G17 G90 X20 Z105 Y30

What is the modal call of drilling cycle?

N30 MCALL CYCLE82(105, 102, 2, 22, 0, 1)

What is the call of row-of-holes cycle?

N40 HOLES1(20, 30, 0, 10, 20, 5) ; Call of row-of-holes cycle; the cycle starts with the first hole; only the drill positions are approached in this cycle

What is deselected?

N50 MCALL ; Deselect modal call … ; Change tool

What is the approach position next to the 5th hole?

N60 G90 G0 X30 Z110 Y105

What is the modal call of the tapping cycle?

N70 MCALL CYCLE84(105, 102, 2, 22, 0, , 3, , 4.2, ,300, )

What is the call of the row of holes cycle?

N80 HOLES1(20, 30, 0, 10, 20, 5) ; Call of row of holes cycle starting with the fifth hole in the row

What is deselected?

N90 MCALL

What is the end of program?

N100 M02

What do you use this program to machine?

Use this program to machine a grid of holes consisting of five rows with five holes each, which are arranged in the XY plane, with a spacing of 10 mm between them.

Where is the starting point of the grid?

The starting point of the grid is at X30 Y20.

What does the example use as transfer parameters for the cycle?

The example uses R parameters as transfer parameters for the cycle.

What is the reference plane?

R10=102

What is the retraction plane?

R11=105

What is the safety clearance?

R12=2

What is the drilling depth?

R13=75

What is the reference point for the row of holes in the first axis of the plane?

R14=30

What is the reference point for the row of holes in the second axis of the plane?

R15=20

How do you program a circle of holes using the HOLES2 cycle?

The HOLES2 cycle is used to machine a circle of holes. The machining plane must be defined before the cycle is called. The type of hole is determined through the drilling cycle that has already been called modally.

What are the parameters for the HOLES2 cycle?

The parameters for the HOLES2 cycle are:

CPA: Center point of circle of holes (absolute), first axis of the plane
CPO: Center point of circle of holes (absolute), second axis of the plane
RAD: Radius of circle of holes (enter without sign)
STA1: Starting angle. Range of values: -180 < STA1 ≤ 180 degrees
INDA: Incrementing angle
NUM: Number of holes

What is the function of the HOLES2 cycle?

This cycle is used to machine a circle of holes. The machining plane must be defined before the cycle is called. The type of hole is determined through the drilling cycle that has already been called modally.

How does the HOLES2 cycle work?

In the cycle, the drilling positions are approached one after the other in the plane with G0.

How are the center point position and radius defined in the HOLES2 cycle?

The position of the circle of holes in the machining plane is defined via the center point (parameters CPA and CPO) and radius (parameter RAD). Only positive values are permitted for the radius.

How are the starting and incremental angles defined in the HOLES2 cycle?

These parameters define the arrangement of the holes on the circle of holes. The STA1 parameter defines the angle of rotation between the positive direction of the first axis (abscissa) in the workpiece coordinate system active before the cycle was called and the first hole. The INDA parameter contains the angle of rotation from one hole to the next.

What happens if the INDA parameter is assigned the value zero?

If the INDA parameter is assigned the value zero, the indexing angle is calculated internally from the number of holes which are positioned equally in a circle.

What does the NUM parameter define?

The NUM parameter defines the number of holes.

What is the programming example for a circle of holes?

The program uses CYCLE82 to produce four holes having a depth of 30 mm. The final drilling depth is specified as a relative value to the reference plane. The circle is defined by the center point X70 Y60 and the radius 42 mm in the XY plane. The starting angle is 33 degrees. The safety clearance in drilling axis Z is 2 mm.

What are the steps for programming a circle of holes?

Proceed through the following steps:

Select the desired operating area.
Open the vertical softkey bar for available drilling cycles.
Press this softkey from the vertical softkey bar.
Press this softkey to open the window for this cycle. Parameterize the cycle as desired.
Confirm your settings with this softkey. The cycle is then automatically transferred to the program editor as a separate block.

What are the parameters for the CYCLE802 cycle?

The parameters for the CYCLE802 cycle are:

PSYS: Internal parameter, only the default value 111111111 is possible
PSYS: Internal parameter, only the default value 111111111 is possible
X0: First position in the X axis
Y0: First position in the Y axis
X1: Second position in the X axis
Y1: Second position in the Y axis
X2: Third position in the X axis
Y2: Third position in the Y axis
X3: Fourth position in the X axis
Y3: Fourth position in the Y axis
X4: Fifth position in the X axis
Y4: Fifth position in the Y axis

What is the function of the CYCLE802 cycle?

This cycle allows you to freely program positions, i.e., rectangular or polar. Individual positions are approached in the order in which you program them.

How does the CYCLE802 cycle work?

The drilling tool in the program traverses all programmed positions in the order in which you program them. Machining of the positions always starts at the reference point. If the position pattern consists of only one position, the tool is retracted to the retraction plane after machining.

How are positions programmed in the CYCLE802 cycle?

All positions will be programmed absolutely.

What are the requirements for milling cycles?

Call and return conditions: Milling cycles are programmed independently of the particular axis name. Before you call the milling cycles, a tool compensation must be activated. The appropriate values for feedrate, spindle speed, and direction of rotation of spindle must be programmed in the part program if the appropriate parameters are not provided in the milling cycle.
Plane definition: Milling cycles generally assume that the current workpiece coordinate system has been defined by selecting a plane (G17, G18, or G19) and activating a programmable frame (if necessary). The infeed axis is always the third axis of this coordinate system.

What messages are displayed during the execution of milling cycles?

During the execution of the milling cycles, various messages that refer to the machining status are displayed on the screen. The following messages are possible:

“Elongated hole <No.>(first figure) being machined”
“Slot <No.>(other figure) being machined”
“Circumferential slot <No.>(last figure) being machined”

In each case, <No.> stands for the number of the figure that is currently being machined. These messages do not interrupt the program execution and continue to be displayed until the next message is displayed or the cycle is completed.

What are the parameters for the CYCLE71 cycle?

The parameters for the CYCLE71 cycle are:

_RTP: Retraction plane (absolute)
_RFP: Reference plane (absolute)
_SDIS: Safety clearance (to be added to the reference plane; enter without sign)
_DP: Depth (absolute)
_PA: Starting point (absolute), first axis of the plane
_PO: Starting point (absolute), second axis of the plane
_LENG: Rectangle length along the first axis, incremental. The corner from which the dimension starts results from the sign
_WID: Rectangle length along the second axis, incremental. The corner from which the dimension starts results from the sign
_STA: Angle between the longitudinal axis of the rectangle and the first axis of the plane (abscissa, enter without sign). Range of values: 0° ≤ STA < 180°
_MID: Maximum infeed depth (enter without sign)
_MIDA: Maximum infeed width during solid machining in the plane as a value (enter without sign)
_FDP: Retraction travel in the finishing direction (incremental, enter without sign)
_FALD: Finishing allowance in depth (incremental, enter without sign)
_FFP1: Feedrate for surface machining
_VARI: Machining type (enter without sign)
- UNITS DIGIT: Values: 1 roughing, 2 finishing
- TENS DIGIT: Values:
  - 1: parallel to the first axis of the plane, in one direction
  - 2: parallel to the second axis of the plane, in one direction
  - 3: parallel to the first axis of the plane, with alternating direction
  - 4: parallel to the second axis of the plane, with alternating direction
_FDP1: Overrun travel in the direction of the plane infeed (incremental, enter without sign)

What is the function of the CYCLE71 cycle?

Use CYCLE71 to mill any rectangular surface. The cycle differentiates between roughing (machining the surface in several steps until reaching the final machining allowance) and finishing (milling the end face in one step). The maximum infeed in width and depth can be specified.

How does the CYCLE71 cycle operate?

The cycle operates without cutter radius compensation. The depth infeed is performed in the open.

What is the sequence of motions in the CYCLE71 cycle?

Position reached prior to cycle start:

Starting position is any position from which the infeed point can be approached at the height of the retraction plane without collision. The cycle creates the following sequence of motions:

G0 is applied to approach the infeed point at the current position level. The reference plane, brought forward by the safety distance, is then also approached with G0 to this position. Then, also with G0, feeding to the machining plane. G0 is possible since infeed in the open is possible. There are several roughing strategies (paraxial in one direction or back and forth).
Sequence of motions when roughing: Face milling can be performed in several planes based on the programmed values _DP, _MID, and _FALD. Machining is carried out from the top downward, i.e. one plane each is removed and then the next depth infeed is carried out in the open (_FDP parameters). The traversing paths for solid machining in the plane depend on the values of the parameters _LENG, _WID, _MIDA, _FDP, _FDP1 and the cutter radius of the active tool. The first path to be milled is always traversed such that the infeed depth exactly corresponds to _MIDA, ensuring that no width infeed larger than the maximum possible width infeed occurs. The tool center point therefore does not always travel exactly on the edge (only if _MIDA = cutter radius). The dimension by which the tool traverses outside the edge is always equal to the cutter diameter – _MIDA even if only one surface cut is performed, i.e. area width + overrun is less than _MIDA. The other paths for width infeed are calculated internally so as to produce a uniform path width (<= _MIDA).
Sequence of motions when finishing: When finishing, the surface is milled in the plane once. This means that the finishing allowance when roughing has to be selected also such that the residual depth can be removed with the finishing tool in one step. After each surface milling pass in the plane, the tool will retract. The retraction travel is programmed under the parameter _FDP. Machining in one direction stops at the final machining allowance + safety distance and the next starting point is approached in rapid traverse. When roughing in one direction, the tool will retract by the calculated infeed depth + safety clearance. The depth infeed is performed at the same point as in roughing. After finishing has been completed, the tool retracts from the last position reached to the retraction plane _RTP.

What is the definition of the _DP parameter in the CYCLE71 cycle?

The depth can be specified as an absolute value (_DP) to the reference plane.

What is the definition of the _PA and _PO parameters in the CYCLE71 cycle?

Use the parameters _PA and _PO to define the starting point of the area in the axes of the plane.

What is the definition of the _LENG and _WID parameters in the CYCLE71 cycle?

Use the parameters _LENG and _WID to define the length and width of a rectangle in the plane. The position of the rectangle, with reference to _PA and _PO, results from the sign.

What is the definition of the _MIDA parameter in the CYCLE71 cycle?

Use this parameter to define the maximum infeed width when machining in a plane. Analogously to the known calculation method for the infeed depth (equal distribution of the total depth with maximum possible value), the width is distributed equally, maximally with the value programmed under _MIDA. If this parameter is not programmed or has value 0, the cycle will internally use 80% of the milling tool diameter as the maximum infeed width.

What is the definition of the _FDP parameter in the CYCLE71 cycle?

Use this parameter to define the dimension for the retraction travel in the plane. This parameter should reasonably always have a value greater than zero.

What is the definition of the _FDP1 parameter in the CYCLE71 cycle?

Use this parameter to specify an overrun travel in the direction of the plane infeed (_MIDA). Thus, it is possible to compensate for the difference between the current cutter radius and the tool nose radius (e.g. cutter radius or cutting tips arranged at an angle). The last milling cutter center point path therefore always results as _LENG (or _WID) + _FDP1 – tool radius (from the compensation table).

What is the definition of the _FALD parameter in the CYCLE71 cycle?

When roughing, a finishing allowance in the depth is taken into account which is programmed under this parameter. The residual material remained as the finishing allowance must always be specified for finishing to ensure that the tool can be retracted and then fed to the starting point of the next cut without collision. If > 0, the parameter is ignored for finishing.

What is the definition of the _VARI parameter in the CYCLE71 cycle?

Use the parameter _VARI to define the machining type. Possible values are:

Units digit: 1=roughing to finishing allowance 2=finishing
Tens digit:
- 1=parallel to the first axis of the plane; unidirectional
- 2=parallel to the second axis of the plane; unidirectional
- 3=parallel to the first axis of the plane; with alternating direction
- 4=parallel to the second axis of the plane; with alternating direction

What happens if a different value is programmed for the _VARI parameter?

If a different value is programmed for the parameter _VARI, the cycle is aborted after output of alarm 61002 “Machining type defined incorrectly”.

What is an important note about the CYCLE71 cycle?

A tool compensation must be programmed before the cycle is called. Otherwise, the cycle is aborted and alarm 61000 “No tool compensation active” is output.

What is _KNAME (name)?

The contour to be milled is programmed completely in a subroutine. _KNAME defines the name of the contour subroutine.

Defining the contour as a subroutine _KNAME = name of the subroutine
- If the subroutine already exists, specify a name, and then continue.
- If the subroutine does not yet exist, specify a name and then press the following softkey: A program with the entered name is created and the program automatically jumps to the contour editor.
- Use the following softkey to confirm your input and return to the screen form for this cycle.
Defining the contour as a section of the called program KNAME = name of the starting label: name of the end label Input:
- If the contour is not yet described, specify the name of the starting label and press the following softkey. If the contour is already described (name of starting label: name of the end label), directly press the following softkey: The control system automatically creates starting and end labels from the name entered and the program jumps to the contour editor.
- Use the following softkey to confirm your input and return to the screen form for this cycle: Examples:
  - _KNAME=“CONTOUR_1” The milling contour is the complete pro- gram CONTOUR_1.
  - _KNAME=“PIECE245:PIECE245E” The milling contour is defined as a section in the calling program, which starts from the block containing label PIECE245 to the block containing label PIECE245E.

What are _LP1, _LP2 (length, radius)?

Use the parameter _LP1 to program the approach travel or approach radius (distance from the tool external edge to the contour starting point), and the parameter _LP2 to program the retraction travel or retraction radius (distance from the tool external edge to the contour end point). Parameters _LP1 and _LP2 must be set to >0. In the case of zero, error 61116 “Approach or retraction path=0” is output. When using G40, the approach or retraction travel is the distance from the tool center point to the start or end point of the contour.

What is _VARI (machining type)?

Use the parameter _VARI to define the machining type. If a different value is programmed for the parameter _VARI, the cycle is aborted after output of alarm 61002 “Machining type defined incorrectly”.

What is _RL (bypassing the contour)?

With the parameter _RL, you program the traveling around the contour centrally, to the right or to the left with G40, G41 or G42.

What is _AS1, _AS2 (approach direction/path, retraction direction/path)?

Use the parameter _AS1 to program the specification of the approach path and _AS2 to program that of the retraction path. If _AS2 is not programmed, then the behavior of the retraction path is analogous to that of the approach path. Smooth approach of the contour along a spatial path (helix or straight line) should only be programmed if the tool is not yet being used or is suitable for this type of approach. In the case of central (G40), approach and retraction is only possible along a straight line.

What is _FF3 (retraction feedrate)?

Use the parameter _FF3 to define a retraction feedrate for intermediate positions in the plane (in the open) if the intermediate motions are to be carried out with feedrate (G01). If no feedrate value is programmed, the intermediate motions with G01 are carried out at surface feedrate. A tool compensation must be programmed before the cycle is called. Otherwise, the cycle is aborted and alarm 61000 “No tool compensation active” is output.

How do you mill around a closed contour externally using Programming example 1?

This program is used to mill the contour shown in the diagram below.

Parameters for the cycle call:

Parameter	Description	Value
_RTP	Retraction plane	250 mm
_RFP	Reference plane	200 mm
_SDIS	Safety clearance	3 mm
_DP	Infeed depth	175 mm
_MID	Maximum infeed depth	10 mm
_FAL	Finishing allowance in the plane	1 mm
_FALD	Finishing allowance in depth	1.5 mm
_FFP1	Feedrate in the plane	800 mm/min
_FFD	Feedrate depth infeed	400 mm/min
_VARI	Machining type	111 (Roughing up to finishing allowance; intermediate paths with G1, for intermediate paths retraction in Z to _RFP + _SDIS)

Parameters for approach:

Parameter	Description	Value
_RL		G41 – left of the contour, i.e. external machining 41
_LP1	Approach and retraction in a quadrant in the plane	20 mm radius
_FF3	Retraction feedrate	1000 mm/min

N10 T3 D1 ; T3: Milling cutter with radius 7

N20 S500 M3 F3000 ; Program feedrate and spindle speed

N30 G17 G0 G90 X100 Y200 Z250 G94 ; Approach start position

N40 CYCLE72(“EX72CONTOUR”, 250, 200, 3, 175, 10,1, 1.5, 800, 400, 111, 41, 2, 20, 1000, 2, 20) ; Cycle call

N50 X100 Y200

N60 M2 ; End of program EX72CONTOUR.SPF ; Subroutine for contour milling (for example)

N100 G1 G90 X150 Y160 ; Starting point of contour

N110 X230 CHF=10

N120 Y80 CHF=10

N130 X125

N140 Y135

N150 G2 X150 Y160 CR=25

N160 M2

How do you mill around a closed contour externally using Programming example 2?

With this program, the same contour is milled as in example 1. The difference is that the contour programming is now in the calling program.

N10 T3 D1 ; T3: Milling cutter with radius 7

N20 S500 M3 F3000 ; Program feedrate and spindle speed

N30 G17 G0 G90 X100 Y200 Z250 G94 ; Approach start position

N40 CYCLE72 ( “PIECE245:PIECE245E”, 250, 200, 3, 175, 10,1, 1.5, 800, 400, 11, 41, 2, 20, 1000, 2, 20) ; Cycle call

N50 X100 Y200

N60 M2

N70 PIECE245: ; Contour

N80 G1 G90 X150 Y160

N90 X230 CHF=10

N100 Y80 CHF=10

N110 X125

N120 Y135

N130 G2 X150 Y160 CR=25

N140 PIECE245E: ; End of contour

N150 M2

What are the steps in Programming example 3?

Select the desired operating area.
Open the vertical softkey bar for available milling cycles.
Press this softkey to open the window for CYCLE72. Enter a name in the first input field.
Press one of the following two softkeys .
- If you desire to edit and store the contour in a subroutine, press this softkey.
- If you desire to edit and store the contour as a section of a main program, press this softkey. Note: For more information about programming in the contour editor, see Section “Free contour programming”.
Press this softkey to return to the screen form for CYCLE72. Parameterize the cycle tech-nology data as desired.
Confirm your settings with this softkey. The cycle is then automatically transferred to the program editor. Note: The cycle program created as a section of the main program must be stored after the M30 command.
If you desire to recompile the cycle, press this softkey.

How do you program Milling a rectangular spigot – CYCLE76?

CYCLE76 (RTP, RFP, SDIS, DP, DPR, LENG, WID, CRAD, PA, PO, STA, MID, FAL, FALD, FFP1, FFD, CDIR, VARI, AP1, AP2)

What are the parameters in Milling a rectangular spigot – CYCLE76?

Parameter	Data type	Description
RTP	REAL	Retraction plane (absolute)
RFP	REAL	Reference plane (absolute)
SDIS	REAL	Safety clearance (enter without sign)
DP	REAL	Final drilling depth (absolute)
DPR	REAL	Final drilling depth relative to the reference plane (enter without sign)
LENG	REAL	Spigot length
WID	REAL	Spigot width
CRAD	REAL	Spigot corner radius (enter without sign)
PA	REAL	Reference point, first axis of plane
PO	REAL	Reference point, second axis of plane
STA	REAL	Angle between longitudinal axis and first axis of plane
MID	REAL	Maximum depth infeed (incremental; enter without sign)
FAL	REAL	Final machining allowance at the margin contour (incremental)
FALD	REAL	Finishing allowance at the base (incremental, enter without sign)
FFP1	REAL	Feedrate for surface machining
FFD	REAL	Feedrate for depth infeed
CDIR	INT	Milling direction (enter without sign) Values: 0: Down-cut milling 1: Conventional milling 2: With G2 (independent of spindle direction) 3: With G3

What are the parameters for Contour milling – CYCLE72?

Parameter	Data type	Description
_KNAME	STRING	Name of contour subroutine
_RTP	REAL	Retraction plane (absolute)
_RFP	REAL	Reference plane (absolute)
_SDIS	REAL	Safety clearance (to be added to the reference plane; enter without sign)
_DP	REAL	Depth (absolute)
_MID	REAL	Maximum infeed depth (incremental; enter without sign)
_FAL	REAL	Finishing allowance at the edge contour (enter without sign)
_FALD	REAL	Finishing allowance at the base (incremental, enter without sign)
_FFP1	REAL	Feedrate for surface machining
_FFD	REAL	Feedrate for depth infeed (enter without sign)
_VARI	INT	Machining type (enter without sign) UNITS DIGIT Values: 1: roughing, 2: finishing TENS DIGIT: Values: 0: intermediate travel with G0, 1 intermediate travel with G1 HUNDREDS DIGIT Values: 0: Retraction at the end of contour to _RTP 1: Retraction at the end of contour to _RFP + _SDIS 2: Retraction by _SDIS at the end of contour 3: No retraction at the end of contour
_RL	INT	Traveling around the contour either centrally, to the right or to the left (with G40, G41 or G42; enter without sign) Values: 40: G40 (approach and return, straight line only) 41: G41 42: G42
_AS1	INT	Specification of the approach direction/path: (enter without sign) UNITS DIGIT: Values: 1: Straight tangential line 2: Quadrant 3: Semi-circle TENS DIGIT: Values: 0: Approach to the contour in the plane 1: Approach to the contour in a spatial path
_LP1	REAL	Length of the approach travel (with straight-line) or radius of the approach arc (with circle) (enter without sign)
_FF3	REAL	Retraction feedrate and feedrate for intermediate positions in the plane (in the open)
_AS2	INT	Specification of the retraction direction/path: (enter without sign) UNITS DIGIT: Values: 1: Straight tangential line 2: Quadrant 3: Semi-circle TENS DIGIT: Values: 0: Retraction from the contour in the plane 1: Retraction from the contour in a spatial path
_LP2	REAL	Length of the retraction travel (with straight-line) or radius of the retraction arc (with circle) (enter without sign)

What is the function of CYCLE72?

Use CYCLE72 to mill along any contour defined in a subroutine. The cycle operates with or without cutter radius compensation. It is not imperative that the contour is closed. Internal or external machining is defined via the position of the cutter radius compensation (centrally, left or right to the contour). The contour must be programmed in the direction as it is to be milled and must consist of a minimum of two contour blocks (start and end point), since the contour subroutine is called directly internally in the cycle.

What are the functions of CYCLE72?

Selection of roughing (single-pass traversing parallel to contour, taking into account a finishing allowance, if necessary at several depths until the finishing allowance is reached) and finishing (single-pass traversing along the final contour if necessary at several depths)
Smooth approach to and retraction from the contour either tangentially or radially (quadrant or semi-circle)
Programmable depth infeeds
Intermediate motions either at rapid traverse rate or at feedrate

What is the sequence of CYCLE72?

Position reached prior to cycle start: Starting position is any position from which the contour starting point can be approached at the height of the retraction plane without collision.

The cycle generates the following sequence of motions when roughing: The depth infeeds are distributed equally with the maximum possible value of the specified parameters.

Traversing to the starting point for first milling with G0/G1 (and FF3). This point is calculated internally in the control system and depends on the following factors:
- Contour starting point (first point in the subroutine),
- Direction of the contour at the starting point,
- Approach mode and its parameters
- Tool radius The cutter radius compensation is activated in this block.
Depth infeed to the first or next machining depth plus programmed safety clearance with G0/G1. The first machining depth results from the following data:
- Total depth
- Finishing allowance
- The maximum possible depth infeed
Approach of the contour vertically with depth infeed _FFD and then in the plane at the programmed feedrate _FFP1 or 3D with the feedrate programmed under _FAD according to the programming for smooth approach
Milling along the contour with G40/G41/G42
Smooth retraction from the contour with G1 while continuing feed for the surface machining by the retraction amount
Retraction with G0/G1 (and feedrate for intermediate paths _FF3), depending on the programming
Retraction to the depth infeed point with G0/G1 (and _FF3).
This sequence is repeated on the next machining plane up to finishing allowance in the depth. Upon completion of roughing, the tool stands above the point (calculated internally in the control system) of retraction from the contour at the height of the retraction plane.

What is the sequence of CYCLE72 when finishing?

The cycle generates the following sequence of motions when finishing: During finishing, milling is performed at the relevant infeed along the base of the contour until the final dimension is reached. Smooth approach and retraction of the contour is carried out according to the existing parameters. The appropriate path is calculated internally in the control system. At the end of the cycle, the tool is positioned at the contour retraction point at the height of the retraction level.

What should you observe when programming the contour for CYCLE72?

No programmable offset may be selected in the subroutine prior to the first programmed position.
The first block of the contour subroutine is a straight line block containing G90/G0 or G90/G1 and defines the start of the contour.
The starting condition of the contour is the first position in the machining plane which is programmed in the contour subroutine.
The cutter radius compensation is selected/deselected by the higher-level cycle; therefore, no G40, G41, G42 is programmed in the contour subroutine.

What are the parameters in Milling a rectangle – CYCLE71?

Parameter	Description	Value
_RTP	Retraction plane	10 mm
_RFP	Reference plane	0 mm
_SDIS	Safety clearance	2 mm
_DP	Milling depth	-11 mm
_PA	Starting point of the rectangle	X = 100 mm
_PO	Starting point of the rectangle	Y = 100 mm
_LENG	Rectangle dimensions	X = +60 mm
_WID	Rectangle dimensions	Y = +40 mm
_STA	Angle of rotation in the plane	10 degrees
_MID	Maximum infeed depth	6 mm
_MIDA	Maximum infeed width	10 mm
_FDP	Retraction at the end of the milling path	5 mm
_FALD	Finishing allowance in depth	No finishing allowance
_FFP1	Feedrate in the plane	4000 mm/min
_VARI	Machining type	31 (Roughing parallel to the X axis with alternating direction)
_FDP1	Overrun on last cut as determined by the cutting edge geometry	2 mm

A milling cutter with 10 mm radius is used.

N10 T2 D2

N20 G17 G0 G90 G54 G94 F2000 X0 Y0 Z20 ; Approach start position

N30 CYCLE71(10, 0, 2, -11, 100, 100, 60, 40, 10, 6, 10, 5, 0, 4000, 31, 2) ; Cycle call

N40 G0 G90 X0 Y0

N50 M02 ; End of program

How can you machine rectangular spigots in the machining plane?

Use this cycle to machine rectangular spigots in the machining plane. For finishing, a face cutter is required. The depth infeed is always carried out in the position upstream of the semi-circle style approach to the contour.

What is the position reached prior to cycle start?

The starting point is a position in the positive range of the abscissa with the approach semi-circle and the programmed raw dimension on the abscissa end taken into account.

What is the sequence of motions when roughing (VARI=1)?

Approach/retraction from contour: The retraction plane (RTP) is approached at rapid traverse rate to then be able to position to the starting point in the machining plane at this height. The starting point is defined with reference to 0 degrees of the abscissa.
The tool is fed to the safety clearance (SDIS) at rapid traverse with subsequent traversing to the machining depth at feedrate. To approach the spigot contour, the tool travels along a semi-circular path. The milling direction can be determined either as up-cut milling or down-cut milling with reference to the spindle direction.
If the spigot is bypassed once, the contour is left along a semi-circle in the plane, and the tool is fed to the next machining depth. The contour is then reapproached along a semi-circle and the spigot traversed once. This process is repeated until the programmed spigot depth is reached. Then, the retraction plane (RTP) is approached at rapid traverse rate.
Depth infeed:
- Feeding to the safety clearance
- Insertion to machining depth The first machining depth is calculated from the total depth, finishing allowance, and the maximum possible depth infeed.

What is the sequence of motions when finishing (VARI=2)?

Depending on the set parameters FAL and FALD, finishing is either carried out at the surface contour or at the base or both together. The approach strategy corresponds to the motions in the plane as with roughing.

Where can you find an explanation of the parameters RTP, RFP, SDIS, DP, and DPR?

See Section “Drilling, centering – CYCLE81”.

Where can you find an explanation of the parameters MID, FAL, FALD, FFP1, and FFD?

See Section "Milling a rectangular pocket – POCKET3 ".

What do the parameters LENG, WID and CRAD stand for?

Spigot length, spigot width and corner radius.

What is the function of LENG, WID and CRAD?

Use the parameters LENG, WID and CRAD to define the form of a slot in the plane.

How is the spigot dimensioned?

The spigot is always dimensioned from the center. The length (LENG) always refers to the abscissa (with a plane angle of 0 degrees).

What is the function of the parameters PA, PO?

Use the parameters PA and PO to define the reference point of the spigot along the abscissa and the ordinate.

What is the spigot center point?

This is the spigot center point.

What does the parameter STA specify?

STA specifies the angle between the first axis of the plane (abscissa) and the longitudinal axis of the spigot.

What is the function of the parameter CDIR?

Use this parameter to specify the machining direction for the spigot.

How can the milling direction be programmed?

Using the CDIR parameter, the milling direction can be programmed directly with “2 for G2” and “3 for G3”, or alternatively with “synchronous milling” or “conventional milling”.

How are down-cut and up-cut milling determined in the cycle?

Down-cut and up-cut milling are determined internally in the cycle via the direction of rotation of the spindle activated prior to calling the cycle.

What is the function of the parameter VARI?

Use the parameter VARI to define the machining type.

What are the possible values for VARI?

1=roughing
2=finishing

What is the function of the parameters AP1, AP2?

When machining the spigot, it is possible to take into account blank dimensions (e.g. when machining precast parts).

How are the basic sizes for the length and width (AP1 and AP2) programmed?

The basic sizes for the length and width (AP1 and AP2) are programmed without sign and their symmetrical positions around the spigot center are computed in the cycle. The internally calculated radius of the approach semi-circle depends on this dimension.

What must be programmed before the cycle is called?

A tool compensation must be programmed before the cycle is called. Otherwise, the cycle is canceled and alarm 61009 “Active tool number=0” is output.

What is used internally in the cycle?

Internally in the cycle, a new current workpiece coordinate system is used which influences the actual value display.

Where can the zero point of this coordinate system be found?

The zero point of this coordinate system is to be found in the pocket center point.

What happens at the end of the cycle?

At the end of the cycle, the original coordinate system is active again.

What does this program do?

Use this program to machine in the XY plane a spigot that is 60 mm long, 40 mm wide and has 15 mm corner radius. The spigot has an angle of 10 degrees relative to the X axis and is premanufactured with a length allowance of 80 mm and a width allowance of 50 mm.

What do the following parameters stand for: RTP, RFP, SDIS, DP, DPR, PRAD, PA, PO, MID, FAL, FALD, FFP1, FFD, CDIR, VARI, AP1?

RTP REAL Retraction plane (absolute)
RFP REAL Reference plane (absolute)
SDIS REAL Safety clearance (enter without sign)
DP REAL Depth (absolute)
DPR REAL Depth relative to the reference plane (enter without sign)
PRAD REAL Spigot diameter (enter without sign)
PA REAL Reference point, first axis of plane
PO REAL Reference point, second axis of plane
MID REAL Maximum depth infeed (incremental; enter without sign)
FAL REAL Final machining allowance at the margin contour (incremental)
FALD REAL Finishing allowance at the base (incremental, enter without sign)
FFP1 REAL Feedrate for surface machining
FFD REAL Feedrate for depth infeed (or spatial infeed)
CDIR INT Milling direction (enter without sign)

Values:
- 0: Down-cut milling
- 1: Conventional milling
- 2: With G2 (independent of spindle direction)
- 3: With G3
VARI INT Machining type

Values:
- 1: Roughing to final machining allowance
- 2: Finishing (allowance X/Y/Z=0)
AP1 REAL Diameter of blank spigot

How can you machine circular spigots in the machining plane?

Use this cycle to machine circular spigots in the machining plane. For finishing, a face cutter is required. The depth infeed is always performed in the position before the semi-circular approach to the contour.

What is the position reached prior to cycle start?

The starting point is a position in the positive range of the abscissa with the approach semi-circle and the programmed raw dimension taken into account.

What is the sequence of motions when roughing (VARI=1)?

Approach/retraction from contour: The retraction plane (RTP) is approached at rapid traverse rate to then be able to position at this height to the starting point in the machining plane. The starting point is defined with reference to 0 degrees of the axis of the abscissa.
The tool is fed to the safety clearance (SDIS) at rapid traverse with subsequent traversing to the machining depth at feedrate. To approach the spigot contour, the tool is approached along a semi-circular path using the programmed blank spigot. The milling direction can be determined either as up-cut milling or down-cut milling with reference to the spindle direction.
If the spigot is bypassed once, the contour is left along a semi-circle in the plane, and the tool is fed to the next machining depth. The contour is then reapproached along a semi-circle and the spigot traversed once. This process is repeated until the programmed spigot depth is reached. Then, the retraction plane (RTP) is approached at rapid traverse rate.
Depth infeed:
- Feeding to the safety clearance
- Insertion to machining depth The first machining depth is calculated from the total depth, finishing allowance, and the maximum possible depth infeed.

What is the sequence of motions when finishing (VARI=2)?

According to the set parameters FAL and FALD, either finishing is carried out at the surface contour or at the base or both together. The approach strategy corresponds to the motions in the plane as with roughing.

Where can you find an explanation of the parameters RTP, RFP, SDIS, DP, and DPR?

See Section “Drilling, centering – CYCLE81”.

Where can you find an explanation of the parameters MID, FAL, FALD, FFP1, and FFD?

See Section "Milling a rectangular pocket – POCKET3 ".

How should you enter the diameter of the spigot (PRAD)?

Enter the diameter without sign.

What is the function of the parameters PA, PO?

Use the parameters PA and PO to define the reference point of the spigot.

What is the function of the parameter CDIR?

Use this parameter to specify the machining direction for the spigot.

How can the milling direction be programmed?

Using the parameter CDIR, the milling direction can be programmed directly with “2 for G2” and “3 for G3”, or alternatively with “synchronous milling” or “conventional milling”.

How are down-cut and up-cut milling determined in the cycle?

Down-cut and up-cut milling are determined internally in the cycle via the direction of rotation of the spindle activated prior to calling the cycle.

What is the function of the parameter VARI?

Use the parameter VARI to define the machining type.

What are the possible values for VARI?

1=roughing
2=finishing

What is the function of the parameter AP1?

Use this parameter to define the blank dimension of the spigot (without sign). The internally calculated radius of the approach semi-circle depends on this dimension.

What must be programmed before the cycle is called?

A tool compensation must be programmed before the cycle is called. Otherwise, the cycle is canceled and alarm 61009 “Active tool number=0” is output.

What is used internally in the cycle?

Internally in the cycle, a new current workpiece coordinate system is used which influences the actual value display.

Where can the zero point of this coordinate system be found?

The zero point of this coordinate system is to be found in the pocket center point.

What happens at the end of the cycle?

At the end of the cycle, the original coordinate system is active again.

What does this program do?

Machining a spigot from a blank with a diameter of 55 mm and a maximum infeed of 10 mm per cut; specification of a final machining allowance for subsequent finishing of the spigot surface. The whole machining is performed with reverse rotation.

What do the following parameters stand for: RTP, RFP, SDIS, DP, DPR, NUM, LENG, CPA, CPO, RAD, STA1, INDA, FFD, FFP1, MID?

RTP REAL Retraction plane (absolute)
RFP REAL Reference plane (absolute)
SDIS REAL Safety clearance (enter without sign)
DP REAL Slot depth (absolute)
DPR REAL Slot depth relative to the reference plane (enter without sign)
NUM INT Number of slots
LENG REAL Slot length (enter without sign)
CPA REAL Center point of circle (absolute), first axis of the plane
CPO REAL Center point of circle (absolute), second axis of the plane
RAD REAL Radius of the circle (enter without sign)
STA1 REAL Starting angle
INDA REAL Incrementing angle
FFD REAL Feedrate for depth infeed
FFP1 REAL Feedrate for surface machining
MID REAL Maximum infeed depth for one infeed (enter without sign)

What does this cycle require?

The cycle requires a milling cutter with an “end tooth cutting across center” (DIN844).

What is the function of this cycle?

Use this cycle to machine long holes located on a circle. The longitudinal axis of the long holes is aligned radially.

How is the width of the long hole determined?

In contrast to the slot, the width of the long hole is determined by the tool diameter.

What happens internally in the cycle?

Internally in the cycle, an optimum traversing path of the tool is determined, ruling out unnecessary idle passes. If several depth infeeds are required to machine a slot, the infeed is carried out alternately at the end points. The path to be traversed along the longitudinal axis of the long hole changes its direction after each infeed. The cycle searches for the shortest path when changing to the next long hole.

What is the position reached prior to cycle start?

The starting position is any position from which each of the long holes can be approached without collision.

What sequence of motions does the cycle create?

Using G0, the starting position for the cycle is approached. In both axes of the current plane, the next end point of the first slot to be machined is approached at the height of the retraction plane in this applicate, and then the applicate is lowered to the reference plane brought forward by the safety clearance.
Each long hole is milled in a reciprocating motion. The machining in the plane is performed using G1 and the feedrate programmed under FFP1. The infeed to the next machining depth calculated using G1 internally in the cycle and using feedrate is performed at each reversal point until the final depth is reached.
Retraction to the retraction plane using G0 and approach to the next long hole on the shortest path.
After the last long hole has been machined, the tool is moved with G0 to the position in the machining plane, which was reached last and which is specified in the diagram below, and the cycle is ended.

Where can you find an explanation of the parameters RTP, RFP, and SDIS?

See Section “Drilling, centering – CYCLE81”.

How can the depth of the long hole be specified?

The depth of the long hole can be specified either absolute (DP) or relative (DPR) to the reference plane.

What happens with relative specification?

With relative specification, the cycle calculates the resulting depth automatically using the positions of reference and retraction planes.

What is the function of the parameter NUM?

Use the parameter NUM to specify the number of long holes.

Where is the length of the long hole programmed?

The length of the long hole is programmed under LENG.

What happens if this length is smaller than the milling diameter?

If it is detected in the cycle that this length is smaller than the milling diameter, the cycle is aborted with alarm 61105 “Milling radius is too large”.

What is the function of the parameter MID?

Use this parameter to define the maximum infeed depth.

How is the depth infeed performed by the cycle?

The depth infeed is performed by the cycle in equally-sized infeed steps.

How does the cycle automatically calculate the infeed?

Using MID and the total depth, the cycle automatically calculates this infeed which lies between 0.5 x maximum infeed depth and the maximum infeed depth. The minimum possible number of infeed steps is used as the basis. MID=0 means that the cut to pocket depth is made with one feed.

From where does the depth infeed start?

The depth infeed starts from the reference plane brought forward by the safety clearance (depending on _ZSD).

What is the function of the feedrates FFD and FFP1?

The feedrate FFP1 is active for all movements in the plane traversed at feedrate. FFD acts for infeeds vertically to this plane.

How do you define the position of the circle in the machining plane?

You define the position of the circle in the machining plane by the center point (CPA, CPO) and the radius (RAD). Only positive values are permitted for the radius.

What do the parameters STA1 and INDA define?

The arrangement of the long holes on the circle is defined by these parameters.

How is the indexing angle calculated?

If INDA=0, the indexing angle is calculated from the number of long holes, so that they are equally distributed around the circle.

What must be programmed before the cycle is called?

A tool compensation must be programmed before the cycle is called. Otherwise, the cycle is aborted and alarm 61000 “No tool compensation active” is output.

What happens if mutual contour violations of the slots result from incorrect values of the parameters that determine the arrangement and the size of the slots?

If mutual contour violations of the slots result from incorrect values of the parameters that determine the arrangement and the size of the slots, the cycle will not start the machining. The cycle is aborted and the error message 61104 “Contour violation of slots/elongated holes” is output.

What happens during the cycle?

During the cycle, the workpiece coordinate system is rotated and offset . The values in the workpiece coordinate system are shown on the actual value display such that the longitudinal axis of the long hole being machined is positioned on the first axis of the current machining plane.

What happens after the cycle has been completed?

After the cycle has been completed, the workpiece coordinate system is in the same position again as it was before the cycle was called.

What can you machine with this program?

By using this program, you can machine four slots of the length 30 mm and the relative depth 23 mm (difference between the reference plane and the slot root), which are arranged on a circle with the center point Y40 Z45 and the radius 20 mm in the YZ plane. The starting angle is 45 degrees, the incremental angle is 90 degrees. The maximum infeed depth is 6 mm, the safety clearance 1 mm.

What is the function of the SLOT1 cycle?

The SLOT1 cycle is a combined roughing-finishing cycle used to machine slots arranged on a circle, with the longitudinal axis of the slots aligned radially. In contrast to the long hole, a value is defined for the slot width.

What are the steps of the SLOT1 cycle?

The starting position can be any position from which each of the slots can be approached without collision. The cycle creates the following sequence of motions:

Approach of the position at the beginning of the cycle indicated in the SLOT1 sequence illustration with G0.
Complete machining of a slot is carried out in the following steps:
- Approach of the reference plane brought forward by the safety clearance by using G0.
- Infeed to the next machining depth with G1 and with feedrate value FFD.
- Solid machining of the slot to the finishing allowance at the slot edge with feedrate value FFP1. Then finishing with feedrate value FFP2 and spindle speed SSF along the contour according to the machining direction programmed under CDIR.
- The depth infeed is always carried out at the same position in the machining plane until the end depth of the slot is reached.
Retract tool to the retraction plane and move to the next slot with G0.
After the last slot has been machined, the tool is moved with G0 to the end position in the machining plane, which is specified in the diagram below, and the cycle is ended.

How can the slot depth be specified?

The slot depth can be specified either absolute (DP) or relative (DPR) to the reference plane. With relative specification, the cycle calculates the resulting depth automatically using the positions of the reference and retraction planes.

What does the NUM parameter specify?

The NUM parameter specifies the number of slots.

What is the purpose of the LENG and WID parameters?

The LENG and WID parameters define the form of a slot in the plane.

What are the restrictions on the milling cutter diameter?

The milling cutter diameter must be smaller than the slot width. Otherwise, alarm 61105 “Cutter radius too large” will be activated, and the cycle aborted. The milling cutter diameter must not be smaller than half of the groove width. This is not checked.

How is the position of the circle in the machining plane defined?

The position of the circle in the machining plane is defined by the center point (CPA, CPO), and the radius (RAD). Only positive values are permitted for the radius.

How is the arrangement of the slot on the circle defined?

The arrangement of the slot on the circle is defined by the STA1 and INDA parameters. STA1 defines the angle between the positive direction of the first axis (abscissa) of the workpiece coordinate system active before the cycle was called and the first groove. Parameter INDA contains the angle from one slot to the next. If INDA=0, the incrementing angle is calculated from the number of slots so that they are arranged equally around the circle.

What are the FFD and FFP1 feedrates used for?

The feedrate FFD is active for all infeed movements perpendicular to the machining plane. The feedrate FFP1 is active for all movements in the plane traversed at feedrate when roughing.

What is the purpose of the MID parameter?

The MID parameter defines the maximum infeed depth. The depth infeed is performed by the cycle in equally-sized infeed steps. Using MID and the total depth, the cycle automatically calculates this infeed which lies between 0.5 x maximum infeed depth and the maximum infeed depth. The minimum possible number of infeed steps is used as the basis. MID=0 means that the cut to slot depth is made with one feed. The depth infeed commences at the reference plane moved forward by the safety clearance.

How is the machining direction for the groove specified?

The CDIR parameter specifies the machining direction for the groove. Possible values are:

“2” for G2
“3” for G3

If the parameter is set to an illegal value, the message “Wrong milling direction, G3 will be generated” will be displayed in the message line. In this case, the cycle is continued and G3 is automatically generated.

What is the purpose of the FAL parameter?

The FAL parameter programs a finishing allowance at the slot edge. FAL does not influence the depth infeed. If the value of FAL is greater than allowed for the specified width and the milling cutter used, FAL is automatically reduced to the maximum possible value. In the case of roughing, milling is performed with a reciprocating movement and depth infeed at both end points of the slot.

What are the possible values for the VARI parameter, and what do they mean?

The VARI parameter defines the machining type. Possible values are:

0=complete machining in two parts
- Solid machining of the slot (SLOT1, SLOT2) to the finishing allowance is performed at the spindle speed programmed before the cycle was called and with feedrate FFP1. Depth infeed is defined with MID.
- Solid machining of the remaining finishing allowance is carried out at the spindle speed defined via SSF and the feedrate FFP2. Depth infeed is defined with MIDF. If MIDF=0, the infeed is performed right to the final depth.
- If FFP2 is not programmed, feedrate FFP1 is active. This also applies analogously if SSF is not specified, i.e. the speed programmed prior to the cycle call will apply.
1=Roughing. The groove (SLOT1, SLOT2) is solid-machined up to the finishing allowance at the speed programmed before the cycle call and at the feedrate FFP1. The depth infeed is programmed via MID.
2=Finishing. The cycle requires that the slot (SLOT1, SLOT2) is already machined to a residual finishing allowance and that it is only necessary to machine the final finishing allowance. If FFP2 and SSF are not programmed, the feedrate FFP1 or the speed programmed before the cycle call is active. Depth infeed is defined with MIDF.

If a different value is programmed for the parameter VARI, the cycle is aborted after output of alarm 61102 “Machining type defined incorrectly”.

What is the function of the FALD parameter?

When roughing, a separate finishing allowance is taken into account at the base.

What does the DP1 parameter define?

The DP1 parameter defines the infeed depth when inserting to the helical path.

What does the STA2 parameter define?

The STA2 parameter defines the radius of the helical path (relative to the tool center point path) or the maximum insertion angle for the reciprocating motion.

How does vertical insertion work?

The vertical depth infeed always takes place at the same position in the machining plane as long as the slot is reached by the end depth.

How does insertion oscillation on the center axis of the slot work?

It means that the milling center point on a straight line oscillating back and forth is inserted at an angle until it has reached the nearest current depth. The maximum insertion angle is programmed under STA2, and the length of the oscillation path is calculated from LENG-WID. The oscillating depth infeed ends at the same point as with vertical depth infeed motions; the starting point in the plane is calculated accordingly. The roughing operation begins in the plane once the current depth is reached. The feedrate is programmed under FFD.

What are the prerequisites for the cycle to start?

A tool compensation must be programmed before the cycle is called. Otherwise, the cycle is aborted, and alarm 61000 “No tool compensation active” is output. If incorrect values are assigned to the parameters that determine the arrangement and size of the slots and thus cause mutual contour violation of the slots, the cycle is not started. The cycle is aborted, and the error message 61104 “Contour violation of slots/elongated holes” is output.

How does the workpiece coordinate system behave during the cycle?

During the cycle, the workpiece coordinate system is rotated and offset. The values in the workpiece coordinate system displayed on the actual value display are such that the longitudinal axis of the slot that has just been machined corresponds to the first axis of the current machining plane. After the cycle has been completed, the workpiece coordinate system is in the same position again as it was before the cycle was called.

What is the purpose of the SLOT2 cycle?

The SLOT2 cycle is a combined roughing-finishing cycle used to machine circumferential slots arranged on a circle.

What is the sequence of motions in the SLOT2 cycle?

The starting position can be any position from which each of the slots can be approached without collision. The cycle creates the following sequence of motions:

G0 is used to approach the position specified in the diagram below at cycle start.
The steps when machining a circumferential slot are the same as when machining an elongated hole.
After a circumferential slot is machined completely, the tool is retracted to the retraction plane, and the next slot is machined with G0.
After the last slot has been machined, the tool is moved with G0 to the end position in the machining plane, which is specified in the diagram below, and the cycle is ended.

What does the FFCP parameter program?

The FFCP parameter programs a special feedrate for intermediate positioning on a circular path.

How does the workpiece coordinate system behave during the SLOT2 cycle?

During the cycle, the workpiece coordinate system is rotated and offset. The actual value display in the workpiece coordinate system is always shown such that the circumferential slot currently being machined starts on the first axis of the current processing level and the zero point of the workpiece coordinate system is in the center of the circle. After the cycle has been completed, the workpiece coordinate system is in the same position again as it was before the cycle was called.

What are the steps to program the SLOT2 cycle using softkeys?

Select the desired operating area.
Open the vertical softkey bar for available milling cycles.
Press the Mill softkey from the vertical softkey bar.
Press the Slots softkey to open the window for SLOT2. Parameterize the cycle as desired.
Confirm your settings with the OK softkey. The cycle is then automatically transferred to the program editor.

What is the function of CYCLE82?

The cycle can be used for machining rectangular and circular (slot-shaped) recesses in the machining plane. For finishing, a face cutter is required. The depth infeed always starts at the pocket center point and is performed vertically from there; thus, it is practical to pre-drill at this position.

The milling direction can be determined either by using a G command (G2/G3) or from the spindle direction as synchronous or up-cut milling.
For solid machining, the maximum infeed width in the plane can be programmed.
Finishing allowance is also for the pocket base.
There are two different insertion strategies: – vertically to the pocket center – along a helical path around the pocket center
Shorter approach paths in the plane for finishing
Consideration of a blank contour in the plane and a blank dimension at the base (optimum machining of preformed pockets is possible)

What is the sequence of motions when roughing with CYCLE82?

With G0, the pocket center point is approached at the retraction level, and then, from this position, with G0, too, the reference plane brought forward by the safety clearance is approached. The machining of the pocket is then carried out according to the selected insertion strategy, taking into account the programmed blank dimensions.

What is the sequence of motions when finishing with CYCLE82?

Finishing is performed in the order from the edge until the finishing allowance on the base is reached, and then the base is finished. If one of the finishing allowances is equal to zero, this part of the finishing process is skipped.

Finishing on the edge: While finishing on the edge, the tool traverses around the pocket contour only once. For finishing on the edge, the path includes one quadrant reaching the corner radius. The radius of this path is normally 2 mm, or, if “less space” is provided, equals the difference between the corner radius and the mill radius. If the final machining allowance on the edge is larger than 2 mm, the approach radius is increased accordingly. The depth infeed is performed with G0 in the open towards the pocket center, and the starting point of the approach path is also reached with G0.
Finishing on the base: During finishing on the base, the machine performs G0 towards the pocket center until reaching a distance equal to pocket depth + finishing allowance + safety clearance. From this point onward, the tool is always fed in vertically at the depth (since a tool with a front cutting edge is used for base finishing). The base surface of the pocket is machined once.

What are the insertion strategies for CYCLE82?

Inserting vertically to the pocket center means that the current infeed depth, calculated internally in the cycle (≤ maximum infeed depth programmed under _MID), is executed in a block containing G0 or G1.
Insertion along a helical path means that the cutter center point traverses along the helical path determined by the radius _RAD1 and the depth per revolution _DP1. The feed rate is also programmed under _FFD. The direction of rotation of this helical path corresponds to the direction of rotation with which the pocket will be machined. The insertion depth programmed under _DP1 is taken into account as the maximum depth and is always calculated as an integer number of revolutions of the helical path. If the current depth required for an infeed (this can be several revolutions on the helical path) is reached, a full circle is still executed to eliminate the inclined path of insertion. Pocket solid machining then starts in this plane and continues until it reaches the final machining allowance. The starting point of the described helical path is at the longitudinal axis of the pocket in “plus direction” and is approached with G1.

How is the blank dimension taken into account in CYCLE82?

During solid machining of the pockets, it is possible to take into account blank dimensions (e.g., when machining precast parts). The basic sizes for the length and width (_AP1 and _AP2) are programmed without a sign, and their symmetrical positions around the pocket center point are computed in the cycle. You define the part of the pocket that is no longer to be machined by solid machining. The blank dimension for the depth (_AD) is also programmed without a sign and taken into account by the reference plane in the direction of the pocket depth. The depth infeed when taking into account blank dimensions is carried out according to the programmed type (helical path, reciprocating, vertically). If the cycle detects that there is enough space in the pocket center because of the given blank contour and the radius of the active tool, the infeed is carried out vertically to the pocket center point as long as it is possible to avoid traversing extensive insertion paths in the open. Solid machining of the pocket is carried out starting from the top downwards.

How is the milling direction specified in CYCLE82?

Using the parameter _CDIR, the milling direction can be programmed directly with “2 for G2” and “3 for G3”, or alternatively with “synchronous milling” or “conventional milling.” Synchronized operation or reverse rotation are determined internally in the cycle via the direction of rotation of the spindle activated prior to calling the cycle.

Down-cut milling	Up-cut milling
M3 → G3	M3 → G2
M4 → G2	M4 → G3

How is the machining type defined in CYCLE82?

Use the parameter VARI to define the machining type. Possible values are:

Units digit:

1 = roughing
2 = finishing

Tens digit (infeed):

0 = vertically to pocket center with G0
1 = vertically to pocket center with G1
2 = along a helical path

If a different value is programmed for the parameter _VARI, the cycle is aborted after the output of alarm 61002 “Machining type defined incorrectly.”

What happens if a tool compensation is not programmed before CYCLE82 is called?

A tool compensation must be programmed before the cycle is called. Otherwise, the cycle is aborted, and alarm 61000 “No tool compensation active” is output.

How does the new current workpiece coordinate system influence the actual value display in CYCLE82?

Internally in the cycle, a new current workpiece coordinate system is used, which influences the actual value display. The zero point of this coordinate system is found in the pocket center point. At the end of the cycle, the original coordinate system is active again.

What is the function of CYCLE83?

The milling direction can be determined either by using a G command (G2/G3) or from the spindle direction as synchronous or up-cut milling.
For solid machining, the maximum infeed width in the plane can be programmed.
Finishing allowance is also for the pocket base.
There are three different insertion strategies: – vertically to the pocket center – along a helical path around the pocket center – oscillating at the pocket central axis
Shorter approach paths in the plane for finishing
Consideration of a blank contour in the plane and a blank dimension at the base (optimum machining of preformed pockets possible).

What is the sequence for CYCLE83?

Position reached prior to cycle start:

The starting position is any position from which the pocket center point can be approached at the height of the retraction plane without collision.

Sequence of motions when roughing:

Sequence of motions when finishing:

Finishing on the edge: While finishing on the edge, the tool traverses around the pocket contour only once. For finishing on the edge, the path includes one quadrant reaching the corner radius. The radius of this path is normally 2 mm, or, if “less space” is provided, equals the difference between the corner radius and the mill radius. If the final machining allowance on the edge is larger than 2 mm, the approach radius is increased accordingly. The depth infeed is performed with G0 in the open towards the pocket center, and the starting point of the approach path is also reached with G0.
Finishing on the base: During finishing on the base, the machine performs G0 towards the pocket center until reaching a distance equal to pocket depth + finishing allowance + safety clearance. From this point onward, the tool is always fed in vertically at the depth (since a tool with a front cutting edge is used for base finishing). The base surface of the pocket is machined once.

What are the insertion strategies for CYCLE83?

Inserting vertically to the pocket center means that the current infeed depth, calculated internally in the cycle (≤ maximum infeed depth programmed under _MID), is executed in a block containing G0 or G1.
Insertion along a helical path means that the cutter center point traverses along the helical path determined by the radius _RAD1 and the depth per revolution _DP1. The feed rate is also programmed under _FFD. The direction of rotation of this helical path corresponds to the direction of rotation with which the pocket will be machined. The insertion depth programmed under _DP1 is taken into account as the maximum depth and is always calculated as an integer number of revolutions of the helical path. If the current depth required for an infeed (this can be several revolutions on the helical path) is reached, a full circle is still executed to eliminate the inclined path of insertion. Pocket solid machining then starts in this plane and continues until it reaches the final machining allowance. The starting point of the described helical path is at the longitudinal axis of the pocket in “plus direction” and is approached with G1.
Insertion with oscillation to the central axis of the pocket means that the cutter center point is inserted oscillating on a straight line until it reaches the next current depth. The maximum immersion angle is programmed under _RAD1, and the length of the oscillation travel is calculated in the cycle. If the current depth is reached, the travel is executed once more without depth infeed to eliminate the inclined insertion path. The feed rate is programmed under _FFD.

How is the blank dimension taken into account in CYCLE83?

If the milling tool radius is larger than half of the length or width of the pocket, what will happen with CYCLE83?

If the milling tool radius is larger than half of the length or width of the pocket, the cycle will be aborted, and alarm 61105 “Cutter radius too large” is output.

What does _STA indicate in CYCLE83?

_STA indicates the angle between the first axis of the plane (abscissa) and the longitudinal axis of the pocket.

What does _MID define in CYCLE83?

Use this parameter to define the maximum infeed depth when roughing. The depth infeed is performed by the cycle in equally sized infeed steps. By using _MID and the entire depth, the cycle calculates this infeed automatically. The minimum possible number of infeed steps is used as the basis. _MID = 0 means that the cut to pocket depth is made with one feed.

What does the finishing allowance affect in CYCLE83?

The finishing allowance only affects the machining of the pocket in the plane on the edge. If the final machining allowance ≥ tool diameter, the pocket will not necessarily be machined completely. The message “Caution: final machining allowance ≥ tool diameter” appears; the cycle, however, is continued.

When roughing, what is taken into account at the base in CYCLE83?

When roughing, a separate finishing allowance is taken into account at the base.

What feedrates are effective in CYCLE83 and when are they active?

The feedrate _FFD is effective when inserting into the material. The feedrate _FFP1 is active for all movements in the plane traversed at feedrate when machining.

How is the machining direction specified in CYCLE83?

Using the parameter _CDIR, the milling direction can be programmed directly with “2 for G2” and “3 for G3,” or alternatively with “synchronous milling” or “conventional milling.” Synchronized operation or reverse rotation are determined internally in the cycle via the direction of rotation of the spindle activated prior to calling the cycle.

Down-cut milling	Up-cut milling
M3 → G3	M3 → G2
M4 → G2	M4 → G3

How is the machining type defined in CYCLE83?

Use the parameter VARI to define the machining type. Possible values are:

Units digit:

1 = roughing
2 = finishing

Tens digit (infeed):

0 = vertically to pocket center with G0
1 = vertically to pocket center with G1
2 = along a helical path
3 = oscillating to pocket length axis

If a different value is programmed for the parameter _VARI, the cycle is aborted after the output of alarm 61002 “Machining type defined incorrectly.”

How is the maximum infeed width defined when solid machining in a plane in CYCLE83?

Use this parameter to define the maximum infeed width when solid machining in a plane. Analogously to the known calculation method for the infeed depth (equal distribution of the total depth with the maximum possible value), the width is distributed equally, maximally with the value programmed under _MIDA. If this parameter is not programmed or has value 0, the cycle will internally use 80% of the milling tool diameter as the maximum infeed width.

Note: Applies if the calculated width infeed from edge machining is recalculated when reaching the full pocket in the depth; otherwise, the width infeed calculated at the beginning is kept for the whole cycle.

How are the blank dimensions defined in CYCLE83?

Use the parameters _AP1, _AP2, and _AD to define the blank dimensions (incremental) of the pocket in the plane and in the depth.

What do the parameters _RAD1 and _DP1 define in CYCLE83?

Use the _RAD1 parameter to define the radius of the helical path (relative to the tool center point path) or the maximum insertion angle for the reciprocating motion. Use the parameter _DP1 to define the infeed depth when inserting to the helical path.

What happens if a tool compensation is not programmed before CYCLE83 is called?

A tool compensation must be programmed before the cycle is called. Otherwise, the cycle is aborted, and alarm 61000 “No tool compensation active” is output.

How does the new current workpiece coordinate system influence the actual value display in CYCLE83?

What is the function of CYCLE84?

Use this cycle to machine circular pockets in the machining plane. For finishing, a face cutter is required. The depth infeed always starts at the pocket center point and is performed vertically from there; thus, it is practical to pre-drill at this position.

The milling direction can be determined either using a G command (G2/G3) or from the spindle direction as synchronous or up-cut milling.
For solid machining, the maximum infeed width in the plane can be programmed.
Finishing allowance is also for the pocket base.
Two different insertion strategies: – vertically to the pocket center – along a helical path around the pocket center
Shorter approach paths in the plane for finishing
Consideration of a blank contour in the plane and a blank dimension at the base (optimum machining of preformed pockets possible)
_MIDA is recalculated during edge machining.

What is the sequence for CYCLE84?

Position reached prior to cycle start:

Starting position is any position from which the pocket center point can be approached at the height of the retraction plane without collision.

Motion sequence when roughing (_VARI=X1):

Sequence of motions when finishing:

Finishing on the edge: While finishing on the edge, the tool traverses around the pocket contour only once. For finishing on the edge, the path includes one quadrant reaching the pocket radius. The radius of this path is 2 mm as the maximum or, if “less space” is provided, equals the difference between the pocket radius and the milling radius. The depth infeed is performed with G0 in the open towards the pocket center, and the starting point of the approach path is also reached with G0.
Finishing on the base: During finishing on the base, the machine performs G0 towards the pocket center until reaching a distance equal to pocket depth + finishing allowance + safety clearance. From this point onward, the tool is always fed in vertically at the depth (since a tool with a front cutting edge is used for base finishing). The base surface of the pocket is machined once.

What happens if the pocket radius is smaller than the tool radius of the active tool in CYCLE84?

If the pocket radius is smaller than the tool radius of the active tool, the cycle is aborted, and alarm 61105 “Cutter radius too large” is output.

How are circular pockets dimensioned in CYCLE84?

Circular pockets are always dimensioned across the center.

How is the machining type defined in CYCLE84?

Use the parameter _VARI to define the machining type. Possible values are:

Units digit:

1 = roughing
2 = finishing

Tens digit (infeed):

0 = vertically to pocket center with G0
1 = vertically to pocket center with G1
2 = along a helical path

If a different value is programmed for the parameter _VARI, the cycle is aborted after the output of alarm 61002 “Machining type defined incorrectly.”

What happens if a tool compensation is not programmed before CYCLE84 is called?

A tool compensation must be programmed before the cycle is called. Otherwise, the cycle is aborted, and alarm 61000 “No tool compensation active” is output.

How does the new current workpiece coordinate system influence the actual value display in CYCLE84?

What is the function of CYCLE90?

By using the cycle CYCLE90, you can produce internal or external threads. The path when milling threads is based on a helix interpolation. All three geometry axes of the current plane, which you define before calling the cycle, are involved in this motion.

What is the sequence for CYCLE90?

Position reached prior to cycle start:

The starting position is any position from which the starting position at the outside diameter of the thread at the height of the retraction plane can be reached without collision.

What is the function of CYCLE800?

You can use this cycle to machine rectangular pockets or slots in any plane. The machining is carried out using a tool that is smaller than the pocket width. For finishing, a face cutter is required. The depth infeed is always performed vertically from the current position of the tool in the plane.

What are the machining possibilities with CYCLE800?

The following machining possibilities are available:

Definition of a finishing allowance for the sides and base of the pocket
Two different insertion strategies: – vertically to the current tool position – along a helical path
Three different machining types: – roughing – prefinishing – finishing
Machining with or without overlap (island machining)
Specification of the milling direction via spindle direction or G functions G2/G3.

What is the sequence for CYCLE800?

Position reached prior to cycle start:

Any position can be defined as the starting position as long as the following conditions are met:

The tool is positioned at the retraction plane above the workpiece.
From this position, it is possible to approach the first plunging position in the plane at the reference plane without collision.

Sequence of motions when roughing and prefinishing:

The pocket is machined in a plane from the top downwards. The machining starts at the position defined by _CPA and _CPO. The starting point for the depth infeed is defined by the position of the tool in the plane.

What are the insertion strategies for CYCLE800?

Vertical insertion to the current tool position: The current infeed depth, calculated internally in the cycle (≤ programmed maximum infeed depth _MID), is executed with G01 or G0.
Helical insertion: The cutter center point moves along a helical path, the radius of which is determined by the parameter _RAD1, and the depth per revolution is determined by _DP1. The feed rate for this motion is defined by the parameter _FFD. If the current depth required for the infeed is reached, a full circle is still executed to ensure a planar machining surface. Pocket machining starts at this plane. The starting point of the helical path is defined in the cycle in the “plus direction” of the longitudinal axis of the pocket and is approached with G1.

How is the milling direction programmed in CYCLE800?

You can program the milling direction directly with “2 for G2” or “3 for G3,” or alternatively you can select synchronous or conventional milling. Depending on the set spindle direction (M3/M4), synchronous or conventional milling is calculated internally by the cycle.

Down-cut milling	Up-cut milling
M3 → G3	M3 → G2
M4 → G2	M4 → G3

How are the machining parameters for roughing, prefinishing, and finishing set with CYCLE800?

Use the parameter _VARI to set the machining parameters (infeed type and overlap) for roughing, prefinishing, and finishing. The value of this parameter is made up of three digits: HUNDREDS DIGIT: Defines the machining parameters for finishing. TENS DIGIT: Defines the machining parameters for prefinishing. UNITS DIGIT: Defines the machining parameters for roughing. For all three machining types, the UNITS DIGIT and TENS DIGIT indicate the type of infeed. The HUNDREDS DIGIT can also be used to program the overlap factor for finishing.

Infeed type	Tens digit/units digit
with G0	0
with G1	1
along a helix	2
Overlap	Hundreds digit
without overlap	0
with overlap	1

What happens if a value other than 0, 1, or 2 is programmed for the tens digit or units digit in CYCLE800?

If you program a value other than 0, 1, or 2 for the tens digit or units digit, then the cycle is aborted, and alarm 61002 “Machining type defined incorrectly” is output. If the value programmed for the hundreds digit is not 0 or 1, then the cycle is aborted, and alarm 61026 “Overlap for finishing programmed incorrectly” is output.

What does _MIDA define in CYCLE800?

The parameter _MIDA defines the maximum infeed width in the plane for solid machining. If this parameter is not programmed or has value 0, then the cycle uses 80% of the milling tool diameter as the maximum infeed width. Analogously to the known method for calculating the infeed depth, the infeed width is equally distributed, and the maximum value is defined by _MIDA.

What do the parameters _AP1 and _AD define in CYCLE800?

The parameters _AP1 and _AD are used to define the blank dimensions (incremental) in the plane and depth. _AP1 is referenced to the machining plane and _AD to the reference plane.

What do the parameters _RAD1 and _DP1 define in CYCLE800?

The parameter _RAD1 defines the radius of the helical path or the maximum insertion angle. The parameter _DP1 defines the insertion depth for each 360° revolution on insertion along a helical path.

What happens if a tool compensation is not programmed before CYCLE800 is called?

A tool compensation must be programmed before the cycle is called. Otherwise, the cycle is aborted, and alarm 61000 “No tool compensation active” is output.

What happens internally in the cycle to the actual value display in CYCLE800?

Internally in the cycle, a new current workpiece coordinate system is used, which influences the actual value display. The zero point of this coordinate system is found in the starting point of the pocket (parameters _CPA and _CPO). At the end of the cycle, the original coordinate system is active again.

What is the function of CYCLE840?

You can use this cycle to mill rectangular and circular pockets. For finishing, a face cutter is required. The depth infeed always starts at the pocket center point and is performed vertically from there; thus, it is practical to pre-drill at this position. You can define the pocket shape and position by programming parameters.

What are the possibilities with CYCLE840?

The following possibilities are offered:

Selection of the pocket shape (rectangular, circular)
Definition of the pocket size (length/width, radius, depth)
Specification of the pocket position (center point)
Definition of a finishing allowance
Specification of the infeed depth
Specification of the feed rate for machining
Specification of the milling direction (synchronous milling/conventional milling)
Definition of the machining strategy (roughing/finishing).

What is the sequence for CYCLE840?

Position reached prior to cycle start:

The tool must be positioned above the workpiece at the retraction plane level.

Sequence of motions when roughing:

With G0, the pocket center point is approached at the retraction level, and then, from this position, with G0, too, the reference plane brought forward by the safety clearance is approached. From there, the tool plunges vertically to the programmed depth infeed. The machining of the pocket is then carried out from the inside outwards.

Sequence of motions when finishing:

First, finishing of the pocket side walls is performed. For this, the tool moves once around the pocket contour with a radius corresponding to the corner radius, or 2 mm if the corner radius is smaller than 2 mm. Then, finishing of the pocket base is performed.

How is the milling direction specified in CYCLE840?

You can specify the milling direction (down-cut/up-cut milling) via the parameter _CDIR. This specification refers to the direction of rotation set with M3 or M4.

Down-cut milling	Up-cut milling
M3 → G3	M3 → G2
M4 → G2	M4 → G3

What does _FAL define in CYCLE840?

The finishing allowance _FAL is valid for the side walls of the pocket.

What happens if the finishing allowance is greater than or equal to the tool diameter in CYCLE840?

If the final machining allowance is greater than or equal to the tool diameter, the pocket will not necessarily be machined completely. The message “Caution: Final machining allowance ≥ tool diameter” appears; the cycle, however, is continued.

What does _FFD define in CYCLE840?

The feedrate _FFD is effective for plunging into the material.

What happens if the tool radius is larger than half the length or width of the pocket in CYCLE840?

If the milling tool radius is larger than half the length or width of the pocket, then the cycle will be aborted, and alarm 61105 “Cutter radius too large” is output.

What happens if the radius of the circular pocket is smaller than the tool radius of the active tool in CYCLE840?

If this is smaller than the tool radius of the active tool, then the cycle is aborted, and alarm 61105 “Cutter radius too large” is output.

How is the machining type defined in CYCLE840?

You can use the parameter _VARI to define the machining type.

Machining type	_VARI
Roughing	1
Finishing	2

What happens if a tool compensation is not programmed before CYCLE840 is called?

A tool compensation must be programmed before the cycle is called. Otherwise, the cycle is aborted, and alarm 61000 “No tool compensation active” is output.

What happens to the actual value display internally in the cycle in CYCLE840?

What is the function of ROUGHING?

This cycle is used to rough-mill a rectangular or circular pocket.

What possibilities does ROUGHING offer?

The following possibilities are offered:

Selection of the pocket shape (rectangular, circular)
Definition of the pocket dimensions
Definition of the infeed depth
Specification of the overlap of the individual milling paths
Specification of the feed rate for machining
Specification of the milling direction (down-cut/up-cut milling)
Definition of the machining strategy (from the inside outwards/from the outside inwards).

What is the sequence for ROUGHING?

Position reached prior to cycle start:

The tool must be positioned above the workpiece at the retraction plane level. From there, it approaches the position defined by _CPA and _CPO with rapid traverse.

Sequence of motions:

From the position defined by _CPA and _CPO, the tool plunges to the programmed infeed depth and then mills the pocket.

What happens if the finishing allowance is greater than or equal to the tool diameter in ROUGHING?

How is the machining type defined in ROUGHING?

The parameter _VARI determines whether roughing is performed from the inside outwards (value 1) or from the outside inwards (value 2).

What does _OVERL define in ROUGHING?

When machining from the outside inwards, the parameter _OVERL defines the overlap (as a percentage) of the individual milling paths.

What happens if a tool compensation is not programmed before ROUGHING is called?

A tool compensation must be programmed before the cycle is called. Otherwise, the cycle is aborted, and alarm 61000 “No tool compensation active” is output.

What happens to the actual value display internally in the cycle in ROUGHING?

What is the function of FINISHING?

This cycle is used to finish-mill a rectangular or circular pocket.

What possibilities does FINISHING offer?

The following possibilities are offered:

Selection of the pocket shape (rectangular, circular)
Definition of the pocket dimensions
Specification of the feed rate for machining.

What is the sequence for FINISHING?

Position reached prior to cycle start:

The tool must be positioned above the workpiece at the retraction plane level. From there, it approaches the position defined by _CPA and _CPO with rapid traverse.

Sequence of motions:

The pocket is machined once in the order side wall → base.

What happens if the finishing allowance is greater than or equal to the tool diameter in FINISHING?

What happens if a tool compensation is not programmed before FINISHING is called?

A tool compensation must be programmed before the cycle is called. Otherwise, the cycle is aborted, and alarm 61000 “No tool compensation active” is output.

What happens to the actual value display internally in the cycle in FINISHING?

What is the function of RECTANG?

This cycle is used for milling a rectangular recess. The length and width of the recess can be specified by programming parameters. The milling direction is determined by the spindle direction (M3/M4) and can be modified by G2 or G3.

What is the sequence for RECTANG?

Position reached prior to cycle start:

The tool must be positioned at the retraction plane above the workpiece. From there, it approaches the starting point for milling the contour defined by parameters _CPA, _CPO, and _STA with rapid traverse.

Sequence of motions:

From this point, the contour of the recess is milled, and then the tool returns to the starting point.

What happens if a tool compensation is not programmed before RECTANG is called?

A tool compensation must be programmed before the cycle is called. Otherwise, the cycle is aborted, and alarm 61000 “No tool compensation active” is output.

How does the cycle create a sequence of motions for external threads?

The cycle creates the following sequence of motions:

Positioning on the starting point using G0 at the height of the retraction plane in the applicate of the current plane
Infeed to the reference plane brought forward by the safety clearance for swarf removal, using G0
Approach motion to the thread diameter along a circle path opposite to the direction G2/G3 programmed under CDIR
Thread milling along a helix path using G2/G3 and the feedrate value FFR
Retraction motion along a circle path in the opposite direction of rotation G2/G3 at the reduced feedrate FFR
Retraction to the retraction plane along the applicate using G0

Where is the starting position for thread milling with G2 located?

This start position for thread milling with G2 lies between the positive abscissa and the positive ordinate in the current level (i.e. in the first quadrant of the coordinate system).

Where is the start position for thread milling with G3?

For thread milling with G3, the start position lies between the positive abscissa and the negative ordinate (namely in the fourth quadrant of the coordinate system).

How does the cycle create a sequence of motions for internal threads?

The cycle creates the following sequence of motions:

Positioning on the center point using G0 at the height of the retraction plane in the applicate of the current plane
Infeed to the reference plane brought forward by the safety clearance for swarf removal, using G0
Approach to an approach circle calculated internally in the cycle using G1 and the reduced feedrate FFR
Approach motion to the thread diameter along a circle path according to the direction G2/G3 programmed under CDIR
Thread milling along a helix path using G2/G3 and the feedrate value FFR
Retraction motion along a circle path in the same direction of rotation at the reduced feedrate FFR
Retraction to the center point of the thread using G0
Retraction to the retraction plane along the applicate using G0

What is the starting position for internal threads?

The starting position is any position from which the center point of the thread at the height of the retraction plane can be reached without collision.

Why might a thread be machined from bottom to top?

For technological reasons, it can also be reasonable to machine a thread from bottom to top.

What must be done when machining a thread from bottom to top?

In this case, the retraction plane RTP will be behind the thread depth DP. This machining is possible, but the depth specifications must be programmed as absolute values and the retraction plane must be approached before calling the cycle or a position after the retraction plane must be approached.

What is an example of programming a thread from bottom to top?

A thread with a pitch of 3 mm is to start from -20 and to be milled to 0. The retraction plane is at 8.

N10 G17 X100 Y100 S300 M3 T1 D1 F1000 
N20 Z8 
N30 CYCLE90 (8, -20, 0, -60, 0, 46, 40, 3, 800, 3, 0, 50, 50)
N40 M2

What minimum depth must a hole have for the thread from bottom to top programming example?

The hole must have a depth of at least -21.5 (half pitch in excess).

What occurs during thread milling regarding travel-in and travel-out movements?

For thread milling, the travel-in and travel-out movements occur along all three axes concerned. This means that the travel-out movement includes a further step in the vertical axis, beyond the programmed thread depth.

How is the overshoot in the direction of the thread length calculated?

The overshoot is calculated as follows:

∆z: Overshoot, internal p: Pitch WR: Tool radius DIATH: External diameter of the thread RDIFF: Radius difference for travel-out circle

For internal threads, RDIFF = DIATH/2 – WR; for external threads, RDIFF = DIATH/2 + WR.

What are the parameters RTP, RFP, SDIS, DP, and DPR used for?

For an explanation of the parameters RTP, RFP, SDIS, DP, and DPR, see Section “Drilling, centering – CYCLE81”.

What are the parameters DIATH, KDIAM, and PIT used for?

These parameters are used to determine the thread data nominal diameter, core diameter, and pitch.

What is the parameter DIATH?

The parameter DIATH is the external diameter of the thread.

What is the parameter KDIAM?

KDIAM is the internal diameter of the thread.

How are the travel-in/travel-out movements created?

The travel-in/travel-out movements are created internally in the cycle, based on the parameters DIATH, KDIAM, and PIT.

What is the parameter FFR used for?

The value of the parameter FFR is specified as the current feedrate value for thread milling. It is effective when thread milling on a helical path. This value will be reduced in the cycle for the travel-in/travel-out movements. The retraction is performed outside the helix path using G0.

What is the parameter CDIR used for?

This parameter is used to specify the value for the machining direction of the thread.

What happens if the parameter CDIR has an illegal value?

If the parameter has an illegal value, the following message will appear:

“Wrong milling direction; G3 is generated”.

In this case, the cycle is continued and G3 is automatically generated.

What is the parameter TYPTH used for?

The parameter TYPTH is used to define whether you want to machine an external or an internal thread.

What are the parameters CPA and CPO used for?

These parameters are used to define the center point of the drill hole or of the spigot on which the thread will be produced.

Why must a tool compensation be programmed before calling the cycle?

The cutter radius is calculated internally in the cycle. Therefore, a tool compensation must be programmed before calling the cycle. Otherwise, the alarm 61000 “No tool compensation active” appears and the cycle is aborted.

What happens if the tool radius is 0 or negative?

If the tool radius=0 or negative, the cycle is also aborted and the alarm 61000 “No tool compensation active” is issued.

What happens with internal threads if the tool radius is monitored and is too large?

With internal threads, the tool radius is monitored and alarm 61105 “Cutter radius too large” is output, and the cycle is aborted.

How do you mill an internal thread using the given programming example?

By using this program, you can mill an internal thread at point X60 Y50 of the G17 plane. See the following programming example for internal thread:

DEF REAL RTP=48, RFP=40, SDIS=5, DP=0, DPR=40, DIATH=60, KDIAM=50 
DEF REAL PIT=2, FFR=500, CPA=60,CPO=50 
DEF INT CDIR=2, TYPTH=0
; Definition of the variable with value assignments
N10 G90 G0 G17 X0 Y0 Z80 S200 M3 ; Approach starting position 
N20 T5 D1 ; Specification of technology values 
N30 CYCLE90 (RTP, RFP, SDIS, DP, DPR, DIATH, KDIAM, PIT, FFR, CDIR, TYPTH, CPA, CPO)
; Cycle call
N40 G0 G90 Z100 ; Approach position after cycle 
N50 M02 ; End of program

How do you program CYCLE832?

CYCLE832 (TOL, TOLM, 1)

What are the parameters for CYCLE832?

Parameter	Data type	Description
TOL	REAL	Tolerance of machining axes
TOLM	INT	Machining type selection
PSYS	INT	Internal parameter, only the default value 1 is possible

What are the possible values for the TOLM parameter?

0: Deselect
1: Finishing
2: Semi-finishing
3: Roughing

What is the function of CYCLE832?

Use CYCLE832 to machine free-form surfaces that involve high requirements for velocity, precision and surface quality. This cycle function groups together the important G codes, machine data and setting data that are required for high-speed cutting machining.

What does the parameter TOL refer to?

This refers to the tolerance of axes involved in machining. The tolerance value is written to the relevant machine or setting data depending on the G codes.

What does the parameter TOLM determine?

This parameter determines which technological machining type is to be used.

What happens if error conditions are detected in the cycles?

If error conditions are detected in the cycles, an alarm is generated and the execution of the cycle is aborted. Furthermore, the cycles display their messages in the message line of the control system. These messages do not interrupt the program execution. The errors with their reactions and the messages in the message line of the control system are described in conjunction with the individual cycles.

What happens if error conditions are detected in the cycles regarding alarm generation and machining?

If error conditions are detected in the cycles, an alarm is generated and the machining is aborted.

What is the range of alarm numbers generated in the cycles?

Alarms with numbers between 61000 and 62999 generated in the cycles.

How is the range of alarm numbers divided?

This range of numbers, in turn, is divided again with regard to alarm responses and cancel criteria.

What does the error text displayed with the alarm number provide?

The error text that is displayed together with the alarm number gives you more detailed information on the error cause.

What is the clearing criterion and alarm response for alarm numbers 61000 … 61999?

NC_RESET. Block preparation in the NC is aborted.

What is the clearing criterion and alarm response for alarm numbers 62000 … 62999?

Clear key. The block preparation is interrupted; the cycle can be continued with the following key after the alarm has been cleared.

How are error numbers classified?

6  _  X  _  _

X=0 General cycle alarms
X=1 Alarms generated by the drilling, drilling pattern and milling cycles

Where do the cycles display their messages?

The cycles display their messages in the message line of the control system. These messages do not interrupt the program execution.

What information do the messages provide?

Messages provide information with regard to a certain behavior of the cycles and with regard to the progress of machining and are usually kept beyond a machining step or until the end of the cycle.

What is an example of a message from the drilling cycles?

“Depth: according to the value for the relative depth”

What is the operating sequence before programming?

Turn on the power supply for the machine tool. Proceed with the operations for the reference point approach, if the machine axis is equipped with an incremental encoder.
Create the required tools.
Activate the tools and the spindle.
Proceed with the handwheel assignment operations if the machine manufacturer has not assigned the handwheel for the control system.
Proceed with the tool setting operations to finish measuring all the tools.
Verify the tool offset result to guarantee the safety and correctness of machining.

What are the machining requirements for the programming example?

The arc transition must be smooth, without lapping.
The cutting trace must be even.
The sharp edges must be rounded.

What is the blank data for the programming example?

Blank material: Cube aluminum
Blank length: 100 mm
Blank width: 80 mm
Blank height: 60 mm (machining length: 46 mm; clamping length: 10 mm)

What are the required tools for the programming example?

Tool type	Tool number	Tool diameter DIN ISO (mm)	Roughing Speed	Roughing Feedrate	Finishing Speed	Finishing Feedrate
Face milling tool	T1D1 T1H1	50	1500	600	2500	600
End milling tool	T2D1 T2H2	8	4000	600	4500	600
Drilling tool	T3D1 T3H3	3	5000	100	5000	100

What are some things to note about the programming example?

When programming in ISO mode, you need to set the H numbers of T1 to T3 as 1 to 3 respectively in the tool list.
Cut the workpiece manually after machining is over.

What is the operating sequence for programming in Siemens mode?

Select the program management operating area.
Press this softkey to enter the system directory for storing part programs.
Press this softkey and enter the name of the new program.
Press this softkey to confirm your entry. The part program editor window opens automatically.
Enter the following program in the window. The control system saves your editing automatically.
Open the window for CYCLE71 through the following softkey operations: → Enter the desired parameters.
Press this softkey to confirm your input and open the cycle programming window. Enter the following program block:

S2500

Press this softkey to return to the program editor window.
Move the cursor to “C” in the line for CYCLE71 with the cursor keys and press this softkey to insert a marker.
Use the cursor keys to select the entire program block for CYCLE71. Press this softkey to copy the selection to the buffer memory.
Place the cursor on the end-of-block character after “S4500” with the cursor keys and press this key to enter a new line.
Paste the content of the buffer memory into the new line.
Press this softkey to open the window for CYCLE71 again. Change the values of “FDP” and “FALD” to “25” and “0” respectively.
Move the cursor to the input field of “VARI” and press this key to change the value to “12”.
Press this softkey to accept the change.
Place the cursor on the end-of-block character of CYCLE71 the with cursor keys and press this key on the MCP to enter a new line. Continue to enter the following program blocks and press this key again:

G0 Z100 M9 T2 D1  M6 S4000 M3 M8 G0 Z100 _ANF:

Open the window for POCKET3 through the following softkey operations: → →
Enter the desired parameters.
Press this softkey to confirm your input and open the cycle programming window. Enter the following program blocks:

AROT Z90 _END: REPEAT _ANF _END P=3 ROT S4500 M3 _ANF1:

Proceed through the steps described earlier to copy the entire program block for POCKET3 and paste it in the line after the above program blocks.
Press this softkey to open the window for POCKET3 again. Change the values of “MID”, “FFP1”, “FFD” and “VARI” to “5”, “400”, “200” and “2” respectively.
Press this softkey to accept the change and open the cycle programming window.
Press this key to enter a new line. Continue to enter the following program blocks and then press this key again:

AROT Z90 _END1: REPEAT _ANF1 _END1 P=3 ROT G0 Z100

Open the window for POCKET4 through the following softkey operations: → →
Enter the desired parameters.
Press this softkey to confirm your input and open the cycle programming window. Enter the following program block:

S4500 M3

Proceed through the steps described earlier to copy the entire program block for POCKET4 and paste it in the line after the above blocks.
Press this softkey to open the window for POCKET4 again. Change the values of “MID”, “FFP1”, “FFD” and “VARI” to “5”, “400”, “200” and “2” respectively.
Press this softkey to accept the change and open the cycle programming window.
Press this key to enter a new line. Continue to enter the following program blocks and then press this key again:

G0 Z100 M8 T3 D1 M6 S5000 M3 M8 G0 X0 Y0

Open the window for CYCLE81 through the following softkey operations: →

How do you enter the desired parameters for CYCLE81?

Enter the desired parameters as follows:

Modal call
✓ OK
✓ OK

What is CYCLE81?

CYCLE81 is the final drilling depth relative to the reference plane.

How do you open the window for HOLES2?

Open the window for HOLES2 through the following softkey operations:

→ Enter the desired parameters as follows:

What do you do after you confirm your input for HOLES2?

Press the softkey to confirm your input and open the cycle programming window. Enter the following blocks: MCALL G0 Z100 M9 M05 M30 Then you can proceed with the operations for “program simulation and execution”.

What is the operating sequence for programming in ISO mode?

Select the system data operating area.
Press the softkey and the system will prompt the following window:
Press the softkey and the control system automatically starts the mode change from Siemens mode to ISO mode.
Select the program management operating area.
Press the softkey to enter the system directory for storing part programs.
Press the softkey and enter the name of the new program.
Press the softkey to confirm your entry. The part program editor window opens automatically.
Enter the following main program:

G291 G17 G54 G90 G40 G69 T1 M6
G0 Z100 
G43 H1 M8 M3 S1500 X-60 Y25 Z3 
G1 Z0.2 F600 X50 Y-25 X-60 Y25 
M3 S2500 
G1 Z0. F600 X50 Y-25 X-60
G0 Z100 M9 M05 
G69 T2 M6 M3 S4000 
G0 Z100 
G43 H2 M8 X-13 Y16 
SSA G68 X0 Y0 R90 
SSA G68 X0 Y0 R180
SSA G68 X0 Y0 R270 
SSA G69 
G0 Z100 X0 Y0 Z3
G1 Z-2 F50 
G1 G41 X7.5 Y0 F600 G3 I-7.5 
G1 G40 X0 Y0 
G1 Z-4 F50 
G1 G41 X7.5 Y0 F600 G3 I-7.5 
G1 G40 X0 Y0 
G1 Z-5 F50 
G1 G41 X7.5 Y0 F600 G3 I-7.5
G1 G40 X0 Y0 
G0 Z100 M9
T3 M6 M3 S5000 
G0 Z100 
G43 H3 Z10 G80 G81 X10 Y0 Z-5 F100 X5 Y8.66 X-5 X-10 Y0 X-5 Y-8.66 X5 
G80 
G0 Z100 M05 M30

Open the window for creating a new program through the following key operations:

→

Enter the name of the subprogram with the file name extension, “SSA.SPF” in this example.
Press the softkey to confirm your entry. The part program editor window opens automatically. Enter the following subprogram:

G0 Z100 X-13 Y16 Z2 
G1 Z-2 F50 
G1 G41 X-13 Y21 D1 F600 X-19.5 Y11 X-6.5 Y21 X-13.5 
G1 G40 Y16 
G1 Z-4 F50 
G1 G41 X-13 Y21 D1 F600 X-19.5 Y11 X-6.5 Y21 X-13.5 
G1 G40 Y16 
G1 Z-5 F50 
G1 G41 X-13 Y21 D1 F600 X-19.5 Y11 X-6.5 Y21 X-13.5
G1 G40 Y16 
G0 Z10 M17

What will happen after a new configuration is applied?

An NCK/PLC/HMI restart will be triggered!

What are the machining requirements?

The arc transition must be smooth, without lapping.
The cutting trace must be even.
The sharp edges must be rounded.

What is the blank data?

Blank material: Cube aluminum
Blank length: 100 mm
Blank width: 80 mm
Blank height: 60 mm (machining length: 46 mm; clamping length: 10 mm)

What are the required tools, tool numbers and tool diameters for roughing and finishing?

Tool Type	Tool Number	Tool Diameter (mm)	Roughing Speed	Roughing Feedrate	Finishing Speed	Finishing Feedrate
Face milling tool	T1D1	T1H1	50	1500	600	2500
End milling tool	T2D1	T2H2	10	4000	600	4000

What are the notes for programming in ISO mode?

When programming in ISO mode, you need to set the H numbers of T1 and T2 to 1 and 2 in the tool list respectively.
Cut the workpiece manually after machining is over.

What is the operating sequence for programming in Siemens mode?

Select the program management operating area.
Press the softkey to enter the system directory for storing part programs.
Press the softkey and enter the name of the new program.
Press the softkey to confirm your entry. The part program editor window opens automatically.
Enter the following program in the window. The control system saves your editing automatically.
Open the window for CYCLE71 through the following softkey operations:

→

How do you enter the desired parameters for CYCLE71?

Enter the desired parameters as follows:

After you confirm your input and open the cycle programming window, what program block should you enter?

Enter the following program block: S2500 M3

What do you do after you enter the program block?

Press the softkey to return to the program editor window.

What is the next step in programming CYCLE71?

Move the cursor to “C” in the line for CYCLE71 with the cursor keys and press this softkey to insert a marker.

After you insert a marker, what should you do next?

Use the cursor keys to select the entire program block for CYCLE71. Press the softkey to copy the selection to the buffer memory.

What is the next step after copying the program block to the buffer memory?

Place the cursor on the end-of-block character after “S4000 M3” with cursor keys and press this key to enter a new line.

What do you do after entering a new line?

Paste the content of the buffer memory into the new line.

How do you change the values of “FALD” and “FFP1”?

Press the softkey to open the window for CYCLE71 again. Change the values of “FALD” and “FFP1” to “0” and “400” respectively.

How do you change the value for “VARI”?

Move the cursor to the input field for “VARI” and press this key to change the value to “32”.

After you accept the changes, what should you do next?

Place the cursor on the end-of-block character of CYCLE71 with cursor keys and press this key on the MCP to enter a new line. Continue to enter the following program blocks and press this key again:

G0 Z100 M9 
X60 Y0 T2 D1  M6 S3500 M3 M8

How do you open the window for CYCLE72?

Open the window for CYCLE72 through the following softkey operations:

→

How do you enter the name of the contour subroutine in “KNAME”?

Enter the name of the contour subroutine in “KNAME”, for example, “CON1”.

After you open the program editor window, what program blocks should you enter for the external contour?

Enter the program blocks for the external contour:

G1 X41.97 Y-8 X46.48 Y-46.91  
G2 X3.48 CR=102 
G3 X3 Y-3 CR=60 
G1 X41.97 Y-8 M2

After you return to the window for CYCLE72, how do you enter the desired parameters?

Enter the desired parameters as follows:

After you confirm your input and open the cycle programming window, what program block should you enter?

Enter the following program block: M3 S4000

What do you do next?

Proceed through the steps described earlier to copy the entire program block for CYCLE72 and paste it in the line after the above program blocks.

How do you change the values of “MID” and “VARI”?

Press the softkey to open the window for CYCLE72 again. Change the values of “MID” and “VARI” to “5” and “112” respectively.

After you confirm your input and open the cycle programming window, what program blocks should you enter?

Enter the following program blocks:

G0 Z100  
S4000 M3 
G0 X60 Y-15 
G0 Z2 
G1 F300 Z-8 
G42 
G1 Y-15 X50 
G1 X44 Y-2 RND=2 
G1 Y0 X 22 
G40 
Y10 
G0 Z100 M9 M05 M30

What is the operating sequence for programming in ISO mode?

Select the system data operating area.
Press the softkey and the system prompts the following window:
Press the softkey and the control system will automatically start the mode change from Siemens mode to ISO mode.
Select the program management operating area.
Press the softkey to enter the system directory for storing part programs.

What will happen after a new configuration is applied?

An NCK/ PLC/HMI restart will be triggered!

How can a new program be created?

To create a new program:

Select the program management operating area.
Press the softkey to enter the system directory for storing part programs.
Press the softkey and enter the name of the new program.
Press the softkey to confirm the entry. The part program editor window opens automatically.

What should be done after entering the new program name?

The part program editor window opens automatically and the following main program should be entered: G291 G17 G90 G64 G54 T1 M6 G43 H1 G0 Z100 M8 S1500 M3 G0 Z100 X-30 Y0 Z3 G1 Z0.2 F600 X80 Y-50 X-30 Y0 M3 S2500 G1 Z0. F600 X80 Y-50 X-30.

What is the next step after entering the main program?

The next step is to open the window for creating a new program.

How can the window for a new program be opened?

The window for creating a new program can be opened through specific key operations, but the specific keys are not mentioned in the PDF.

What should be entered after opening the window for a new program?

The name of the subprogram with the file name extension should be entered. This is “SSC.SPF” in the example provided in the PDF.

What happens after entering the subprogram name and pressing the softkey?

The part program editor window will open automatically, allowing the subprogram to be entered.

What subprogram should be entered?

The following subprogram should be entered: G0 Z100 X40 Y5 Z3 G1 Z-2 F50 G1 G41 X41.97 Y-8 X46.48 Y-46.91 G2 X3.48 CR=102 G3 X3 Y-3 CR=60 G1 X41.97 Y-8 G1 G40 X40 Y5 G1 Z-4 F50 G1 G41 X41.97 Y-8 X46.48 Y-46.91 G2 X3.48 CR=102 G3 X3 Y-3 CR=60 G1 X41.97 Y-8 G1 G40 X40 Y5 G1 Z-5 F50 G1 G41 X41.97 Y-8 X46.48 Y-46.91 G2 X3.48 CR=102 G3 X3 Y-3 CR=60 G1 X41.97 Y-8 G1 G40 X40 Y5 M17.

What can be done after entering the subprogram?

After entering the subprogram, you can proceed with program simulation and execution.

What are the technical requirements for machining?

The technical requirements for machining are:

The arc transition must be smooth, without lapping.
The cutting trace must be even.
The sharp edges must be rounded.

What are the blank data specifications?

The blank data specifications are:

Blank Material: Cube aluminum
Blank Length: 100 mm
Blank Width: 80 mm
Blank Height: 60 mm (machining length: 46 mm; clamping length: 10 mm)

What are the required tools and their specifications?

The required tools and their specifications are outlined in the table below:

Tool Type	Tool Number	Tool Diameter (mm)	Roughing Speed	Roughing Feedrate	Finishing Speed	Finishing Feedrate
Face milling tool	T1D1	50	1500	600	2500	600
End milling tool	T2D1	12	3500	600	4000	600
End milling tool	T3D1	10	4000	600	4000	600
End milling tool	T4D1	16	4000	300	4500	400
End milling tool	T5D1	5	5000	300	5000	300
Drilling tool	T6D1	10	4000	100	4000	100
Drilling tool	T7D1	5	4000	100	4000	100
Tapping tool	T8D1	6	500	400	500	400

What should be done when programming in ISO mode?

When programming in ISO mode:

Set the H numbers of T1 to T8 as 1 to 8 respectively in the tool list.
Cut the workpiece manually after machining is over.

What is the first step in the operating sequence for programming in Siemens mode?

Select the program management operating area.

What is the second step in the operating sequence for programming in Siemens mode?

Press the softkey to enter the system directory for storing part programs.

What is the third step in the operating sequence for programming in Siemens mode?

Press the softkey and enter the name of the new program.

What is the fourth step in the operating sequence for programming in Siemens mode?

Press the softkey to confirm your entry. The part program editor window opens automatically.

What is the fifth step in the operating sequence for programming in Siemens mode?

Enter the following program blocks in the window:

The control system saves your editing automatically.

What is the sixth step in the operating sequence for programming in Siemens mode?

Open the window for CYCLE71 through specific softkey operations, but the specific keys are not mentioned in the PDF.

What should be done after opening the CYCLE71 window?

Enter the desired parameters.

What should be done after entering the desired parameters in the CYCLE71 window?

Press the softkey to confirm your input and open the cycle programming window. Continue to enter the following program block: S2500 M3

What should be done after entering the program block in the cycle programming window?

Press the softkey to return to the program editor window.

How can a marker be inserted in the program editor window?

Move the cursor to “C” in the line for CYCLE71 with the cursor keys and press the softkey to insert a marker.

How can the entire program block for CYCLE71 be copied to the buffer memory?

Use the cursor keys to select the entire program block for CYCLE71. Press the softkey to copy the selection to the buffer memory.

How can the content of the buffer memory be pasted into an empty line?

Place the cursor in the last empty line and press the softkey to paste the content of the buffer memory into the empty line.

How can the values of “FALD” and “FFP1” in the CYCLE71 window be changed?

Press the softkey to open the window for CYCLE71 again. Change the values of “FALD” and “FFP1” to “0” and “400” respectively.

How can the value of “VARI” in the CYCLE71 window be changed?

Move the cursor to the input field of “VARI” and press the key to change the value to “32”.

What should be done after changing the value of “VARI”?

Press the softkey to accept the change.

What program blocks should be entered after accepting the change to “VARI”?

Enter the following program blocks and then press the key again: G0 Z100 M9 T3 D1 M6 G0 Z100 S4000 M3 M8 G00 X-6 Y92 G00 Z2 G01 F300 Z-10 G41 Y90 G01 X10 RND=6 G01 Y97 CHR=1 G01 X70 RND=4 G01 Y90 G01 G40 X80 G00 Z100 M9 T4 D1 M6 G0 Z100 S4000 M3 M8.

How can the window for POCKET4 be opened?

The window for POCKET4 can be opened through specific softkey operations, but the specific keys are not mentioned in the PDF.

What should be done after opening the POCKET4 window?

Enter the desired parameters.

What should be done after entering the desired parameters in the POCKET4 window?

Press the softkey to confirm your input and open the cycle programming window. Continue to enter the following block: S4500 M3.

What should be done after entering the program block in the POCKET4 cycle programming window?

Proceed through the steps described earlier to copy the entire program block for POCKET4 and paste it in the line after the above program blocks.

How can the values of “FFP1”, “FFD”, and “VARI” in the POCKET4 window be changed?

Press the softkey to open the window for POCKET4. Change the values of “FFP1”, “FFD”, and “VARI” to “400”, “100”, and “22” respectively.

What should be done after changing the values in the POCKET4 window?

Press the softkey to accept the changes and open the cycle programming window.

What program blocks should be entered after opening the POCKET4 cycle programming window?

Press the key to enter a new line. Continue to enter the following program blocks and then press this key again: G0 Z100 M9 T5 D1 M6 G0 Z100 M3 S5000 M8.

How can the window for SLOT2 be opened?

The window for SLOT2 can be opened through specific softkey operations, but the specific keys are not mentioned in the PDF.

What should be done after opening the SLOT2 window?

Enter the desired parameters.

What should be done after entering the desired parameters in the SLOT2 window?

Press the softkey to confirm your input and open the cycle programming window. Continue to enter the following blocks: G0 Z100 M9 T2 D1 M6 G0 Z100 X-5 Y0 S3500 M3 M8.

What is the next step after entering the program blocks in the SLOT2 cycle programming window?

Press the key to enter a new line.

How can the window for CYCLE72 be opened?

The window for CYCLE72 can be opened through specific softkey operations, but the specific keys are not mentioned in the PDF.

What should be entered in the CYCLE72 window?

Enter the name of the contour subroutine in “KNAME”, for example, “CON1”.

What should be done after entering the contour subroutine name in the CYCLE72 window?

Press the softkey to open the program editor window again and enter the program blocks for the external contour: G17 G90 DIAMOF G1 X7 Y-5 G1 Y61.35 G2 X13.499 Y86 I=AC(57) J=AC(61.35) G1 X63 RND=2 Y0 X2 M2.

What should be done after entering the program blocks for the external contour?

Press the softkey to return to the window for CYCLE72 and enter the desired parameters.

What should be done after entering the desired parameters in the CYCLE72 window?

Press the softkey to confirm your input and open the cycle programming window. Enter the following program blocks: S4000 M3.

What should be done after entering the program blocks in the CYCLE72 cycle programming window?

Proceed through the steps described earlier to copy the entire program block for CYCLE72 and paste it in the line after the above blocks.

How can the values of “MID”, “FAL”, “FALD”, and “VARI” in the CYCLE72 window be changed?

Press the softkey to open the window for CYCLE72 again. Change the values of “MID”, “FAL”, “FALD” and “VARI” to “5”, “0”, “0” and “112” respectively.

What should be done after changing the values in the CYCLE72 window?

Press the softkey to confirm your input and open the cycle programming window. Enter the following program blocks: G0 Z100 S3500 M3.

What is the next step after entering the program blocks in the CYCLE72 cycle programming window?

Press the key to enter a new line.

How can the window for POCKET3 be opened?

The window for POCKET3 can be opened through specific softkey operations, but the specific keys are not mentioned in the PDF.

What should be done after opening the POCKET3 window?

Enter the desired parameters.

What should be done after entering the desired parameters in the POCKET3 window?

Press the softkey to confirm your input and open the cycle programming window. Enter the following program blocks: S4000 M3.

What should be done after entering the program blocks in the POCKET3 cycle programming window?

Proceed through the steps described earlier to copy the entire program block for POCKET3 and paste it in the line after the above program blocks.

How can the value of “VARI” in the POCKET3 window be changed?

Press the softkey to open the window for POCKET3 again. Move the cursor to the input field for “VARI” and change its value to “12”.

What should be done after changing the value of “VARI” in the POCKET3 window?

Press the softkey to accept the change and open the cycle programming window.

What program blocks should be entered after changing the value of “VARI” in the POCKET3 cycle programming window?

Place the cursor on the end-of-block character of POCKET3 with the cursor keys and press the key to enter a new line. Continue to enter the following program blocks and then press this key again: G0 Z150 M9 T6 D1 M6 G0 Z100 S4000 M3 G00 Z50 X36 Y24.1.

How can the window for CYCLE82 be opened?

The window for CYCLE82 can be opened through specific softkey operations, but the specific keys are not mentioned in the PDF.

What should be done after opening the CYCLE82 window?

Enter the desired parameters.

What should be done after entering the desired parameters in the CYCLE82 window?

Press the softkey to call this cycle modally.

What should be done after calling the CYCLE82 cycle modally?

Press the softkey to confirm the input.

How can the window for HOLES2 be opened?

The window for HOLES2 can be opened through specific softkey operations, but the specific keys are not mentioned in the PDF.

How do I enter the desired parameters?

Press this softkey to confirm your input and open the cycle programming window. Continue to enter the following program blocks: X36 Y24.1 MCALL G0 Z100 M9 T7 D1 M715 M6 G0 Z100 S4000 M3 M8

How do I return to the window of available drilling cycles?

Press this softkey.

How do I confirm my input and open the cycle programming window?

Press this softkey.

How do I copy the entire program blocks for HOLES2 and paste it in the line after the above program blocks?

Proceed through the steps described earlier.

What program blocks should I enter on the new line?

Enter the following program blocks and then press this key again: X36 Y24.1 MCALL G0 Z100 M9 T8 D1 M6 G0 Z100 S500 M3 M8

How do I call this cycle modally?

Press this softkey.

How do I confirm my input and open the cycle programming window?

Press this softkey.

How do I copy the entire program blocks for HOLES2 and paste it in the line after the above program blocks?

Proceed through the steps described earlier.

What program blocks should I enter on the new line?

Continue to enter the following program blocks: X36 Y24.1 MCALL G0 Z100 M9 M05 M30 Then you can proceed with the operations for “program simulation and execution (Page 280)”.

What is the first step in the operating sequence for programming in ISO mode?

Select the system data operating area.

What is the second step in the operating sequence for programming in ISO mode?

Press this softkey and the system prompts the following window: After the new configuration is applied, an NCK/PLC/HMI restart will be triggered!

What is the third step in the operating sequence for programming in ISO mode?

Press this softkey and control system automatically starts the mode change from Siemens mode to ISO mode.

What is the fourth step in the operating sequence for programming in ISO mode?

Select the program management operating area.

What is the fifth step in the operating sequence for programming in ISO mode?

Press this softkey to enter the system directory for storing part programs.

What is the sixth step in the operating sequence for programming in ISO mode?

Press this softkey and enter the name of the new program.

What is the seventh step in the operating sequence for programming in ISO mode?

Press this softkey to confirm your entry. The part program editor window opens automatically.

What is the eighth step in the operating sequence for programming in ISO mode?

Enter the following main program: G291 G17 G90 G54 G40 G69 T1 M6 G43 H1 G0 Z100 S1500 M3 M8 X-30 Y25 Z3 G1 Z0.2 F50 X90 F600 Y75 X-30 Y25 S2500 M3 N150 G1 Z0 F50 X90 F600 Y75 X-30 G0 Z100 M9 M05 T3 M6 G43 H3 G0 Z100 S4000 M3 M8 G00 X-6 Y92 G00 Z2 G01 Z-10 F50 G41 X-1 Y90 F600 G1 X4

What is the ninth step in the operating sequence for programming in ISO mode?

Open the window for creating a new program through the following key operations: →

What is the tenth step in the operating sequence for programming in ISO mode?

Enter the name of the subprogram with the file name extension, “SSG.SPF” in this example.

What is the eleventh step in the operating sequence for programming in ISO mode?

Press this softkey to confirm your entry. The part program editor window opens automatically. Enter the following program blocks for “SSG”: G0 Z100 X54.319 Y75.176 Z3 G1 Z-3 F50 G1 G41 X57.216 Y75.953 F600 G3 X51.421 Y74.4 CR=3 G2 Y65.6 CR=17 G3 X57.216 Y64.047 CR=3 G3 Y75.953 CR=23 G1 G40 X54.319 Y75.176 G0 Z100 M17

What is the twelfth step in the operating sequence for programming in ISO mode?

Proceed as described above to create the other subprogram “SSH”. Subprogram “SSH”: G0 Z100 X35 Y-15 Z3 G1 Z-5 F50 G1 G41 Y0 F600 X7 G1 Y61.35 G2 X13.499 Y86 CR=50 G1 X61 G2 X63 Y84 CR=2 G1 Y0 X33 G1 G40 X35 Y-15 M17 Then you can proceed with the operations for “program simulation and execution (Page 280)”.

What are the technical requirements for 13.5 Programming (Example 4)?

The arc transition must be smooth, without lapping.
The cutting trace must be even.
The sharp edges must be rounded.

What are the blank data for 13.5 Programming (Example 4)?

Blank material: Cube aluminum
Blank length: 100 mm
Blank width: 80 mm
Blank height: 60 mm (machining length: 46 mm; clamping length: 10 mm)

What is the required tool information for 13.5 Programming (Example 4)?

Tool type	Tool number	Tool diameter	Roughing Speed	Roughing Feedrate	Finishing Speed	Finishing Feedrate
Face milling tool	T1D1, T1H1	50 mm	1500	600	2500	600
End milling tool	T2D1, T2H2	12 mm	4000	600	4000	600
End milling tool	T3D1, T3H3	4 mm	4000	600	4000	600
Drilling tool	T4D1, T4H4	5 mm	1200	100	1200	100
Tapping tool	T5D1, T5H5	6 mm	600	600	600	600

What should I note for 13.5 Programming (Example 4)?

When programming in ISO mode, you need to set the H numbers of T1 to T5 as 1 to 5 respectively in the tool list.
Cut the workpiece manually after machining is over.

What is the first step in the operating sequence for programming in Siemens mode?

Select the program management operating area.

What is the second step in the operating sequence for programming in Siemens mode?

Press this softkey to enter the system directory for storing part programs.

What is the third step in the operating sequence for programming in Siemens mode?

Press this softkey and enter the name of the new program.

What is the fourth step in the operating sequence for programming in Siemens mode?

Press this softkey to confirm your entry. The part program editor window opens automatically.

What is the fifth step in the operating sequence for programming in Siemens mode?

Enter the following program in the window. The control system saves your editing automatically.

What is the sixth step in the operating sequence for programming in Siemens mode?

Open the window for CYCLE71 through the following softkey operations: →

How do I enter the desired parameters?

Press this softkey to confirm your input and open the cycle programming window. Continue to enter the following program block: S2500 M3

How do I return to the program editor window?

Press this softkey.

How do I insert a marker?

Move the cursor to “C” in the line for CYCLE71 with the cursor keys and press this softkey.

How do I copy the selection to the buffer memory?

Use the cursor keys to select the entire program block for CYCLE71. Press this softkey.

How do I paste the content of the buffer memory into the empty line?

Place the cursor in the last empty line and press this softkey.

How do I open the window for CYCLE71 again?

Press this softkey.

How do I change the value to “32”?

Move the cursor to the input field of “VARI” and press this key.

How do I accept the change?

Press this softkey.

How do I confirm my input and open the cycle programming window?

Press this softkey.

How do I return to the window of available milling cycles?

Press this softkey.

How do I confirm my input and open the cycle programming window?

Press this softkey.

How do I enter a new line?

Press this key.

How do I accept the changes and open the cycle programming window?

Press this softkey.

How do I accept the changes and open the cycle programming window?

Press this softkey.

How do I confirm your input and open the cycle programming window?

Press this softkey.

How do I enter a new line?

Press this key.

How do I call this cycle modally?

Press this softkey.

How do I confirm your input and open the cycle programming window?

Press this softkey.

How do I enter a new line?

Press this key.

How do I confirm your input and open the cycle programming window?

Press this softkey.

What are the next steps after confirming the input and opening the cycle programming window?

Enter the following blocks: X-35 Y-25 X35 Y-25 X-35 Y25 X35 Y25 MCALL G0 Z100 M9 M05 M30. Then you can proceed with the operations for “program simulation and execution”.

How do I select the system data operating area?

Press this softkey.

How do I start the mode change from Siemens mode to ISO mode?

Press this softkey and control system automatically starts the mode change from Siemens mode to ISO mode.

How do I select the program management operating area?

Press this softkey.

How do I enter the system directory for storing part programs?

Press this softkey.

How do I enter the name of the new program?

Press this softkey.

How do I confirm my entry?

Press this softkey. The part program editor window opens automatically.

How do I open the window for creating a new program?

Press this softkey.

How do I enter the name of the subprogram?

Press this softkey and enter the name of the subprogram with the file name extension, “SSD.SPF” in this example.

How do I confirm my entry?

Press this softkey. The part program editor window opens automatically.

How do I create the other two subprograms: “SSE” and “SSF”?

Proceed as described above to create the other two subprograms: “SSE” and “SSF”.

What do I do after creating the subprograms?

Proceed with the operations for “program simulation and execution”.

How do I switch to “AUTO” mode?

Press this softkey.

How do I open the program simulation window?

Press this softkey. The program control mode PRT is automatically activated.

How do I start the simulation for the the selected part program?

Press this key.

How do I return to the program editor window?

After you finish the simulation, you can press this softkey.

How do I change to “AUTO” mode in the machining operating area?

Press this softkey and the system automatically changes to “AUTO” mode in the machining operating area.

What preconditions must be met before I start machining?

• These two softkeys have been deactivated. • The feedrate override is 0%. • The safety door is closed and the coolant is switched on.

How do I start workpiece machining?

Make sure the safety door is closed and the coolant is switched on. Press this key.

What happens if you press the key on the PPU for the machining operating area?

Pressing this key on the PPU allows you to open the window for the machining operating area. You can perform reference point approach, tool setting operations, as well as program start, stop, control, block search, and real-time simulation, etc. in this operating area.

What different window displays and softkey functions does the machining operating area have?

The machining operating area has different window displays and softkey functions in the following operating modes:

“JOG” mode
“AUTO” mode
“MDA” mode

What happens when you press the key on the PPU for the program editing operating area?

Pressing this key on the PPU allows you to open the program editor with the last opened part program. If no program is ever opened in the program editor, pressing this key switches to the program management operating area.

What are the softkey functions in the program editing operating area?

Displays and edits the program blocks
Programs drilling cycles and adds to the current program
Programs turning cycles and adds to the current program
Opens the contour editor for free contour programming
Calls the dialog box of common programming instructions
Opens the program simulation window to check the programming results before machining
Recompiles the current cycle or contour selected with cursor by reopening the previous programming window
Executes the current program
Automatically assigns block numbers (Nxx) to all blocks
Opens the block search dialog box
Inserts a marker at the cursor position for copying/deleting the program blocks selected with the cursor
Copies the selected program blocks to the buffer memory
Pastes the copied program blocks at the current cursor position

What does working with the CNC require you to set up?

When working with the CNC, you need to set up the machine and the tools, etc. as follows:

Create the tools and cutting edges.
Enter/modify the tool and work offsets.
Enter the setting data.

What window will open if you press the key on the PPU for the offset operating area?

Pressing this key on the PPU allows you to open the following window:

(See image on page 283 of the PDF).

What are the softkey functions in the offset operating area?

Displays and modifies the tool offsets – See also “Creating a tool” and “Creating/changing a cutting edge”.
Displays and modifies the tool wear data – “Entering the tool wear offsets”.
Displays and modifies the workpiece offsets – “Entering/modifying workpiece offsets”.
Displays and modifies the R variables – “Setting R parameters”.
Configures and displays lists of setting data – “Entering/modifying the setting data”.
Displays the defined user data – “Setting user data”.
Measures the tool manually or automatically – See also “Measuring the tool manually” and “Measuring the tool with a probe (auto)”.
Creates a new tool – “Creating a tool”.
Opens a lower-level menu for cutting edge settings – “Creating/changing a cutting edge”.
Removes the currently selected tool from the tool list
Searches for your desired tool with the tool number

What window will open if you press the key on the PPU for the program management operating area?

Pressing this key on the PPU allows you to open the following window:

(See image on page 284 of the PDF).

What are the softkey functions in the program management operating area?

Stores the NC programs for subsequent operations
Manages and transfers the manufacturer cycles
Reads in/out files via the USB drive and executes part programs from the external storage media
This softkey is valid on the PPU160.2 only and displays as follows (See image on page 284 of the PDF).
Reads in/out files via the Ethernet interface and executes part programs from a computer
Backs up manufacturer files
Backs up user files
Shows the recently accessed files
Executes the selected file. No editing is allowed in the execution process.
Creates new files or directories
Searches for files
Selects all files for the subsequent operations
Copies the selected file(s) to the clipboard
Pastes the selected file(s) from the clipboard to the current directory
Restores the deleted file(s)
Opens the lower-level menu for more options:
- Rename the part programs
- Cut the part programs

Which softkeys are visible only with the manufacturer password in the program management operating area?

Softkeys ② and ⑥ are visible only with the manufacturer password.

How do you search for programs?

Select the program management operating area.
Select the storage directory in which you wish to perform the search.
- Note: The following two folders are visible only with the manufacturer password (See image on page 285 of the PDF).
Press the vertical softkey to open the search window (See image on page 285 of the PDF).
Enter the complete name with extension of the program file to be searched in the first input field in the search window. To narrow your search, you can enter the desired text in the second field.
Use this key to choose whether to include subordinate folders or observe upper/lower case (See image on page 285 of the PDF).
Press the softkey to start the search (See image on page 285 of the PDF).

How do you copy, cut, and paste programs?

Select the program management operating area.
Open the desired directory.
Select the program file that you would like to copy or cut.
Perform either of the following operations as desired:
- Press this softkey to copy the selected file (See image on page 285 of the PDF).
- Press the following softkeys to cut the selected file (See image on page 285 of the PDF).
Select the target directory with the horizontal softkeys.
Press this softkey to paste the file from the clipboard to the current directory (See image on page 285 of the PDF).

How do you delete/restore programs?

Select the program management operating area.
Open the desired directory.
Select the program file that you would like to delete.
Press this key, and the following message appears on the screen (See image on page 285 of the PDF).
Press this softkey to confirm the deletion (See image on page 285 of the PDF).
If you want to restore the last deleted file(s), press this softkey (See image on page 285 of the PDF).

How do you rename programs?

Select the program management operating area.
Open the desired directory.
Select the program file that you would like to rename.
Press the extension softkey.
Press this vertical softkey to open the window for renaming (See image on page 286 of the PDF).
Enter a desired new name with the extension in the input field.
Press this softkey to confirm your entry (See image on page 286 of the PDF).

How do you view and execute recent programs?

Select the program management operating area.
Press this softkey to open the list of recent files (See image on page 286 of the PDF). Note that even the deleted files are also displayed in the list.
Select the program file that you would like to execute.
Press this vertical softkey to start executing the selected program (See image on page 286 of the PDF).

How do you clear the current file list in the program management operating area?

To clear the current file list, press this softkey (See image on page 286 of the PDF).

What happens when you press the key combination for the system data operating area?

Pressing this key combination allows you to enter the system data operating area. This operating area includes functions required for parameterizing and analyzing the NCK, the PLC, and the drive. The start screen displays the machine configuration data and softkeys available. Depending on the functions se-lected, the horizontal and the vertical softkey bars vary. The screenshot below uses the control system with PPU161.3 as an example.

(See image on page 287 of the PDF).

What are the softkey functions in the system data operating area?

Sets the NC, PLC and HMI start up modes
Sets the system machine data
Configures the connected drives and motors (PPU161.3/PPU160.2 only)
Provides PLC commissioning and diagnostics
Sets the system date and time and adjusts the brightness of the screen
Backs up and restores system data
Creates and restores startup archives, data archive
Performs the axis optimization (PPU161.3/PPU160.2 only)
Enters the corresponding password (manufacturer password, and end user password) for different access levels
Changes the password as per the corresponding access levels
Deletes the current password
Selects the user interface language. Note that the HMI is automatically restarted when a new language is selected.
Switches to the ISO programming mode
Saves the contents of the volatile memory into a non-volatile memory area

How do you access the extended horizontal softkey bar in the system data operating area?

An extended horizontal softkey bar can be accessed via this key on the PPU (See image on page 287 of the PDF). Two extended horizontal softkeys are provided:

Views the service information
Defines the maintenance planner

Where do you press the key to enter the alarm operating area?

Press this key on the PPU to enter the alarm operating area. You can check the NC and drive alarms using the softkeys. PLC alarms are not sorted (See image on page 288 of the PDF).

What are the softkey functions in the alarm operating area?

Displays all alarms sorted by their priorities. The highest priority alarm is at the beginning of the list.
Displays the alarms sorted by the time of their occurrence. The most recent alarm stands at the beginning of the list.
Displays the alarms sorted by the time of their occurrence. The oldest alarm stands at the beginning of the list.
Displays the alarms on the drives. Note that this softkey is available on the PPU161.3 and PPU160.2 only.
Stops/starts updating of pending alarms
Views and manages the alarm log
Configures the access right for the remote control through the Ethernet connection. For more information about the softkey function, see the SINUMERIK 808D/SINUMERIK 808D ADVANCED Commissioning Manual.

What does the first softkey do in “JOG” mode?

Opens the “T, S, M” window where you can activate tools, set spindle speed and direction (see Section “Activating the tool and the spindle”), and select a G code or other M functions for activating the settable work offset.

What does the second softkey do in “JOG” mode?

Switches the display to the relative coordinate system. You can set the reference point in this coordinate system. For more information, see Section “Setting the relative coordinate system (REL)”.

What does the third softkey do in “JOG” mode?

Opens the workpiece measurement window where you determine the work offset data. For more information about this window, see Section “Measuring the workpiece”.

What does the fourth softkey do in “JOG” mode?

Opens the tool measurement window where you determine the tool offset data. For more information about this win-dow, see Sections “Measuring the tool manually”, “Measuring the tool with a probe (auto)” and “Calibrating the tool probe”.

What does the fifth softkey do in “JOG” mode?

Opens the face cutting window where you specify parameters for machining the end face or peripheral surface of a blank without creating a special part program. For more information about this window, see Section “Face milling”.

What does the sixth softkey do in “JOG” mode?

Opens the settings window where you can set JOG feedrate and variable increment values.

What does the seventh area in “JOG” mode display?

Displays the axis feedrate in the selected coordinate system.

What does the eighth area in “JOG” mode display?

Displays the axis position data in the relative coordinate system.

What does the ninth area in “JOG” mode display?

Displays the axis position data in the workpiece coordinate system.

What does the tenth area in “JOG” mode display?

Displays the axis position data in the machine coordinate system.

How does the HMI display the variable increment?

The HMI displays the variable increment if it is defined in the standard subroutine program:

Value ≤ five digits: displays the complete value
Value > five digits: displays the first four digits plus “…”

What is displayed in the first parameter area of the “JOG” window?

Displays the axes that exist in the machine coordinate system (MCS), workpiece coordinate system (WCS), or relative coordinate system(REL).If you traverse an axis in the positive (+) or negative (-) direction, a plus or minus sign ap-pears in the relevant field. If the axis is already in the required position, no sign is displayed.

What is displayed in the second parameter area of the “JOG” window?

Displays the current position of the axes in the selected coordinate system.

What is displayed in the third parameter area of the “JOG” window?

Displays the distance traversed by each axis in “JOG” mode from the interruption point in the condition of program interruption. For more information about program interruption, see Section “Executing a part program”.

What is displayed in the fourth parameter area of the “JOG” window?

Displays the currently active tool number T with the current tool offset number D.

What is displayed in the fifth parameter area of the “JOG” window?

Displays the actual axis feedrate and the setpoint (mm/min or mm/rev).

What is displayed in the sixth parameter area of the “JOG” window?

Displays the actual value and the setpoint of the spindle speed (r.p.m.).

How do you run the spindle manually?

Select the machining operating area.
Switch to “JOG” mode.
Press this key on the MCP to rotate the spindle counter-clockwisely.
Press this key on the MCP to stop the spindle rotation.
Press this key on the MCP to rotate the spindle clockwisely.
Use this softkey to return to the screen of the machining operating area.

How do you execute M functions?

Select the machining operating area.
Switch to “JOG” mode.
Open the “T, S, M” window.
Press this key to move the cursor to the input field for M functions, and enter the desired value, for example, “8”.
Press this key on the MCP to activate the coolant function. Now you can see the corre-sponding status indicator is on, which indicates the coolant supply is switched on.
Press this key on the MCP to stop the coolant function.
Use this softkey to return to the main screen of the machining operating area.

How do you set the relative coordinate system (REL)?

Select machining operating area.
Switch to “JOG” mode.
Press this softkey to switch the display to the relative coordinate system.
Use the cursor keys to select the input field, and then enter the new position value of the reference point in the relative coordinate system.
Use this key to activate the values after each entry. You can use the corresponding vertical softkeys to set the reference point to zero.

What does the Set X axis to zero softkey do?

Sets the X axis to zero

What does the Set Y axis to zero softkey do?

Sets the Y axis to zero

What does the Set Z axis to zero softkey do?

Sets the Z axis to zero

What does the Set spindle to zero softkey do?

Sets the spindle to zero

What does the Set all axes to zero softkey do?

Sets all axes to zero

How do you face mill?

Select the desired operating area.
Switch to “JOG” mode.
Open the face milling window.
Move the cursor keys to navigate in the list and enter the desired values for the selected parameters (see table below for the parameter descriptions).
Confirm your entries with the appropriate key.
Select the cutting path of the tool during machining.
Use this softkey to confirm your settings. The system now automatically creates the part program.
Press this key on the MCP to run the part program.

What are the parameters for face milling?

Parameter	Description
① Tool number	⑧ Direction of spindle rotation
② Tool offset number	⑨ Machining type selection: roughing or finishing
③ Work offset to be activated	⑩ X\Y\Z position of the blank
④ Retraction plane	⑪ Cutting dimension in the X\Y\Z direction, specified in increments
⑤ Safety distance	⑫ Cutting length in the X\Y\Z direction, specified in incre-ments relative to the workpiece edge
⑥ Path feedrate	⑬ Stock allowance in the Z direction
⑦ Spindle speed

How do you set the JOG data?

Select the desired operating area.
Switch to “JOG” mode.
Press this horizontal softkey to open the following window:
Enter values in the input fields and confirm your entries.
If necessary, press this vertical softkey to switch between the metric and inch dimension systems.
Press this softkey to confirm your change.
Press this softkey to exit.

What are the softkey functions in “AUTO” mode?

Pressing this key in the machining operating area switches to “AUTO” mode.
① Zooms in the actual value window
② Performs the program test, dry run, conditional stop, block skipping, and auxiliary function lock
③ Finds the desired block location
④ Corrects a wrong program block. Any changes will be stored immediately.
⑤ Activates the simulation function
⑥ Sets the frequently used setting data
⑦ Displays important G functions
⑧ Displays currently active auxiliary and M functions
⑨ Displays the axis feedrate in the selected coordinate system
⑩ Displays the information of part machining time (part timer) and part counter
⑪ Switches over the coordinate system in the actual value window
An extended horizontal softkey bar can be accessed via this key on the PPU. The following extended horizontal softkey is provided: Assigns and activates the handwheel or contour handwheel. For more infor-mation, refer to Section “Assigning the handwheel through the MCP (Page 23)” and Appendix “Activating the contour handwheel via the NC program (Page 298)”.

What do the parameters in “AUTO” mode display?

① Displays the axes that exist in the machine coordinate system (MCS), workpiece coordinate system (WCS), or relative coordinate system (REL).
② Displays the current position of the axes in the selected coordinate system.
③ Displays the remaining distance for the axes to traverse.
④ Displays seven subsequent blocks of the currently active part program. The display of one block is limited to the width of the window.

What are the basic softkey functions in “MDA” mode?

This window displays important G functions whereby each G function is assigned to a group and has a fixed position in the window. To close the window, press this softkey once again. To display additional G functions, use the corresponding keys.
This window displays the auxiliary and M functions currently active. To close the window, press this softkey once again.
This softkey opens the file saving window where you can specify a name and a storage medium for the program displayed in the MDA window. To save your program, either enter a new program name in the input field or select an existing program for overwriting. Note: If you do not save with this softkey, the program edited in “MDA” mode is actually a temporary file.
Pressing this softkey deletes all the blocks displayed in the MDA window.
This softkey opens a window where you can select an existing program file from a system directory to load into the MDA buffer.
For the explanation of other softkeys in this mode, see Section ““JOG” mode (Page 289)”.

What are some notes on part programs in “MDA” mode?

Observe the following notes when creating, executing or editing part programs in “MDA” mode:

Programs ended with M2/M30/M17 When a part program which is ended with M2/M30/M17 runs to the end in “MDA” mode, the cursor automatically returns to the beginning of the program and the entire program becomes editable.
Programs not ended with M2/M30/M17 When a part program which is not ended with M2/M30/M17 runs to the end in “MDA” mode, a new empty line automatically appears at the end of the program and the cursor stops at the beginning of the new line. In this case, only this new block line is editable and then executable. All program blocks before the new line, however, are not editable unless you press the following key:
- Note that if you do not enter any programming instruction in the new line, pressing the above key deletes the new line and the cursor automatically goes back to the beginning of the program.
Programs stopped under other circumstances In one of the following cases, the program execution stops and the program is not editable unless you press the above key:
- When a program exception occurs
- When the program runs to M0/M1
- When you press the following key:

What is the contour handwheel function?

The contour handwheel function can help you with the first cutting test after you create a new NC program. When you have activated this function, you can control the feedrate of path and synchronized axes via a handwheel in “AUTO” or “MDA” mode.

What are the preconditions for using the contour handwheel function?

You must not select fixed feedrate, dry-run feedrate, thread cutting, or tapping. Note: If you have not programmed the feedrate in the previous blocks, the control system prompts an alarm which indicates the absence of feedrate.
The axes have been referenced. For more information about how to reference the axes, see Chapter “Switching on and referencing (Page 19)”.
The option of “Contour handwheel” is activated with a license key. For more information about how to activate an option, see the SINUMERIK 808D/SINUMERIK 808D ADVANCED Commissioning Manual.
You have assigned the handwheel to the first geometric axis and activated it. For more information, see Section “Assigning the handwheel through the MCP (Page 23)”.

How do you activate the contour handwheel in “AUTO” mode?

Open the desired NC program in the part program editor window. For more information about how to create or edit a part program, see Chapter “Creating part programs (Page 28)”.
Enter the mandatory instructions “G1” (or “G2”/“G3”), “G94”, “G60” and “FD=0” in the blocks. The blocks are saved automatically. See the following example:
- Note:
  - “FD” and “F” cannot appear in the same NC block; otherwise, the control system prompts an alarm which interrupts the contour handwheel function.
  - When the block runs to “FD=0”, you can control the feedrate of path and synchronized axes via a handwheel in “AUTO” mode.
Press this softkey to execute the program. The system automatically switches to “AUTO” mode in the machining area.

How do you activate the contour handwheel in “MDA” mode?

Select the desired operating area.
Switch to “MDA” mode.
Enter the mandatory instructions “G1” (or “G2”/“G3”), “G94”, “G60” and “FD=0” in the blocks. The blocks are saved automatically. See the following example:
- You can alternatively load an existing part program from a system directory by pressing this softkey if desired and enter “FD=0”, “G94” and “G60” in the blocks. Note: “FD” and “F” cannot appear in the same NC block; otherwise, the control system prompts an alarm which interrupts the contour handwheel function.
Press this key on the MCP. When the block runs to “FD=0”, you can control the feedrate of path and synchronized axes via a handwheel in “MDA” mode.

What are the axis traversing directions?

The axis traversing direction depends on the rotation direction of the contour handwheel:

Clockwise → results in traversing in the programmed direction. If the block-change criterion is reached, the program advances to the next block (response identical to G60).
Counterclockwise → results in traversing in a direction opposite to the programmed direction. Here, the axes can only traverse to the appropriate block start. Pulses are not collected if the handwheel continues to rotate.

When the axes move against the programmed direction, what happens?

When the axes move against the programmed direction, the program reaches the beginning of each block and no further operation is available.

What is the help system?

The control system provides comprehensive online help. Whenever necessary, you can call the help system from any operating area.

How do you call the help system?

Press this key or the key combination <ALT> + <H> to call the help system from any operating area. If a con-text-sensitive help exists, Window “①” opens; otherwise, Window “③” opens.

What does window “①” in the help system do?

Calls the context-sensitive help for the current topic:

Current operating window
NC/V70 alarms selected in the alarm specific operation area
Machine data or setting data selected
V70 data selected

What does window “②” in the help system do?

Calls the machine manufacturer-developed PDF manual

What does window “③” in the help system do?

Displays all available help information:

Siemens help manuals
Machine manufacturer-developed help manuals, if any
All available NC/V70 alarms
All available V70 parameters
All available machine data or setting data

What are the softkeys in window “①”?

Use this softkey to select cross references. A cross reference is marked by the characters “≫ … ≪”. Note: This softkey is displayed only if the current page contains a cross reference.
Searches for a term in the current topic

How do I operate the operation wizard?

Call the operation wizard through the following key operations: →
Select a step of the machining operation with the cursor keys.
Press this softkey to start the onboard assistant.
Press this softkey to enter the next page.
Press this softkey to enter the previous page.
Press either key to return to the main screen of the operation wizard.
Press one of the following five operating area keys to exit the main screen of the operation wizard.

What does the operation assistant do?

Guide the user through the first steps of the machine operation.

What steps are involved in using the operation assistant?

Switch on the machine and approach the reference point
Create a new tool and measure the tool
Measure the workpiece
Create a part program
Simulate the program

How do I edit simplified Chinese characters?

Press the following key combination to switch the editor on or off: + Press this key to toggle between different input methods. Press the numeric keys (1 to 9) on the PPU to select the desired characters.

What is the structure of the editor?

Input field
Available characters
Active input method
Press the cursor key on the PPU to select other characters

How do I calculate contour elements?

You can use the calculator to calculate the contour elements in the respective input screens.

How do I calculate a point in a circle?

Activate the calculator when you position the cursor on the desired input field.
Open the lower-level menu for contour elements selection.
Select the desired calculation function. Press this softkey to define the direction of rotation of the circle.
Enter the circle center, the angle of the tangent and the circle radius in the following window:
Press this softkey to calculate the abscissa and ordinate values of the point. The abscissa is the first axis, and the ordinate is the second axis of the plane. The abscissa value is displayed in the input field from which the calculator function has been called, and the value of the ordinate is displayed in the next input field. If the function is called from the part program editor, the coordinates are saved with the axis names of the selected basic plane.

How do I calculate a point in a plane?

Activate the calculator when you position the cursor on the desired input field.
Open the lower-level menu for contour elements selection.
Select the desired calculation function.
Enter the following coordinates or angles in the respective input fields:
- Coordinates of the given point (PP)
- Slope angle of the straight line (A1)
- Distance of the new point with reference to PP
- Slope angle of the connecting straight line (A2) with reference to A1
Press this softkey to calculate the abscissa and ordinate values of the point. The abscissa is the first axis, and the ordinate is the second axis of the plane. The abscissa value is displayed in the input field from which the calculator function has been called, and the value of the ordinate is displayed in the next input field. If the function is called from the part program editor, the coordinates are saved with the axis names of the selected basic plane.

How do I calculate the Cartesian coordinates?

Activate the calculator when you position the cursor on the desired input field.
Open the lower-level menu for contour elements selection.
Select the desired calculation function. This function converts the given polar coordinates into Cartesian coordinates.
Enter the reference point, the vector length and the slope angle in the respective input fields.
Press this softkey to calculate the Cartesian coordinates. The abscissa value is displayed in the input field from which the calculator function has been called, and the value of the ordinate is displayed in the next input field. If the function is called from the part program editor, the coordinates are saved with the axis names of the selected basic plane.

How do I calculate the end point?

Activate the calculator when you position the cursor on the desired input field.
Open the lower-level menu for contour elements selection.
Select the desired calculation function. This function calculates the missing end point of the straight line/straight line contour section whereby the second straight line stands vertically on the first straight line. Press this softkey to define the given end point when the ordinate value is given. Press this softkey to define the given end point when the abscissa value is given. Press this softkey to define the second straight line which is rotated counter-clockwise by 90 degrees against the first straight line. Press this softkey to define the second straight line which is rotated clockwise by 90 degrees against the first straight line.
Enter the PP coordinates, angle A, EP abscissa / ordinate, and L length in the respective input fields. The following values of the straight line are known: Straight line 1: Starting point and slope angle Straight line 2: Length and one end point in the Cartesian coordinate system
Press this softkey to calculate the missing end point. The abscissa value is displayed in the input field from which the calculator function has been called, and the value of the ordinate is displayed in the next input field. If the function is called from the part program editor, the coordinates are saved with the axis names of the selected basic plane.

What is free contour programming?

Free contour programming enables you to create simple and complex contours. A contour editor (FKE) calculates any missing parameters for you as soon as they can be obtained from other parameters. You can link together contour elements and transfer to the edited part program.

How do I use the contour editor?

Proceed through the following steps to open the contour editor window:

Select the program management operating area.
Press this softkey to enter the system directory for storing part programs.
Select the desired program file, and press this key to open it in the program editor.
Press this softkey to open the contour editor window.
Initially, you define a contour starting point.
The contour is then programmed step by step.

How do I recompile in the contour editor?

When the program edited in the contour editor is opened in the program editor, if you position the editor cursor in a command line of the contour program and then press this softkey, the main screen of the contour editor opens and you can recompile the existing contour.

What should I note when recompiling in the contour editor?

When recompiling, only the contour elements that were generated in the contour editor are created again. Any changes you made directly in the program text are lost; however, you can subsequently insert and edit user-defined texts, which will not be lost.

What are the softkey functions in the contour editor?

An element was selected using the cursor keys. This softkey enlarges the image section of the selected element.
Zooms the graphic in/out/automatically
When you select this softkey, you can move the red cross-hair with the cursor keys and choose a picture detail to display. When you deactivate this softkey, the input focus is positioned in the contour chain again.
If you press this softkey, help graphics are displayed in addition to the relevant parameter. Pressing the softkey again exits the help mode.
Press this softkey to toggle between the selections. This softkey functions the same as pressing the following key:
Defines a pole for contour programming in polar coordinates. The pole can only be entered in absolute Cartesian coordinates.
Exits the contour editor and returns to the program editor window, without transferring the last edited values to the main program
Saves the settings for the start point

How do I define a start point?

When entering a contour, begin at a position which you already know and enter it as the starting point.

How do I define the starting point?

Select the program management operating area.
Enter the system program directory.
Select the desired program file, and press this key to open it in the program editor.
Press this softkey to open the contour editor window.
Use the cursor keys on the PPU to switch between different input fields.
Press this softkey or the following key to toggle between the selections and enter the desired values as required. You can alternatively press this key to make your selection. You can also define a pole for contour programming in polar coordinates by pressing this softkey. The pole can also be defined or redefined at a later time. The programming of the polar coordinates always refers to the pole that was defined last.
Save the settings for the start point. Pressing this softkey cancels the settings and exits the contour editor.

How do I program a contour element?

Once you have defined the contour start point, press this softkey and you can begin programming the individual contour elements from the main screen shown below:

What are the softkeys in window “②”?

Zooms in the current view
Zooms out the current view
Zooms the current view to page width
Jumps to the desired page
Searches for a term in the current topic
Continues search for the next term that matches the search criteria
Exits the help system

What are the keys for window “③”?

Expands hierarchical topics
Collapses hierarchical topics
Navigates upwards through the hierarchical topics
Navigates downwards through the hierarchical topics
Opens the selected topic in the current topic relevant window Functions the same as pressing the following key:
Searches for a term in the current topic
Continues search for the next term that matches the search criteria
Exits the help system

What opens the window for programming a vertical straight line (in Z direction)?

① opens the window for programming a vertical straight line (in Z direction).

What opens the window for programming a horizontal straight line (in Y direction)?

② opens the window for programming a horizontal straight line (in Y direction).

What opens the window for programming an oblique line in the Y/Z direction?

③ opens the window for programming an oblique line in the Y/Z direction. The end point of the line is entered using coordinates or an angle.

What opens the window for programming a circular arc with any direction of rotation?

④ opens the window for programming a circular arc with any direction of rotation.

What opens the lower-level menu for more programming options?

⑤ opens the lower-level menu for more programming options:

Specify a pole
Close the contour

What does the “Tangent to preceding element” softkey preset?

This softkey presets the angle α2 to a value of 0. The contour element has a tangential transition to the preceding element, i.e. the angle to the preceding element (α2) is set to 0 degree.

What happens when you press the “Displaying all parameters” softkey?

Press this softkey to display a selection list of all the parameters for the selected contour element. If you leave any parameter input fields blank, the control assumes that you do not know the right values and attempts to calculate these from the settings of the other parameters. The contour is always machined in the programmed direction.

When is the “Input switchover” softkey displayed?

This softkey is displayed only in cases where the cursor is positioned on an input field with several switchover settings.

What happens when you click the “Selecting dialog” softkey?

Some parameter configurations can produce several different contour characteristics. In such cases, you will be asked to select a dialog. By clicking this softkey, you can display the available selection options in the graphic display area. Select this softkey to make the correct selection (green line). Confirm your choice with this softkey.

What happens when you select the “Changing a selected dialog” softkey?

If you want to change an existing dialog selection, you must select the contour element in which the dialog was originally chosen. Both alternatives are displayed again when you select this softkey.

How can you delete the value in the selected parameter input field?

You can delete the value in the selected parameter input field with this softkey or the following key:

value E

What happens when you press the “Saving a contour element” softkey?

If you have entered the available data for a contour element or selected a desired dialog, pressing this softkey allows you to store the contour element and return to the main screen. You can then program the next contour element.

How do you append a contour element?

Use the cursor keys to select the element in front of the end marker. Use the softkeys to select the contour element of your choice and enter the values you know in the input screen for that element. Confirm your inputs with the following softkey: Accept element

How do you select a contour element?

Position the cursor on the desired contour element in the contour chain, and select it using this key. The parameters for the selected element will then be displayed. The name of the element appears at the top of the parameterization window. If the contour element can be represented geometrically, it is highlighted accordingly in the graphic display area, i.e. the color of the contour element changes from white to black.

How do you modify a contour element?

You can use the cursor keys to select a programmed contour element in the contour chain. Press this key to display the parameter input fields. The parameters can now be edited.

How do you insert a contour element?

Use the cursor keys in the contour chain to select the contour element in front of the position for the new element. Then select the contour element to be inserted from the softkey bar. After you have configured the parameters for the new contour element, confirm the insert operation by pressing the following softkey: Accept element Subsequent contour elements are updated automatically according to the new contour status.

How do you delete a contour element?

Use the cursor keys to select the element you wish to delete. The selected contour symbol and associated contour element in the programming graphic are highlighted in red. Then press this softkey and confirm the query. Delete element

What happens when you press the “Closing the contour” softkey?

By pressing this softkey, you can close the contour from the actual position with a straight line to the starting point.

What happens when you press the “Undoing an input” softkey?

By selecting this softkey you can return to the main screen without transferring the last edited values to the system.

What does it mean when the contour symbol color is black on a red background?

Element is defined geometrically.

What does it mean when the contour symbol color is black on a light yellow background?

Element is not defined geometrically.

What does it mean when the contour symbol color is black on a gray background?

Element is defined geometrically.

What does it mean when the contour symbol color is white on a gray background?

Element is not defined geometrically.

What is the absolute (abs)/incremental (inc) end position in X or Y direction?

① Absolute (abs)/incremental (inc) end position in X or Y direction

What does it mean if CHR=0 or RND=0?

Transition element to the next contour is a chamfer (CHR) or a radius (RND). CHR=0 or RND=0 means no transition element.

What is the input field for supplementary comments?

Input field for supplementary comments, such as F1000 feedrate values, H or M functions. If comments are entered as text, they must always be started with a semicolon “;”.

What does the contour chain display?

The contour chain which displays the start point and programmed contour elements. The current position in the chain is color-highlighted.

What does the graphics window display?

The graphics window which displays the progress of the contour as you configure the parameters for the contour elements.

What is the length of the straight line?

L Length of the straight line

What is the pitch angle with reference to Y axis?

α1 Pitch angle with reference to Y axis

What does it mean when the direction of rotation of the circular arc is clockwise or counter-clockwise?

① Direction of rotation of the circular arc: clockwise or counter-clockwise

What is the radius of the circle?

② Radius of circle

What are the absolute (abs)/incremental (inc) end positions in X and Y directions?

③ Absolute (abs)/incremental (inc) end positions in X and Y directions

What are the absolute (abs)/incremental (inc) positions of circle center point in Y (I) and X (K) directions?

④ Absolute (abs)/incremental (inc) positions of circle center point in Y (I) and X (K) directions

What is the starting angle with reference to the Y axis?

α1 Starting angle with reference to Y axis

What is the angle to the preceding element?

α2 Angle to preceding element; tangential transition: α2=0

What is the end angle with reference to the Y axis?

β1 End angle with reference to Y axis

What is the angle of aperture of the circle?

β2 Angle of aperture of circle

Where are the names of the identifiers (X or Y …) defined?

The names of the identifiers (X or Y …) are defined in the machine data where they can also be changed.

When can a transition element be used?

A transition element can be used whenever there is a point of intersection between two neighboring elements; this can be calculated from the input values.

What can be inserted as a transition element between any two contour elements?

You can choose to insert either a radius (RND), a chamfer (CHR) or an undercut as the transition element between any two contour elements. The transition is always appended to the end of a contour element. You select transition elements in the parameter input screen for the relevant contour element.

What must often be appended at the start and end of a contour in simple turning contours?

Radius or chamfer at the start or the end of a turning contour: In simple turning contours a chamfer or radius must often be appended at the start and end of the contour.

How do you select the direction of transition for the contour start in the starting point screen?

A chamfer or radius terminates an axis-parallel contour section on the blank: You select the direction of transition for the contour start in the starting point screen. You can choose between chamfer and radius. The value is defined in the same manner as for the transition elements.

How many directions can be selected in a single selection field?

In addition, four directions can be selected in a single selection field. You select the direction of the transition element for the contour end in the end screen. This selection is always proposed, even if preceding elements were assigned no transition.

What does the contour chain display?

Once you complete or cancel the programming of a contour element, you can navigate around the contour chain (left on the main screen) using the cursor keys. The current position in the chain is color-highlighted. The elements of the contour and pole, if applicable, are displayed in the sequence in which they were programmed.

How do you select an existing contour element?

You can select an existing contour element with the following key and reassign its parameters: Follower element

What happens when you select one of the contour elements on the vertical softkey bar?

A new contour element is inserted after the cursor when you select one of the contour elements on the vertical softkey bar; the input focus is then switched to the parameter input on the right of the graphic display. Programming always continues after the element selected in the contour chain.

How do you delete the selected element from the chain?

You can delete the selected element from the chain by selecting the following softkey: Delete element

What is displayed in the graphics window?

The graphics window displays the progress of the contour chain as you configure the parameters for the contour elements. The element you have selected is displayed in black in the graphics window.

To what extent is the contour displayed?

The contour is displayed to the extent it can be interpreted by the control on the basis of parameter inputs. If the contour is still not displayed in the programming graphic, further values must be entered. Check the contour elements you have already programmed, if required. You may have forgotten to enter all of the known data.

How is the coordinate system scaling adapted?

The coordinate system scaling is automatically adapted to changes in the complete contour.

Where is the position of the coordinate system displayed?

The position of the coordinate system is displayed in the graphics window.

How can you enlarge the image section of the selected element?

An element was selected using the cursor keys. Pressing the following softkey allows you to enlarge the image section of the selected element: Zoom +

What is the functionality of polar coordinates?

The description about defining the coordinates of contour elements applies to the specification of positional data in the Cartesian coordinate system. Alternatively, you have the option to define positions using polar coordinates.

When can you define a pole?

When programming contours, you can define a pole at any time prior to using polar coordinates for the first time. Programmed polar coordinates subsequently refer to this pole. The pole is modal and can be re-defined at any time. It is always entered in absolute Cartesian coordinates. The contour calculator converts values entered as polar coordinates into Cartesian coordinates. Positions can be programmed in polar coordinates only after a pole has been specified. The pole input does not generate a code for the NC program.

What are the polar coordinates valid in?

The polar coordinates are valid in the level selected with G17 to G19.

What is the pole?

The pole is a contour element that can be edited, which itself does not contribute to the contour. It can be entered when the starting point of the contour is defined or anywhere within the contour. The pole cannot be created before the starting point of the contour.

What does the pole softkey allow you to do?

This softkey allows you to specify a pole and can only be entered in absolute Cartesian coordinates. This softkey is also present in the starting point screen. This enables the pole to be entered at the start of a contour, so that the first contour element can be entered in polar coordinates.

What must be specified explicitly if the straight line that was generated with close contour is linked to the start element of the contour with a radius or chamfer?

If the straight line that was generated with close contour is linked to the start element of the contour with a radius or chamfer, the radius or chamfer must be specified explicitly as follows:

Close contour, enter radius/chamfer, and accept element. The result then corresponds exactly to what would occur if the closing element were to be entered with the radius or chamfer. Close contour can only be used for entering contour elements in polar coordinates if the starting point of the contour was set to polar and the same pole is still valid when the contour is closed.

Which contour elements can be entered optionally in polar coordinates only after a pole has been defined?

The following contour elements can be entered optionally in polar coordinates only after a pole has been defined, whether this was done at the outset or later in the process:

Circular arcs
Straight lines (horizontal, vertical, any direction)

What happens to the toggle field if no pole exists?

To switchover between Cartesian and polar coordinates, additional toggle fields are displayed in the programming windows for the contour elements of oblique lines and circular arcs. A toggle field is not displayed if no pole exists. Input fields and display fields are then only available for Cartesian values.

What can be input for “polar/Cartesian”?

Absolute and incremental polar coordinates can be input for “polar/Cartesian”. The input fields and display fields are labeled inc and abs.

How are absolute polar coordinates defined?

Absolute polar coordinates are defined by an absolute distance to the pole that is always positive and an angle in the range of 0° … +/- 360°. When absolute dimensions are specified, the angular reference is based on a horizontal axis of the working plane, e.g. X axis with G17. The positive direction of rotation runs counter-clockwise.

What is the definitive pole if there are several input poles?

If there are several input poles, the definitive pole is always the last pole before the input or edited element.

What do incremental polar coordinates relate to?

Incremental polar coordinates relate to both the definitive pole and the end point of the preceding element.

How is the absolute distance to the pole calculated for an incremental input?

For an incremental input, the absolute distance to the pole is calculated using the absolute distance from the end point of the preceding element to the pole plus the length increment that was entered. The increment can be positive or negative. The absolute angle is calculated accordingly using the absolute polar angle of the preceding element plus the angular increment. It is not necessary here for the preceding element to have been entered as polar.

What does the contour calculator convert in contour programming?

In contour programming, the contour calculator converts the Cartesian coordinates of the preceding end point using the definitive pole into polar coordinates. This also applies if the preceding element has been given in polar coordinates, since this could relate to another pole if a pole has been inserted in the meantime.

What technologies are provided with additional support in the form of pre-defined cycles?

The technologies below are provided with the additional support in the form of pre-defined cycles, which then must be parameterized.

Drilling
Milling

What does the following diagram show?

The following diagram shows a programming example for the “Free contour programming” function.

What is the starting point in the diagram?

Starting point: X=5.67 abs., Y=0 abs., machining plane G17 The contour is programmed in a counter-clockwise direction.

How do you select the program management operating area?

Select the program management operating area.

How do you enter the system program directory?

Enter the system program directory.

How do you open a program in the program editor?

Select a program with the cursor keys and press this key to open the program in the program editor. Cont.

How do you open the contour editor?

Press this softkey to open the contour editor.

How do you define a start point?

Define a start point with the following parameters and press this softkey to confirm.

Programming plane: G17
X: 5.67 abs.
Y: 0 Accept element

How do you select a contour element of a straight horizontal line?

Press this softkey to select a contour element of straight horizontal line.

What are the parameters for a straight horizontal line contour?

Enter the parameters for this element and press this softkey to confirm.

X: -93.285 abs. Accept element

How do you select a contour element of a straight line in any direction?

Press this softkey to select a contour element of straight line in any direction.

What are the parameters for a straight line in any direction contour?

Enter the parameters for this element and press this softkey to confirm.

X: -43.972 inc.
α1: -125 ° Accept element

What are the parameters for the second straight line in any direction contour?

Press this softkey to select a contour element of straight line in any direction.
Enter the parameters for this element and press this softkey to confirm.

X: 43.972 inc.
α1: -55 ° Accept element

What are the parameters for the second straight horizontal line contour?

Press this softkey to select a contour element of straight horizontal line.
Enter the parameters for this element and press this softkey to confirm.

X: 5.67 abs. Accept element

How do you select a contour element of a circular arc?

Press this softkey to select a contour element of circular arc.

How do you select the desired contour characteristics for a circular arc?

Enter the parameters for this element and press this softkey to select the desired contour characteristics.

Direction of rotation: clockwise
R: 72
X: 5.67 abs.
Y: 0 abs. Dialog select

How do you confirm your selection of a circular arc contour?

Press this softkey to confirm. Accept element

What is the starting point in Example 2?

Starting point: X=0 abs., Y=0 abs., machining plane G17 The contour is programmed in the clockwise direction with dialog selection.

What are the operational steps to define a start point?

Select the program management operating area.
Enter the system program directory.
Select a program with cursor keys and press this key to open the program in the program editor.
Press this softkey to open the contour editor.
Define a start point with the following parameters and press this softkey to confirm.
- Programming plane: G17
- X: 0
- Y: 0

What are the parameters to select a contour element of straight vertical line?

Y: -104 abs.

What are the parameters to select a contour element of circular arc?

Direction of rotation: clockwise
R: 79
I: 0 abs.
β2: 30 °

What are the parameters to select another contour element of circular arc?

Direction of rotation: clockwise
R: 7.5
β2: 180 °

What are the parameters to select yet another contour element of circular arc?

Direction of rotation: counter-clockwise
R: 64
X: -6 abs.
I: 0 abs.
RND: 5

What are the parameters to select a contour element of straight vertical line?

α1:90 °
RND: 5

What are the parameters to select a contour element of circular arc?

Direction of rotation: clockwise
R: 25
X: 0 abs.
Y: 0 abs.
I: 0 abs.

What is the starting point for Example 3?

X=0 abs., Y=5.7 abs., machining plane G17

In what direction is the contour programmed for Example 3?

The contour is programmed in a clockwise direction.

What are the operational steps for Example 3?

Select the program management operating area.
Enter the system program directory.
Select a program with cursor keys and press this key to open the program in the program editor.
Press this softkey to open the contour editor.
Define a start point with the following parameters and press this softkey to confirm.
- Programming plane: G17
- X: 0 abs.
- Y: 5.7 abs.

What are the parameters to select a contour element of circular arc?

Direction of rotation: counter-clockwise
R: 9.5
I: 0 abs.
RND: 2

What are the parameters to select a contour element of straight line in any direction?

α1: -30 °

What are the parameters to select a contour element of circular arc?

Direction of rotation: clockwise
R: 2
J: 4.65 abs.

What are the parameters to select another contour element of circular arc?

Direction of rotation: counter-clockwise
R: 3.2
I: 11.5 abs.
J: 0 abs.

What are the parameters to select yet another contour element of circular arc?

Direction of rotation: clockwise
R: 2
J: -4.65 abs.

What are the parameters to select a contour element of straight line in any direction?

α1: -158 °
Y: -14.8 abs.
α2: 0 °

What are the parameters to select a contour element of straight horizontal line?

L: 5

What are the parameters to select a contour element of straight vertical line?

Y: 5.7 abs.

What are the parameters to select a contour element of straight horizontal line?

X: 0 abs.

What is a word?

A word is a block element and mainly constitutes a control command.

What are the two parts that a word consists of?

Address characters: generally a letter
Numerical value: a sequence of digits which with certain addresses can be added by a sign put in front of the address, and a decimal point. A positive sign (+) can be omitted.

Can a word contain several address letters?

Yes, a word can also contain several address letters.

What must be done when a word contains several address letters?

In this case, however, the numerical value must be assigned via the intermediate character “=”.

Example: CR=5.23

Is it possible to call G functions using a symbolic name?

Yes, it is also possible to call G functions using a symbolic name.

Example: SCALE ; Enable scaling factor

What characters are used for programming and how are they interpreted?

The following characters are used for programming. They are interpreted in accordance with the relevant definitions.

Letters, digits: A, B, C, D, E, F, G, H, I, J, K, L, M, N, O, P, Q, R, S, T, U, V, W X, Y, Z 0, 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 7, 8, 9 No distinction is made between lowercase and uppercase letters.
Printable special characters: ( Open parenthesis " Inverted commas ) Close parenthesis _ Underscore (belongs to letters) [ Open square bracket . Decimal point ] Close square bracket , Comma, separator < less than ; Comment start > greater than % Reserved; do not use : Main block, end of label & Reserved; do not use = Assignment, part of equation ’ Reserved; do not use / skip $ System variable identifiers * Multiplication ? Reserved; do not use + Addition and positive sign ! Reserved; do not use – Subtraction, minus sign
Non-printable special characters: LF End-of-block character Blank Separator between words; blank Tab character Reserved; do not use

What is a block?

A block should contain all data required to execute a machining step. Generally, a block consists of several words and is always completed with the end-of-block character " LF " (Linefeed). When writing a block, this character is automatically generated when pressing the linefeed key on an externally connected keyboard or pressing the following key on the PPU.

What is the recommended order when there are several instructions in a block?

If there are several instructions in a block, the following order is recommended: N… G… X… Z… F… S… T… D… M… H…

How should block numbers be selected?

First select the block numbers in steps of 5 or 10. Thus, you can later insert blocks and nevertheless observe the ascending order of block numbers.

How can blocks of a program that are not to be executed with each program run be marked?

Blocks of a program, which are to be executed not with each program run, can be marked by a slash / in front of the block number.

How is the block skip activated?

The block skip itself is activated via Operation (program control: “SKP”) or by the programmable controller (signal).

Can a section be skipped by several blocks in succession?

Yes, a section can be skipped by several blocks in succession using " / ".

What happens when a block must be skipped during program execution?

If a block must be skipped during program execution, all program blocks marked with " / " are not executed. All instructions contained in the blocks concerned will not be considered. The program is continued with the next block without marking.

How can instructions in the blocks of a program be explained?

The instructions in the blocks of a program can be explained using comments (remarks). A comment always starts with a semicolon " ; " and ends with end-of-block. Comments are displayed together with the contents of the remaining block in the current block display.

How are messages programmed?

Messages are programmed in a separate block. A message is displayed in a special field and remains active until a block with a new message is executed or until the end of the program is reached. Up to 65 characters can be displayed in message texts. A message without message text cancels a previous message.

Example: MSG (“THIS IS THE MESSAGE TEXT”)

What is the total number of characters in a block?

Total number of characters in a block: 512 characters

What is the programming example?

N10 ; G&S company, order no. 12A71 N20 ; Pump part 17, drawing no.: 123 677 N30 ; Program created by H. Adam, Dept. TV 4 N40 MSG(“DRAWING NO.: 123677”) :50 G54 F4.7 S220 D2 M3 ;Main block N60 G0 G90 X100 Z200 N70 G1 Z185.6 N80 X112 /N90 X118 Z180 ; Block can be suppressed N100 X118 Z120 N110 G0 G90 X200 N120 M2 ; End of program

What are the instructions, their address significance, value assignments, and programming information?

Address	Significance	Value assignments	Information	Programming
D	Tool offset number	0 … 9, only integer, no sign	Contains compensation data for a particular tool	T… ; D0 indicates no compensation for the tool, one tool activates 1~9 numbers, that is, one tool carries at most nine different compensation data at the same time.
F	Feedrate	0.001 … 99 999.999	Path velocity of a tool/workpiece; unit: mm/min or mm/revolution depending on G94 or G95	F…
F	Dwell time (in block with G4)	0.001 … 99 999.999	Dwell time in seconds	G4 F…; separate block
G	G function (preparatory function)	Only integer, specified values	The G functions are divided into G groups. Only one G function from one group can be written in one block. A G function can either be modal (until canceled by another function from the same group), or non-modal (only effective for the block it is written in).	G… or symbolic name, e.g.: CIP
G0	Linear interpolation at rapid traverse rate	1: Motion commands (type of interpolation), modally effective		G0 X… Y… Z… ; Cartesian in polar coordinates: G0 AP=… RP=… or with additional axis: G0 AP=… RP=… Z… ; e.g.: with G17 axis Z
G1*	Linear interpolation at feedrate			G1 X… Y… Z… F… in polar coordinates: G1 AP=… RP=… F… or with additional axis: G1 AP=… RP=… Z… F… ; e.g.: with G17 axis Z
G2	Circular interpolation in clockwise direction	(in conjunction with a third axis and TURN=… also helix interpolation -> see under TURN)		G2 X… Y… I… J… F… ; End point and center point G2 X… Y… CR=… F… ; Radius and end point G2 AR=… I… J… F… ; Aperture angle and center point G2 AR=… X… Y… F… ; Aperture angle and end point in polar coordinates: G2 AP=… RP=… F… or with additional axis: G2 AP=… RP=… Z… F… ; e.g.: with G17 axis Z
G3	Circular interpolation in counter-clockwise direction	(in conjunction with a third axis and TURN=… also helix interpolation -> see under TURN)		G3 … ; otherwise as for G2
CIP	Circular interpolation through intermediate point			CIP X… Y… Z… I1=… J1=… K1=… F…
CT	Circular interpolation; tangential transition			N10 … N20 CT X… Y… F… ;circle, tangential transition to the previous path segment
G33	Thread cutting, tapping with constant pitch	2: Special motions, non-modal		S… M… ;Spindle speed, direction G33 Z… K…; Thread drilling with compensating chuck, e.g. in Z axis
G331	Thread interpolation			N10 SPOS=… ; Spindle in position control N20 G331 Z… K… S… ; tapping without compensating chuck e.g. in Z axis; RH or LH thread is defined via the sign of the pitch (e.g. K+): + : as with M3 – : as with M4
G332	Thread interpolation – retraction			G332 Z… K… ;Rigid tapping, e.g. in Z axis, retraction motion; sign of pitch as for G331
G4	Dwell time			F…;separate block, F: Time in seconds or G4 S… ;separate block, S: in spindle revolutions
G63	Tapping with compensating chuck			G63 Z… F… S… M…
G74	Reference point approach			G74 X=0 Y=0 Z=0; separate block, (machine axis identifier!)
G75	Fixed point approach			G75 X=0 Y=0 Z=0; separate block, (machine axis identifier!)
G147	SAR – Approach with a straight line			G147 G41 DISR=… DISCL=… FAD=… F… X… Y… Z…
G148	SAR – Retract with a straight line			G148 G40 DISR=… DISCL=… FAD=… F… X… Y… Z…

What is the significance of the address G247?

G247 is the address for SAR – Approach with a quadrant.

What information is provided for programming G247?

The programming information for G247 is G41 DISR=… DISCL=… FAD=… F… X… Y… Z…

What is the significance of the address G248?

G248 is the address for SAR – Retract with a quadrant.

What information is provided for programming G248?

The programming information for G248 is G40 DISR=… DISCL=… FAD=… F… X… Y… Z…

What is the significance of the address G347?

G347 is the address for SAR – Approach with a semicircle.

What information is provided for programming G347?

The programming information for G347 is G41 DISR=… DISCL=… FAD=… F… X… Y… Z…

What is the significance of the address G348?

G348 is the address for SAR – Retract with a semicircle.

What information is provided for programming G348?

The programming information for G348 is G40 DISR=… DISCL=… FAD=… F… X… Y… Z…

What is TRANS?

TRANS is programmable translation.

What information is provided for programming TRANS?

TRANS is programmed as follows: TRANS X… Y… Z…; separate block.

What is ROT?

ROT is programmable rotation.

What information is provided for programming ROT?

ROT is programmed as follows: ROT RPL=… ; rotation in the current plane G17 to G19, separate block.

What is SCALE?

SCALE is a programmable scaling factor.

What information is provided for programming SCALE?

SCALE is programmed as follows: SCALE X… Y… Z… ; scaling factor in the direction of the specified axis, separate block.

What is MIRROR?

MIRROR is programmable mirroring.

What information is provided for programming MIRROR?

MIRROR is programmed as follows: MIRROR X0; coordinate axis whose direction is changed, separate block.

What is ATRANS?

ATRANS is an additive translation, programming.

What information is provided for programming ATRANS?

ATRANS is programmed as follows: ATRANS X… Y… Z… ; separate block.

What is AROT?

AROT is additive programmable rotation.

What information is provided for programming AROT?

AROT is programmed as follows: AROT RPL=… ; rotation in the current plane G17 to G19, separate block.

What is ASCALE?

ASCALE is an additive programmable scaling factor.

What information is provided for programming ASCALE?

ASCALE is programmed as follows: ASCALE X… Y… Z…; scaling factor in the direction of the specified axis, separate block.

What is AMIRROR?

AMIRROR is additive programmable mirroring.

What information is provided for programming AMIRROR?

AMIRROR is programmed as follows: AMIRROR X0 ; coordinate axis whose direction is changed, separate block.

What is G110?

G110 is the pole specification relative to the last programmed setpoint position.

What information is provided for programming G110?

G110 is programmed as follows: G110 X… Y… ; Pole specification, Cartesian, e.g.: for G17 G110 RP=… AP=… ; Pole specification, polar, separate block.

What is G111?

G111 is the pole specification relative to the origin of the current workpiece coordinate system.

What information is provided for programming G111?

G111 is programmed as follows: G111 X… Y… ; Pole specification, Cartesian, e.g.: for G17 G111 RP=… AP=… ; Pole specification, polar, separate block.

What is G112?

G112 is the pole specification, relative to the last valid POLE.

What information is provided for programming G112?

G112 is programmed as follows: G112 X… Y… ; Pole specification, Cartesian, e.g.: for G17 G112 RP=… AP=… ; Pole specification, polar, separate block.

What is the significance of the address G17?

G17 designates the X/Y plane.

What information is provided for programming G17?

G17 is programmed as follows: G17 … ; Vertical axis on this plane is tool length.

What is the significance of the address G18?

G18 designates the Z/X plane.

What is the significance of the address G19?

G19 designates the Y/Z plane.

What is the significance of the address G40?

G40 turns tool radius compensation OFF.

What is the significance of the address G41?

G41 turns on tool radius compensation to the left of the contour.

What is the significance of the address G42?

G42 turns on tool radius compensation to the right of the contour.

What is the significance of the address G500?

G500 turns the settable work offset OFF.

What is the significance of the address G54?

G54 turns on the 1st settable work offset.

What is the significance of the address G55?

G55 turns on the 2nd settable work offset.

What is the significance of the address G56?

G56 turns on the 3rd settable work offset.

What is the significance of the address G57?

G57 turns on the 4th settable work offset.

What is the significance of the address G58?

G58 turns on the 5th settable work offset.

What is the significance of the address G59?

G59 turns on the 6th settable work offset.

What is the significance of the address G53?

G53 is for the non-modal skipping of the settable work offset.

What is the significance of the address G153?

G153 is for the non-modal skipping of the settable work offset including the base frame.

What is the significance of the address G60?

G60 turns on the exact stop.

What is the significance of the address G64?

G64 turns on continuous-path mode.

What is the significance of the address G62?

G62 turns on corner deceleration at inside corners when the tool radius offset is active (G41, G42). Only in conjunction with continuous-path mode.

What information is provided for programming G62?

G62 is programmed as follows: G62 Z… G1.

What is the significance of the address G9?

G9 turns on the non-modal exact stop.

What is the significance of the address G601?

G601 turns on the exact stop window, fine, with G60, G9.

What is the significance of the address G602?

G602 turns on the exact stop window, coarse, with G60, G9.

What is the significance of the address G621?

G621 turns on corner deceleration at all corners. Only in conjunction with continuous-path mode.

What information is provided for programming G621?

G621 is programmed as follows: G621 AIDS=…

What is the significance of the address G70?

G70 turns on the inch dimension data input.

What is the significance of the address G71?

G71 turns on the metric dimension data input.

What is the significance of the address G700?

G700 turns on the inch dimension data input; also for feedrate F.

What is the significance of the address G710?

G710 turns on the metric dimension data input; also for feedrate F.

What is the significance of the address G90?

G90 turns on absolute dimension data input.

What is the significance of the address G91?

G91 turns on incremental dimension data input.

What is the significance of the address G94?

G94 sets the feed F in mm/min.

What is the significance of the address G95?

G95 sets the feedrate F in mm/spindle revolutions.

What is the significance of the address CFC?

CFC turns on feedrate override with circle ON.

What is the significance of the address CFTCP?

CFTCP turns the feedrate override OFF.

What is the significance of the address G450?

G450 turns on the transition circle.

What is the significance of the address G451?

G451 turns on point of intersection.

What is the significance of the address BRISK?

BRISK turns on jerking path acceleration.

What is the significance of the address SOFT?

SOFT turns on jerk-limited path acceleration.

What is the significance of the address FFWOF?

FFWOF turns feedforward control OFF.

What is the significance of the address FFWON?

FFWON turns feedforward control ON.

What is the significance of the address EXTCALL?

EXTCALL executes the external subprogram. Reload the program from HMI in “Execution from external source” mode.

What is the significance of the address G340?

G340 turns on approach and retraction in space (SAR).

What is the significance of the address G341?

G341 turns on approach and retraction in the plane (SAR).

What is the significance of the address G290?

G290 turns on SIEMENS mode.

What is the significance of the address G291?

G291 turns on external mode.

What is the significance of the address H?

H is for H function.

What value assignments are there for H?

The value assignments for H are H0= to H9999= H function ± 0.0000001 … 9999 9999 (8 decimal places) or with a specification of an exponent: ± (10-300 … 10+300 ).

What information is provided for programming H?

H is programmed as follows: Value transfer to the PLC; meaning defined by the machine manufacturer H0=… H9999=… e.g.: H7=23.456.

What is the significance of the address I?

I is for interpolation parameters.

What value assignments are there for I?

The value assignments for I are ±0.001 … 99 999.999 Thread: 0.001 … 2000.000.

What information is provided for programming I?

I is programmed as follows: Belongs to the X axis; meaning dependent on G2, G3 ->circle center or G33, G331, G332 -> thread pitch See G2, G3, G33, G331 and G332.

What is the significance of the address J?

J is for interpolation parameters.

What value assignments are there for J?

The value assignments for J are ±0.001 … 99 999.999 Thread: 0.001 … 2000.000.

What information is provided for programming J?

J is programmed as follows: Belongs to the Y axis; otherwise, as with I See G2, G3, G33, G331, and G332.

What is the significance of the address K?

K is for interpolation parameters.

What value assignments are there for K?

The value assignments for K are ±0.001 … 99 999.999 Thread: 0.001 … 2000.000.

What information is provided for programming K?

K is programmed as follows: Belongs to the Z axis; otherwise, as with I See G2, G3, G33, G331, and G332.

What is the significance of the address I1=?

I1= is for the intermediate point for circular interpolation.

What value assignments are there for I1=?

The value assignments for I1= are ±0.001 … 99 999.999.

What information is provided for programming I1=?

I1= is programmed as follows: Belongs to the X axis; specification for circular interpolation with CIP See CIP.

What is the significance of the address J1=?

J1= is for the intermediate point for circular interpolation.

What value assignments are there for J1=?

The value assignments for J1= are ±0.001 … 99 999.999.

What information is provided for programming J1=?

J1= is programmed as follows: Belongs to the Y axis; specification for circular interpolation with CIP See CIP.

What is the significance of the address K1=?

K1= is for the intermediate point for circular interpolation.

What value assignments are there for K1=?

The value assignments for K1= are ±0.001 … 99 999.999.

What information is provided for programming K1=?

K1= is programmed as follows: Belongs to the Z axis; specification for circular interpolation with CIP See CIP.

What is the significance of the address L?

L is for the subroutine; name and call.

What value assignments are there for L?

The value assignments for L are 7 decimals; integer only, no sign.

What information is provided for programming L?

L is programmed as follows: Instead of a free name, it is also possible to select L1 …L9999999; this also calls the subroutine (UP) in a separate block. Please note: L0001 is not always equal to L1. The name “LL6” is reserved for the tool change subroutine. L781; separate block.

What is the significance of the address M?

M is for the additional function.

What value assignments are there for M?

The value assignments for M are 0 … 99 only integer, no sign.

What information is provided for programming M?

M is programmed as follows: For example, for initiating switching actions, such as “coolant ON”, a maximum of five M functions per block. M…

What is the significance of the address M0?

M0 is for programmed stop.

What information is provided for programming M0?

M0 is programmed as follows: The machining is stopped at the end of a block containing M0; to continue, press the following key:.

What is the significance of the address M1?

M1 is for optional stop.

What information is provided for programming M1?

M1 is programmed as follows: As with M0, but the stop is only performed if a special signal (Program control: “M01”) is present.

What is the significance of the address M2?

M2 is for the end of the main program with a return to the beginning of the program.

What information is provided for programming M2?

M2 is programmed as follows: Can be found in the last block of the processing sequence.

What is the significance of the address M30?

M30 is for the end of the program (as M2).

What information is provided for programming M30?

M30 is programmed as follows: Can be found in the last block of the processing sequence.

What is the significance of the address M17?

M17 is for the end of the subroutine.

What information is provided for programming M17?

M17 is programmed as follows: Can be found in the last block of the processing sequence.

What is the significance of the address M3?

M3 turns on CW rotation of the spindle.

What is the significance of the address M4?

M4 turns on CCW rotation of the spindle.

What is the significance of the address M5?

M5 turns on the spindle stop.

What is the significance of the address M6?

M6 is for tool change.

What information is provided for programming M6?

M6 is programmed as follows: Only if activated with M6 via the machine control panel; otherwise, change directly using the T command.

What is the significance of the address M40?

M40 turns on the automatic gear stage changeover.

What is the significance of the addresses M41 to M45?

M41 to M45 are for gear stages 1 to 5.

What is the significance of the address M19?

M19 is for spindle positioned at 0 degrees.

What is the significance of the address M70?

M70 switches the spindle to the axis mode.

What is the significance of the remaining M functions?

The remaining M functions’ functionality is not defined by the control system and can therefore be used by the machine manufacturer freely.

What is the significance of the address N?

N is for the block number – subblock.

What value assignments are there for N?

The value assignments for N are 0 … 9999 9999 only integer, no sign.

What information is provided for programming N?

N is programmed as follows: Can be used to identify blocks with a number; is written at the beginning of a block N20 …

What is the significance of the address ‘:’?

‘:’ is for the block number of a main block.

What value assignments are there for ‘:’?

The value assignments for ‘:’ are 0 … 9999 9999 only integer, no sign.

What information is provided for programming ‘:’?

‘:’ is programmed as follows: Special block identification, used instead of N… ; such a block should contain all instructions for a complete subsequent machining step. :20 …

What is the significance of the address P?

P is for the number of subroutine passes.

What value assignments are there for P?

The value assignments for P are 1 … 9999 only integer, no sign.

What information is provided for programming P?

P is programmed as follows: Is used if the subroutine is run several times and is contained in the same block as the call N10 L781 P… ; separate block N10 L871 P3 ; three cycles.

What is the significance of the addresses R0 to R299?

R0 to R299 are for arithmetic parameters.

What value assignments are there for R0 to R299?

The value assignments for R0 to R299 are ± 0.0000001 … 9999 9999 (8 decimal places) or with a specification of an exponent: ± (10-300 … 10+300).

What information is provided for programming R0 to R299?

R0 to R299 is programmed as follows: R1=7.9431 R2=4 with the specification of an exponent: R1=-1.9876EX9; R1=-1 987 600 000.

What are the arithmetic functions?

In addition to the 4 basic arithmetic functions using the operands + – * /, there are the following arithmetic functions:

SIN( ) Sine Degrees R1=SIN(17.35)
COS() Cosine Degrees R2=COS(R3)
TAN() Tangent Degrees R4=TAN(R5)
ASIN() Arc sine R10=ASIN(0.35) ; R10: 20.487 degrees
ACOS() Arc cosine R20=ACOS(R2) ; R20: … Degrees
ATAN2( , ) Arctangent2 The angle of the sum vector is calculated from 2 vectors standing vertically one on another. The 2nd vector specified is always used for angle reference. Result in the range: -180 to +180 degrees R40=ATAN2(30.5,80.1) ; R40: 20.8455 degrees
SQRT() Square root R6=SQRT(R7)
POT() Square R12=POT(R13)
ABS() Absolute value R8=ABS(R9)
TRUNC() Truncate to integer R10=TRUNC(R11)
LN() Natural logarithm R12=LN(R9)
EXP() Exponential function R13=EXP(R1)

What is the significance of the address RET?

RET is for subroutine end.

What information is provided for programming RET?

RET is programmed as follows: Used instead of M2 – to maintain the continuous-path control mode RET ; separate block.

What is the significance of the address S…?

S… is for spindle speed.

What value assignments are there for S…?

The value assignments for S… are 0.001 … 99 999.999 Unit of measurement of the spindle speed rpm.

What information is provided for programming S…?

S… is programmed as follows: S…

What is the significance of the address S?

S is for dwell time in block with G4.

What value assignments are there for S?

The value assignments for S are 0.001 … 99 999.999 Dwell time in spindle revolutions.

What information is provided for programming S?

S is programmed as follows: G4 S… ; separate block.

What is the significance of the address T?

T is for tool number.

What value assignments are there for T?

The value assignments for T are 1 … 32 000 only integer, no sign.

What information is provided for programming T?

T is programmed as follows: The tool change can be performed either directly using the T command or only with M6. This can be set in the machine data. T…

What is the significance of the address X?

X is for Axis.

What value assignments are there for X?

The value assignments for X are ±0.001 … 99 999.999.

What information is provided for programming X?

X is programmed as follows: Positional data X…

What is the significance of the address Y?

Y is for Axis.

What value assignments are there for Y?

The value assignments for Y are ±0.001 … 99 999.999.

What information is provided for programming Y?

Y is programmed as follows: Positional data Y…

What is the significance of the address Z?

Z is for Axis.

What value assignments are there for Z?

The value assignments for Z are ±0.001 … 99 999.999.

What information is provided for programming Z?

Z is programmed as follows: Positional data Z…

What is AC?

AC is for absolute coordinate.

What information is provided for programming AC?

AC is programmed as follows: The dimension can be specified for the end or center point of a certain axis, irrespective of G91. N10 G91 X10 Z=AC(20) ;X – incremental dimension, Z – absolute dimension.

What is ACC[axis]?

ACC[axis] is for percentage acceleration override.

What value assignments are there for ACC[axis]?

The value assignments for ACC[axis] are 1 … 200, integer.

What information is provided for programming ACC[axis]?

ACC[axis] is programmed as follows: Acceleration override for an axis or spindle; specified as a percentage N10 ACC[X]=80 ;for the X axis 80% N20 ACC[S]=50; for the spindle: 50%.

What is ACP?

ACP is for absolute coordinate; approach position in the positive direction (for rotary axis, spindle).

What information is provided for programming ACP?

ACP is programmed as follows: It is also possible to specify the dimensions for the end point of a rotary axis with ACP(…) irrespective of G90/G91; also applies to spindle positioning N10 A=ACP(45.3) ;approach absolute position of the A axis in the positive direction N20 SPOS=ACP(33.1) ;position spindle.

What is ACN?

ACN is for absolute coordinate; approach position in the negative direction (for rotary axis, spindle).

What information is provided for programming ACN?

ACN is programmed as follows: It is also possible to specify the dimensions for the end point of a rotary axis with ACN(…) irrespective of G90/G91; also applies to spindle positioning N10 A=ACN(45.3) ;approach absolute position of the A axis in the negative direction N20 SPOS=ACN(33.1) ;position spindle.

What is ANG?

ANG is for the Angle for the specification of a straight line for the contour definition.

What value assignments are there for ANG?

The value assignments for ANG are ±0.00001 … 359.99999.

What information is provided for programming ANG?

ANG is programmed as follows: Specified in degrees; one possibility of specifying a straight line when using G0 or G1 if only one end-point coordinate of the plane is known or if the complete end point is known with contour ranging over several blocks N10 G1 G17 X… Y… N11 X… ANG=… or contour over several blocks: N10 G1 G17 X… Y… N11 ANG=… N12 X… Y… ANG=…

What is AP?

AP is for polar angle.

What value assignments are there for AP?

The value assignments for AP are 0 … ±359.99999.

What information is provided for programming AP?

AP is programmed as follows: Specification in degrees, traversing in polar coordinates, definition of the pole; in addition: Polar radius RP See G0, G1, G2; G3, G110, G111, G112.

What is AR?

AR is for aperture angle for circular interpolation.

What value assignments are there for AR?

The value assignments for AR are 0.00001 … 359.99999.

What information is provided for programming AR?

AR is programmed as follows: Specified in degrees; one possibility of defining the circle when using G2/G3 See G2, G3.

What is CALL?

CALL is for indirect cycle call.

What information is provided for programming CALL?

CALL is programmed as follows: Special form of the cycle call; no parameter transfer; the name of the cycle is stored in a variable; only intended for cycle-internal use N10 CALL VARNAME ; variable name.

What is CHF?

CHF is for chamfer; general use.

What value assignments are there for CHF?

The value assignments for CHF are 0.001 … 99 999.999.

What information is provided for programming CHF?

CHF is programmed as follows: Inserts a chamfer of the specified chamfer length between two contour blocks N10 X… Y… CHF=… N11 X… Y…

What is CHR?

CHR is for chamfer; in the contour definition.

What value assignments are there for CHR?

The value assignments for CHR are 0.001 … 99 999.999.

What information is provided for programming CHR?

CHR is programmed as follows: Inserts a chamfer of the specified side length between two contour blocks N10 X… Y… CHR=… N11 X… Y…

What is CR?

CR is the radius for circular interpolation.

What value assignments are there for CR?

The value assignments for CR are 0.010 … 99 999.999 Negative sign – for selecting the circle: greater than semi-circle.

What information is provided for programming CR?

CR is programmed as follows: One possibility of defining a circle when using G2/G3 See G2, G3.

What is COMPCAD?

COMPCAD turns the compressor ON: Optimum surface quality for CAD programs.

What information is provided for programming COMPCAD?

COMPCAD is programmed as follows: Effective: Modal COMPCAD; separate block.

What is COMPCURV?

COMPCURV turns the compressor ON: Polynomials with constant curvature.

What information is provided for programming COMPCURV?

COMPCURV is programmed as follows: Effective: Modal COMPCURV; separate block.

What is COMPOF?

COMPOF turns the compressor OFF.

What information is provided for programming COMPOF?

COMPOF is programmed as follows: Effective: Modal COMPOF; separate block.

What is COMPON?

COMPON turns the compressor ON.

What information is provided for programming COMPON?

COMPON is programmed as follows: Effective: Modal COMPON; separate block.

What is the significance of the addresses CYCLE… HOLES… POCKET… SLOT…?

CYCLE… HOLES… POCKET… SLOT… are for the machining cycle.

What value assignments are there for CYCLE… HOLES… POCKET… SLOT…?

The value assignments for CYCLE… HOLES… POCKET… SLOT… are only specified values.

What information is provided for programming CYCLE… HOLES… POCKET… SLOT…?

CYCLE… HOLES… POCKET… SLOT… are programmed as follows: The call of machining cycles requires a separate block, the provided transfer parameters must be assigned values, special cycle calls are possible with additional MCALL or CALL.

CLICK HERE TO DOWNLOAD SIEMENS SINUMERIK 808D ADVANCED (01) PDF MANUAL

SIEMENS SINUMERIK 808D ADVANCED (01) PDF SUMMARY:

[I Archv.

value E

Visitors also searched:

Leave comments, questions, reviews, tips, tricks, hacks or page errors below. Account not required.Cancel reply

Discover more from Manual-Hub.com